JP2019037817A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of continuing a game while easing strain.SOLUTION: A slot machine 1 includes: a plurality of movable bodies to which a plurality of kinds of patterns are attached; start operation means for starting rotating the plurality of movable bodies; stop operation means for stopping rotation of the plurality of movable bodies; lottery means for holding a lottery regarding winning of a winning combination, based on operation of the start operation means; pattern display means for displaying a pattern combination based on a result of a lottery by the lottery means; stop control means for executing stop control of the plurality of movable bodies such that a pattern combination corresponding to the winning combination won by the lottery means is displayed on the pattern display means in operation of the stop operation means; and profit granting means for granting profit on the basis of a pattern combination displayed on the pattern display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 89

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a drum-type gaming machine (also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

  The conventional drum-type gaming machine rotates a plurality of reels, each of which has a plurality of symbols, based on the player's start operation, and stops the plurality of reels based on the player's stop operation. Let Then, when stopping the reels, the stop of the plurality of reels is controlled so as to be the symbol combination based on the winning combination won by the internal lottery. When the plurality of reels are stopped, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-34720 A

  However, in the conventional roll-to-roll type gaming machine, there is a problem that the player has to continue the game while always tense whether or not the winning combination is won every time to play the game.

  Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing the game while alleviating this kind of tension.

  In order to achieve the above object, the present invention executes a lottery for a winning combination based on the execution of a predetermined operation, and a gaming machine in which a unit game is repeated in which a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery is displayed. A plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols, start operation means for starting rotation of the plurality of rotation bodies, and a lottery for winning a prize when the start operation means is operated When the plurality of rotating bodies are stopped based on the operation of the lottery means for executing the step, the stop operation means for stopping the plurality of rotating bodies in rotation, and the stop operation means being operated, Based on the symbol display means for displaying symbol combinations based on the winning combinations obtained by the lottery and the symbol combinations displayed based on the winning combinations selected by the lottery means, a game medium is given as a bonus Winning winning feature An awarding means, a gaming state control means for controlling to any gaming state of a plurality of gaming states including a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the normal gaming state, and the start operation means being operated At the time of winning the special game by the different lottery means capable of executing whether or not the special game is to be played as a different lottery different from the lottery by the lottery means, and the different lottery by the different lottery means Before the end of the game, the different lottery result display means which can display a predetermined symbol combination not included in the symbol combination based on the winning combination by the operation of the stop operation means, and the difference lottery in the current unit game Even when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the result display means, the gaming state controlled by the gaming state control means is not changed in the next unit game Characterized in that it and a gaming state maintaining means for lifting.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of continuing the game while alleviating tension.

It is a disassembled perspective view of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door type front member. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door type front member. It is a Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. It is Z1 part enlarged view of FIG. 4 which shows the state to which the connector holder was moved. It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine which shows the state which abbreviate | omitted the door type front member. (A) is a Z2 part enlarged view of FIG. 7, (b) is a Z2 part enlarged view of FIG. 7 which shows the state to which the connector holder was moved. It is an enlarged view which shows the principal part of Fig.8 (a). It is a cross-sectional view of the slot machine principal part which shows the back board side. It is an exploded perspective view of a case member. It is the perspective view which looked at the case member from the back. (A), (b) is a perspective view of the principal part of a case member explaining the temporarily fixed state of a connector holder. It is a disassembled perspective view of a wiring relay member. It is the front view which abbreviate | omitted the cover body of the wiring relay member. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is an exploded perspective view of a connector holder. It is a perspective view of a stopper which stops a case member. It is a perspective view of the stopper which shows another form. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the guide structure of a case member. It is a fragmentary perspective view of a symbol variation display which shows other forms of a handle. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the relation between a case member and the stopper by the side of an outside main part. It is sectional drawing of the principal part which shows the relationship between a wiring window and the reel of a symbol variation display apparatus. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a slot machine upper part. It is a perspective view which abbreviate | omits a medal discharge | release apparatus and shows the lower half of a slot machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of FIG. FIG. 18 is a rear view of the heat release port viewed from the back side of the slot machine. FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device. It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the power supply device from the bottom. The other form is shown and it is a principal part sectional view of a side plate of an outside main part, and a power supply device. It is a schematic sectional drawing of the illuminating device which shows another form. It is a perspective view of the door type front member which disassembles and shows a transparent plate and a light emission unit. It is a perspective view of a door type front member which disassembles and shows a transparent board. It is a sectional view equivalent to a Drawing 33A-A line of a door type front member equipped with a transparent board. It is an exploded and assembled perspective view of a hinge fitting. It is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows a door type front member. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the door type front member in the middle of opening. It is the perspective view seen from the back which shows the upper half part of a door-shaped front member. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the coupler vertically. It is an important section top view of the door type front member which shows the example of other hinge fittings. It is a cross-sectional top view of the principal part which shows the middle of opening of the door-shaped front member of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the image display body and frame member in a model unit. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the door type | formula front member, having connected the coupler. It is the expanded view which expand | deployed planarly the symbol row of a reel belt. It is an enlarged view of the symbol display window 401 part. It is the schematic which shows roughly the structure of the various mechanical elements, electronic devices, the operation member etc. with which the slot machine is equipped. It is a corresponding | compatible table which shows the combination aspect of each winning combination and the corresponding symbol, and the game privilege. It is a figure showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and the number of payouts of a medal. FIG. 52 is a view continued from FIG. 51, showing a combination of symbols corresponding to each condition device and the number of medals paid out. It is a figure which continues from FIG. 52, and is a figure which shows the number of payouts of the combination of the symbol corresponding to each condition apparatus, and a medal | token. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the basic one game in a slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of starting processing. It is a hit value determination table of extraction random value. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of reel stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process sequence of determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of BB game start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of BB game end judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of RB game start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of RB game end judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of ART game start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of ART game end judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows start processing of a special game state. It is an example of a pattern setting / selection table of reel special effects. It is a reel special effect execution control table of pattern 1 to pattern 3 of reel special effect. It is an execution control table of pattern 4 of reel special effects. It is a flowchart for performing the pattern 4 of reel special effects. It is an example of the symbol combination displayed in the special gaming state. It is a figure for demonstrating the setting of the priority of a condition apparatus. It is a list which shows an example of the command transmitted to the production control board from the main board. It is a flowchart for demonstrating penalty processing. It is a timing chart of conventional freeze production. It is a timing chart of freeze production of the present invention. It is a transition diagram of the reel pattern which shows the specific example of specific freeze production. It is a lottery table of the freeze production pattern for the stop design of the winning combination. When the reel to be re-moved by the player is selected, it is a lottery table in the case where the stop symbol pattern of the winning combination is A, B, C. It is a distribution table for determining the degree of the additional privilege of freeze production. It is a figure explaining the simulation picture of the front of the magazine of a rotary type gun. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (non-specified part correspondence) by a bell symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination (specific-piece corresponding | compatible) by a bell symbol. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination containing a common symbol arrangement | sequence. It is a flowchart for a special game. It is an example of a lottery table for special games. 5 is a flowchart of reel stop control for a special game. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of stop control of a reel. It is an example of the lottery table of the condition device. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure of the basic one game in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a processing procedure of simulated game processing. 6 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of a first simulated gaming process. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure of the second simulated game processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the lottery table regarding a game delay lottery.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described by taking a slot machine as a gaming machine as an example with reference to the drawings. 1 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine, FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the slot machine showing the door-shaped front member omitted, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine, and FIG. 4 is the door-shaped front member omitted 5 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4, FIG. 6 is an enlarged view of a portion Z1 in FIG. 4 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved, and FIG. 7 is a door-shaped front member 8 (a) is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7; FIG. 8 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion Z2 in FIG. 7 showing a state in which the connector holder is moved; 9 is an enlarged view showing the main part of FIG. 8 (a), FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the main part of the slot machine showing the back plate side, FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the case member, and FIG. 13 (a) and 13 (b) show the temporarily fixed state of the connector holder. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the wiring relay member, FIG. 15 is a front view with the cover of the wiring relay member omitted, FIGS. 16 and 17 are exploded perspective views of the connector holder, 18 is a perspective view of the stopper for stopping the case member, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the stopper showing another embodiment, FIGS. 20 and 21 are sectional views of the main parts showing the guide structure of the case member, and FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the main part showing the relationship between the case member and the stopper on the outer body side, and FIG. 24 is the relationship between the wiring window and the reel of the symbol change display device. 25 is a longitudinal sectional view of the upper part of the slot machine, FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the lower half of the slot machine with the medal discharging device omitted and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Figure 28 is the back of the slot machine FIG. 29 is a partial sectional front view of the slot machine showing the power supply device, FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing the power supply device as viewed from below, FIG. 31 shows another form 32 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a lighting device showing another embodiment, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view of a door-shaped front member showing an exploded view of a transparent plate and a light emitting unit, FIG. 34 is a perspective view of the door-shaped front member shown by disassembling the transparent plate, FIG. 35 is a sectional view corresponding to FIG. 33A-A of the door-shaped front member fitted with the transparent plate, and FIG. Fig. 37 is a diagram showing a chain of hinge fittings, Fig. 38 is a cross sectional plan view of the main part showing the door type front member, and Fig. 39 is a cross sectional plan view of the main part showing the door type front member in the process of opening 40 is a perspective view seen from the back side showing the upper half of the door-shaped front member; FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member showing another example of the hinge fitting, and FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional plan view of the main part of the door-shaped front member shown in FIG. FIG. 44 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front opening / closing member is opened in the model unit, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door-shaped front member is opened while the coupler is connected.

[1. Slot machine]
The slot machine 1 of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, can be pivoted in the form of a horizontally opened door with a box-shaped outer body 100 having an open front and a rotating shaft 100a on the front of the outer body 100. A door-shaped front member 200 attached to the case, a symbol variation display device 300 for varying a plurality of symbols by a driving means, a case member 400 detachably attachable to the outer main body 100 and having an opening 401 on the front And an image display body 500 for displaying an image of

[2. Outer body]
As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the outer body 100 has the side plates 102, 102 attached to the left and right of the bottom plate 101 and the top plate 103 installed on the top of the side plates 102, 102. The back plate 104 is fixed to the back of the frame and formed in a box shape that is open only at the front. The left and right side plates 102 are shaped like a trapezoid in which the front edge is slightly inclined in a rearward inclined state, so that the opening of the outer body 100 has a rearward inclined state. In addition, a plurality (in the embodiment, the top board 103 in a region facing the upper cross bar 600 of the gaming machine installation island (see FIG. 25 imaginary line) in the state installed in the gaming machine installation island (not shown). 4) through holes 132, 132...

[2-1. Outer body-partition plate]
In the outer main body 100, a shelf plate-shaped partition plate 105 is provided substantially at the center of the height. The partition plate 105 is made of metal, and as shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. The vertical mounting piece 108 formed at the rear end is fixed to the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A cylindrical projection (not shown) is formed on the mounting piece 108 at the rear end of the partition plate 105 by burring (metal processing to raise a short cylindrical projection while expanding the hole diameter of the lower hole with a punch) The cylindrical projections are inserted into small holes (not shown) pre-processed in the back plate 104 of the outer body 100 and positioned. Further, an opening 109 for wiring is formed between the innermost portions on both sides of the partition plate 105 and the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100.

[2-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space]
In the space below the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, a medal emitting device 110 for releasing a medal serving as a game medium to a medal receiving tray 201 at the lower front of the door-shaped front member 200; An auxiliary storage box for medals 111, which stores medals that overflow, and a power supply device 112 are provided.

[2-1-1-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-medal discharge device]
The medal discharging device 110 is a device main body 110a having a built-in driving means attached with a hopper 110b for storing medals, and a medal discharge port 110c is provided on the front surface of the device main body 110a. Certain medals are sent out one by one toward the outlet 110c by the operation of the drive means. Further, the hopper 110b is provided with an overflow weir 110d for discharging the overflowed medals, and the above-described medal auxiliary storage box 111 faces below the tip end of the overflow weir 110d. In addition, as the medal release mechanism of the medal release device 110, any known mechanism may be adopted at present, and therefore the detailed description will be omitted.

[2-1-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply device]
As shown in FIGS. 26 to 30, the power supply device 112 is attached to the inner corner portion where the three members of the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100, the left side plate 102 facing the front, and the back plate 104 are orthogonal. There is. The power supply device 112 is a component for supplying electricity to the electric components such as the medal discharge device 110 and easily generating heat. Therefore, heat is dissipated to the mounting portion of the power supply device 112 on the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mouth 104a is opened.

  The device case 112 a of the power supply device 112 is formed of transparent synthetic resin. By doing this, since the inside of the device case 112a can be seen, it is easy to find an illegal work on the substrate 112s (see FIG. 30) and the like of the power supply device 112. The device case 112 a includes an upper surface plate 112 b covering the upper surface, a back surface plate 112 c facing the back surface plate 104 of the outer body 100, a front surface plate 112 d covering the opposite side of the back surface plate 112 c, and the inside of the slot machine 1. It is formed of a side plate 112e that covers the side to be headed, an inclined plate 112f that covers the boundary between the top plate 112b and the side plate 112e in a chamfered form, and a bottom plate 112r (see FIG. 30) that covers the bottom. On the other hand, the surface of the device case 112a on the side facing the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is not covered and is in an open state, but this open surface is attached to the outer main body 100 by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100. It is blocked.

  The side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 is provided with a convex portion 102a as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 to form a stepped guard portion 102b, and an upper surface plate 112b of the device case 112a is formed under the guard portion 102b. It is a specification that makes one side dive. As a result, even if one surface of the device case 112a is not covered, the joint portion of the device case 112a and the side plate 102 is closed by the guard portion 102b, so that foreign matter can not be inserted. FIG. 31 shows another embodiment in which the guard portion 102b is in the form of a groove. In this example, the edge of the top plate 112b of the device case 112a is slightly protruded toward the side plate 102, and the tip of the guard portion 102b is shown. It is fitted in the groove.

  As described above, when the side of the device case 112a of the power supply device 112 in contact with the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 has an open structure without a cover and is closed by the side plate 102 during use, the inside of the device case 112a Since it is easy to assemble the substrate 112s etc. using the open surface and there is no need to cover the open surface after the substrate 112s etc. is installed in the device case 112a, the workability is improved.

  A large number of vent holes 112g, 112g, ... are formed in the upper surface plate 112b, the side surface plate 112e, the inclined surface plate 112f, the rear surface plate 112c, and the bottom surface plate 112r of the device case 112a to prevent heat from accumulating inside. . The device case 112a is raised on an elevated floor type by legs 112h, 112h ... provided at the bottom, and a ventilation space 112i is formed between the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a and the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100. Accordingly, lower-layer relatively cool air can be introduced into the device case 112a from the ventilation space 112i through the vent holes 112g, 112g... Of the bottom plate 112r. Since the ventilation space 112i of the embodiment is in communication with the heat radiation port 104a of the outer main body 100, cold air on the back of the machine can be introduced into the ventilation space 112i. The height of the leg 112h and the heat radiation port 104a can be obtained by forming an inverted L-shaped step 112j (see FIG. 30) for raising the ventilation space 112i at the boundary between the back plate 112c and the bottom plate 112r of the device case 112a. Even if there is a gap in height, the ventilation space 112i can be communicated with the heat radiation port 104a.

[2-1-1-2-1. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-fixed]
The power supply device 112 includes a mounting piece 112k which is perpendicular to one side of the front plate 112d of the device case 112a, and a protrusion which protrudes from the rear plate 112c of the device case 112a toward the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 It is fixed to the outer main body 100 by the combination of 112 m and the heat radiation port 104 a opened in the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100.

  That is, the outline of the heat radiation port 104a is formed smaller than the outline of the back surface plate 112c of the device case 112a, so the power supply 112 strikes the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 and does not pass through the heat radiation port 104a. Further, a protrusion 112m protruding from the rear surface plate 112c of the device case 112a is at a position inscribed in the heat dissipation port 104a, and a horizontal protrusion inscribed in the upper side of the heat dissipation port 104a to resist the floating operation of the power supply device 112. It comprises a piece 112m-1 and a vertical piece 112m-2 which is inscribed in the longitudinal side of the heat radiation port 104a to resist the lateral movement of the power supply device 112. Therefore, simply by pushing the power supply device 112 along the inner surface of the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 and inserting the protrusion 112m into the heat radiation port 104a, the upward direction (lifting) of the rear surface (rear side) of the device case 112a Fixing in the right direction (roll over) is completed. Of course, the movement of the power supply device 112 is restricted by the bottom plate 101 of the outer main body 100 in the lower direction and by the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 in the left direction in FIG. The movement of the power supply 112 can be completely restricted except in the pulling direction to the front side by a simple operation of simply inserting the protrusion 112m.

  On the other hand, a plurality of through holes 112p for screws are bored in the attachment piece 112k protruding from the front plate 112d, and fixed to the side plate 102 of the outer main body 100 through wood screws 112q through at least one of the through holes 112p. As a result, the movement of the power supply device 112 is also restricted in the direction in which the power supply device 112 is pulled toward the front, so that the power supply device 112 can be reliably fixed to the outer main body 100 with a single wood screw 112q.

[2-1-1-2-2. Outer body-partition plate-lower space-power supply-power cord]
A power supply cord (not shown) for receiving supply of electricity from the outside is connected to the power supply device 112. And although the bulging part was conventionally provided in the side of the said heat dissipation port 104a and the said power supply cord was pulled out from there, even if it bundles a power supply cord in this position, there is a high possibility that it may slip on the ground. The slot machine 1 may turn on the power during manufacture, and at this time, it is necessary to put out the power cord outside the outer main body 100 in preparation for movement on the manufacturing line or between the lines. During the movement of the slot machine 1, the power cord may slip on the ground or may get caught under the bottom plate 101 of the slot machine 1 and pinched.

  On the other hand, the heat radiation port 104a of the embodiment extends the cord outlet port 104b from the upper side upward, and pulls out the power cord from there. Thus, a height sufficient to hang the bundled power cords in a suspended state can be secured. Therefore, the trouble of damaging the power cord accidentally in the process of manufacturing the slot machine 1 is drastically reduced.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present invention sets the power supply 112 at the inner corner portion of the outer body 100 and screws in one wood screw 112 q to complete the installation. Significant labor saving of the installation work is possible. Further, in the present invention, since fixation is completed by screwing to one surface, it is easy to visually recognize when the portion to be fixed is brought to the front (front side) of the power supply 112 in particular and can be fixed reliably. . Incidentally, conventionally, it is necessary to screw on a plurality of surfaces or members of the power supply device 112, and in particular, the screws fixed to the back plate 104 may be forgotten because they are difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, since the heat radiation port 104a is required as a cooling means of the power supply device 112, even if the heat radiation port 104a is used to fix the power supply device 112, almost no extra process or cost occurs. On the contrary, since the position of the heat radiation port 104a and the position of the power supply device 112 are made to coincide with each other for fixing, the cooling efficiency is improved. In addition, in the case where the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin as in the embodiment, the mounting protrusion 112m can be integrally formed, so that the cost is hardly incurred. Therefore, the total cost required to attach the power supply device 112 can be reduced as compared to the conventional case.

  Furthermore, in the case where the device case 112a is made of synthetic resin, there is an advantage that the leg portion 112h and the stepped portion 112j of the device case 112a useful as measures against heat generation of the power supply device 112 can be implemented with little cost.

[2-1-2. Outer body-partition plate-upper space]
On the other hand, the case member 400 is accommodated in the space above the partition plate 105 in the outer main body 100, and the inner surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 has a wiring relay member 113 as a core of wiring means described later. It is attached (see FIGS. 1 and 2), and a vent 133 for heat radiation is formed in the back plate 104 above the wiring relay member 113.

[3. Door type front member]
The front side of the door-shaped front member 200 is shown in FIG. 3 and the back side of the door-shaped front member 200 is shown in FIG. The door-shaped front member 200 has a medal receptacle 201 below the front side, and an operation unit 202 is provided substantially at the center of the front side. The operation unit 202 has an insertion slot 203 for medal insertion, and a single-sheet insertion button 205 for instructing insertion (withdrawal) of only one medal from medals stored as data in a memory of the main substrate 409 described later. Similarly, a MAX input button 206 instructing insertion of the maximum number (for example, 3) usable in one game, and a medal return for returning the medals packed in the medal selector 207 described later to the medal receiver 201 A button 208, a storage release switch 209 for inputting a storage release command (a release command by settlement) of medals stored as data in the memory of the main substrate 409, and a start lever 210 for operating the symbol variation display device 300 And three reels stopped to stop the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c of the symbol variation display device 300. Button 211a, 211b, 211c and the like are provided. Of course, the configuration of the operation unit 202 shown here is one example, and is not limited thereto. The start lever 210 corresponds to the start operation unit described in the solution means. The three reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c correspond to the plurality of stop operation units described in the solution means.

  Further, a medal selector 207 is provided on the back side of the insertion port 203, and a medallion 212 is connected to the side of the medal selector 207 and a return lever 213 is connected below. The medal selector 207 is a known switch that switches the flow path by turning on and off a built-in solenoid (not shown). When the player is in a game state waiting for the insertion of a medal from the player, Also, in the game state where the insertion of medals is refused, such as the insertion of medals exceeding the prescribed number, the flow path is set to the return rod 213 side. When the door type front member 200 is in the closed position where the door-shaped front member 200 covers the front surface of the outer main body 100, the tip end of the medal 樋 212 faces inside the hopper 110b of the medal discharging device 110. The medals flowing to the medal 樋 212 pass through to the hopper 110b. On the other hand, the return rod 213 is connected to the medal receiver 201 on the front side, and the medals flowing from the inlet 203 through the medal selector 207 to the return rod 213 return to the medal receiver 201.

[3-1. Door type front member-perspective window]
The door-shaped front member 200 is sized to cover the entire front of the outer main body 100, and the upper half of the door-shaped front member 200 is a transparent window for a game covered with a transparent plate 214a as shown in FIGS. It has become 214. The transparent window 214 and the transparent plate 214a of the embodiment are larger than usual so that the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 can be seen side by side vertically, and an image is formed by the forehead frame 216 integral with the door type front member 200. The areas of the display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 are visually divided up and down. Thus, if one transparent plate 214a is set to a size that covers both the image display 500 and the symbol variation display device 300, the arrangement of the image display 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 is vertically switched. But you can use it as it is.

[3-1-1. Door type front member-perspective window-transparent plate]
The transparent plate 214a is made of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, rubber-containing methacrylic resin excellent in impact resistance, scratch resistance, and optical properties, and in the embodiment, “Acripet (registered trademark) IR D30” manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.). Edge part 214b which bulges toward the front side with the side facing the player as the front on the peripheral edge of the three sides (right and left side and upper side) excluding the bottom side. 214b and 214b are integrally molded at the time of resin molding using a resin molding frame. When the edge member 214b is integrally molded on the periphery of the flat plate-like transparent plate 214a as described above, the transparent plate 214a is the above-described one because the edge member 214b serves as a reinforcing bar to enhance the overall strength of the transparent plate 214a. Even if it is large enough to cover both the image display body 500 and the symbol variation display device 300 as described above, bending or distortion hardly occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the edge member 214b has a shell structure (not solid but having a space inside, such as a shell having an open space), and the thickness of each portion is arbitrary. The light emitting unit 217 and, if necessary, a decorative member (not shown) having, for example, a pattern or characters on its surface are incorporated in the internal space.

  In FIG. 34, the light emitting unit 217 is illustrated as being attached to the door-shaped front member 200, but the actual light emitting unit 217 is fitted into the edge member 214b as shown in FIG. ing. Therefore, the transparent plate 214a and the light emitting unit 217 are handled as an integral part.

  The shape of the edge member 214 b is not limited to that illustrated, and can be arbitrarily changed in accordance with the design of the light emitting unit 217 or the decorative member. Moreover, the site | part which provides the edge member 214b is not limited to three sides of the periphery of the transparent plate 214a like embodiment, It is sufficient to just provide in any one side at least.

  In addition, reference numerals 218 in FIGS. 33 and 34 denote fixing members provided at left and right corner portions on the transparent plate 214a, and screws which pass through the through holes 214c (see enlarged view in FIG. 33) from the back side of the transparent plate 214a. (Not shown) it is stopped in the state of FIG. 34 fitted between the edge member 214b and the edge member 214b. The fixing member 218 serves as a decorative corner, while the through holes 200a and 214d (see the enlarged view in FIG. 33) provided at the upper corners of the door-shaped front member 200 and the transparent plate 214a. It functions as a nut that is screwed into a screw (not shown) that passes from the back side of the door-shaped front member 200, thereby fixing the transparent plate 214a to the door-shaped front member 200.

  In FIGS. 33 to 35, reference numeral 217a denotes a light emitter of the light emitting unit 217, and 217b denotes a reflecting member for supporting the light emitter 217a. As shown in FIG. 35, the reflection members 217b of the light emitting units 217 located on the left and right are set at an angle so as to reflect the light of the rod-like light emitting body 217a toward the periphery of the slot machine 1 more. In the configuration in which the light emitting unit 217 is incorporated inside the edge member 214b of the transparent plate 214a, since the light emitting body 217a can be disposed on the front side of the slot machine 1, it is like a lighthouse at the tip of a cap It is advantageous when the light is emitted towards the surroundings. In addition, the reflecting member 217b of the light emitting unit 217 located on the upper side is set to reflect more light of the light emitting body 217a (combination of the light source 217a-1 and the light guide plate 217a-2) toward the upper side of the slot machine 1. ing.

  The light emitting unit 217 having the above configuration can be turned on during a game, especially when a big hit is made, to perform an effect of appealing the occurrence of the big hit to the surroundings. As described above, by performing the rendering with a high degree of appeal to the surroundings, the player who has won the big hit can be made to pay attention, and since the line of sight of many people gives the player a sense of superiority, the game becomes more exciting. In addition, by appealing to the surroundings that a big hit has come out, it is also expected that the popularity of the model will increase and the operation rate will improve.

  The transparent plate 214a according to the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and a plate-like bottom side of the concave groove 219 (see the enlarged view in FIG. 34) provided on the back side of the door front member 200 From the front side, it is inserted obliquely and fitted into a fitting type, and in that state, the transparent plate 214a is erected to bring all the edge members 214b, 214b, 214b into contact with the front surface of the door type front member 200. It fixes by the screw 603 (refer FIG. 1) passed from the back. FIG. 35 is a cutaway view of the main part of the door-shaped front member 200 at this time, and it is apparent from FIG. 35 that, if it is assumed that the player is a foreign object from the boundary between the door-shaped front member 200 and the edge member 214b. Although there is no room for the tip of the foreign matter to cross the inside of the edge member 214b and reach the back side of the transparent plate 214a. Therefore, an excellent crime prevention effect is exhibited.

[3-2. Door type front member-lock device]
At one side of the free end side of the door-shaped front member 200, a lock device 215 which is opened and closed using a dedicated key (not shown) is provided.

[4. Design fluctuation display device]
The symbol variation display device 300 is a reel rotary display device, and for example, three reels 301a, 301b, and 301c which can be individually rotated by drive means 303 such as a motor, and the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are assembled and stored. It has a device case 302 and is known to play a game by combining a plurality of symbols (not shown) drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c.

  The device case 302 is a deformed hexagonal column except for three faces directed to the front (player) from the octagonal pillar which has been turned over, and the bottom plate 304, the top plate portion 305, and the right side in FIG. Right side plate 306, left side plate 307 on the left side, vertical rear plate 308 covering the rear surface, upper swash plate 309 provided between top plate portion 305 and rear plate 308, bottom plate 304 and rear plate 308 And a part of the arc of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c protrudes from the front of the device case 302. As shown in FIG.

  Further, the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is provided with a handle 311 which can be changed between a use possible state in which fingers can be used and a non-use state lying down on the top plate portion 305. To carry.

  As described above, the configuration in which the handle 311 which can be changed as described above is provided on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302 is closely related to the measure for increasing the strength of the case member 400. That is, in the embodiment, as described later, the reinforcing bar 402 is provided in the opening 401 of the case member 400, thereby giving the opening 401 of the case member 400 sufficient strength to make the image display body 500 cantilever. Since such reinforcing bars 402 cross the opening 401, they obviously interfere with the insertion and removal of the device case 302 into and from the case member 400. On the other hand, if the handle 311 is made variable and is lowered on the top plate portion 305 as in the embodiment, the protrusion of the handle 311 is eliminated, so that the device case 302 can pass under the reinforcing bar 402 without difficulty. Therefore, only by providing the handle 311 which can be changed as described above on the top plate portion 305 of the device case 302, it is possible to provide the reinforcing bar 402 in a direction crossing the opening 401 in the opening 401 of the case member 400. Become. Incidentally, in the case of the conventional apparatus case, since the handle protrudes from the top plate and it becomes an obstacle, there is no room for providing a reinforcing bar at the opening of the case member.

  Although the handle 311 in the embodiment is structured to swing and change between the upright use state and the inactive state, the structure in which the handle 311 can be changed between the use state and the inactive state is implemented. It is not limited to the form. For example, as shown in FIG. 22, two belts 314, 314 are cut and raised in the top plate portion 305, and made of synthetic resin or leather, for example, in the belts 314, 314. The use state where the finger can be used, such as a structure in which the band-like handle 311 provided is inserted, and the center is raised from the lowered non-use state in FIG. It may be any structure as long as it can be changed to the unused state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 11, a flange-shaped lower handle 316 is protruded from the bottom plate 304 of the device case 302 according to the embodiment, and the lower handle 316 is grasped to push the device case 302 By pulling, the case member 400 can be easily put in and out.

[5. Case member]
The case member 400 has a size substantially matching the space above the partition plate 105 of the outer main body 100, and a bottom plate 403, side plates 404 and 404 erected on both the left and right sides of the bottom plate 403, and a bottom plate 403. And a top plate 406 covering the upper surfaces of the side plates 404 and 404, and has a box shape having an opening 401 on the front surface.

  In the case member 400, the bottom plate 403 is made of metal, the side plates 404 and 404, the back plate 405, and the top plate 406 are made of synthetic resin, and the side plates 404 and 404 and the opening 401 inside the top plate 406 are metal reinforced. Members 407, 407, 407 are provided, and a metal reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 is bridged between the reinforcing members 407, 407 of the side plates 404, 404. Further, the image below the reinforcing bar 402 as an installation area of the symbol variation display device 300 and the opening 401 above the reinforcing bar 402 as an installation area of the image display body 500 The area enclosed by the case member 400 behind the display body 500 is assigned as the wiring work space 408, and the main board 409 which is the main control board is mounted on the inner wall surface of the back plate 405 of the wiring work space 408. Control boards other than the main board 409 (for example, the effect control board 510 (see FIG. 44)) are also mounted in the wiring work space 408.

  In the top plate 406 of the case member 400, skylights 443, 443 are formed as shown in FIG. The skylight portions 443 and 443 are divided into two on both sides of a reinforcing band 444 for maintaining the strength of the top plate 406, and each of the skylight portions 443 and 443 has an axis passing through the through holes 132 and 132 of the outer main body 100. In the area including the intersection point, the opening is sufficiently wider than the through holes 132, 132. However, the front side peripheral edge of the skylight portion 443 is brought close to the through hole 132 located on the front side. By doing so, the through hole 132 can be found out with reference to the periphery of the skylight portion 443. Therefore, even if the operator looks into the skylight portion 443, the position of the through hole 132 can be quickly and easily determined. Here, the skylight portion 443 also functions as the opening portion of the present invention. That is, by providing the plurality of skylights 443 as the opening on the top surface of the case member 400, it is possible to reduce the weight, and it is possible to further reduce the burden on the operator during transportation or replacement.

  As shown in FIGS. 2, 5, 6, and 12, a plurality of bosses 410 and 410 are provided on the outer surface of the rear face plate 405 of the case member 400, and the boss 410 is used as a back plate of the outer main body 100. It is fitted and positioned in boss holes 114 and 114 pre-processed in 104. The bosses 410 and 410 are provided near a wiring window 411 described later, as shown in FIGS. 2 and 5, while the boss holes 114 and 114 on the outer main body 100 side are near the wiring relay member 113. Thus, the positioning of the wiring window 411 of the case member 400 and the wiring relay member 113 of the back plate 104 becomes accurate.

  On the other hand, a recessed step 412 is formed on the bottom surface of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400 as shown in FIG. 2, and the recessed step 412 fits into the stepped portion 106 of the partition 105. The end of the recessed step 412 on the rear surface plate 405 side is provided with a tapered portion 413 directed to expand rearward, and is guided by the tapered portion 413 and the stepped portion 106 of the partition 105 and the case member 400 The fitting with the recessed portion 412 can be smoothly performed. Thus, the case member 400 is guided straight to the back of the partition plate 105 by the engagement of the recessed step portion 412 of the case member 400 and the step portion 106 of the partition plate 105. For example, as shown in FIG. A rail member 115 in the form of a recessed groove is laid or integrally pressed on the plate 105, while a wheel 414 is installed on the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the wheel 414 is rolled in the groove of the rail member 115. It is also good. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 21, the rail member 116 in a convex form is laid or integrally pressed on the partition plate 105, while ridges 415 and 415 are formed on both ends of the wheel 414 of the case member 400, The rail members 116 may be held by the wedges 415 and 415 of the wheels 414.

  Further, the case member 400 is stopped by the stopper 117 in the form of a rocking lever shown in FIGS. 1, 2, 18 and 23 in a state of being set at a predetermined position on the partition plate 105. The stopper 117 is pivotally attached to the front end of the partition plate 105 and the two fixtures 118 and 118 vertically provided on the top plate 103 as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, as shown by the solid line in FIG. In the forward direction on the partition plate 105 of the case member 400, by manually switching between an operation posture in which the case member 400 is engaged and a non-operation posture in which the case member 400 is not engaged as in FIG. Regulate the movement. If the stopper 117 is keyed as shown in FIG. 19 and engaged with the hooking portion 416 provided on the case member 400, the upward movement of the case member 400 on the partition plate 105 is also restricted. be able to.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23, the stopper 117 axially attached to the attachment 118 of the top plate 103 is located at a position facing the locking hole 442 penetrating through the side plate 404 of the case member 400 and the corner portion of the top plate 406. In the state where the case member 400 is pushed into a predetermined position, switching between the working posture and the non-working posture can be performed from the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, a wiring window 411 in the form of a long hole is formed in the back surface plate 405 of the case member 400 so as to penetrate to the back plate 104 side of the outer main body 100. The wiring window 411 corresponds to the upper swash plate 309 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 installed on the case member 400 as shown in FIGS. 4, 5 and 24 and on the lower side of the main substrate 409. Of the upper swash plate 309 (or may be thought of as a horizontally elongated triangular space 417 formed between the upper swash plate 309 and the main substrate 409). It functions as an opening connecting the plates 104.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 12, the case member 400 is provided with a shelf plate-shaped temporary fixing member 418 (hereinafter also referred to as "temporary holding shelf") at an approximately intermediate position of the height of the empty space 417. In addition, recesses 419 and 419 are formed on the outer side of the rear face plate 405 and on both sides of the wiring window 411.

  If the layout of the wiring window 411 is specified based on the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, the wiring window 411 is the reel 301a of the symbol variation display device 300 as shown in FIG. , 301b, 301c at the lower limit, ie, the height at which the lower side is placed within the range, between the horizontal plane HL passing through the rotation center of H.301b and 301c and the horizontal plane HH passing the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c. It can also be rephrased that it is arranged.

[6. Image display]
The image display body 500 is, for example, a panel-shaped unit capable of image display comprising at least a liquid crystal display (in addition to this, a plasma display, an organic EL display, etc.), and can open and close the front opening of the case member 400. It also functions as a front opening and closing member 90 (see FIG. 44) that closes to the rear. In the image display body 500, the hinge bracket 420 is attached to the reinforcing member 407 provided on the side plate 404 on the left side of the case member 400 in FIG. 11 (refer to the hatched portion in FIG. It is freely supported.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 44, on the back side of the image display body 500, an effect control board 510 is attached. Therefore, the image display body 500 such as a liquid crystal display and the effect control substrate 510 can be integrally configured, which facilitates the handling and can omit the wiring connecting the two, and the wiring in the case member 400 The complexity of the work space 408 can be suppressed. Further, when the image display body 500 is opened, the effect control substrate 510 appears to pop out from the inside of the case member 400, so that the workability with respect to the effect control substrate 510 can be significantly improved.

[6-1. Image Display-Hinge Bracket]
FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the hinge fitting 420. As shown in FIG. In addition, since the hinge fitting 420 has a structure in which the upper and lower sides are symmetrical, the upper part will be mainly described. The hinge fitting 420 includes a fixing member 420a attached to the reinforcing member 407 of the case member 400, a pivoting member 420b attached to the back side of the image display body 500 (see the broken line area 500s in FIG. 36), and the pivoting member 420b. It comprises a short link 420c and a long link 420d connecting the members 420a.

  The fixing member 420a of the hinge fitting 420 has a laterally oriented fixing piece 420e in the form of a shelf plate, one end of the long link 420d on the upper surface of the fixing piece 420e with a pin P1, and a short link on the lower surface of the fixing piece 420e. One end of 420c is rotatably pivotally attached by a pin P2. On the other hand, the pivoting member 420b of the hinge fitting 420 has a horizontally oriented bearing piece 420f in the form of a shelf plate, one end of the long link 420d on the upper surface of the bearing piece 420f with a pin P3 and the lower surface of the bearing piece 420f. One end of the short link 420c is pivotally attached by a pin P4.

  Thus, the fixed piece 420e, the bearing piece 420f, the long link 420d, the short link 420c and the pins P1 to P4 constitute a four-joint rotational chain as shown in the diagram of FIG. 37. A so-called lever mechanism is configured in which a fixed link 420 is a fixed piece 420e facing a certain axial support piece 420f. As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c), this lever mechanism causes the pivoting trajectory of the image display body 500 to approximate a pivoting trajectory centered on the rotation axis 100a of the door-shaped front surface member 200. Each pin position is set to That is, the hinge fitting 420 functions as a rotation center moving mechanism, and the rotation outer edge side of the door front member 200 and the rotation outside of the image display body 500 even if the rotation position of the door front member 200 changes. The distance to the edge side is made substantially constant.

  Note that overlapping areas 420g and 420h are set so that the long link 420d and the short link 420c overlap vertically in a state where the image display body 500 is rotated approximately 90 degrees (opened) (for example, the overlapping of the long link 420d) The region 420g is expanded in a triangular shape so as to overlap the overlapping region 420h of the short link 420c.) The pin holes 420i and 420j are formed in the overlapping regions 420g and 420h, respectively. In the pin holes 420i and 420j, the long link 420d and the short link 420c are connected by coaxially aligning both of them and inserting a rod-like locking pin (not shown), thereby locking the lever mechanism and displaying the image display It is for fixing 500 in the open position.

6-2. Image display body-lock piece]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, of the longitudinal reinforcing members 407 of the case member 400, the reinforcing member 407 (right side in FIG. 11) opposite to the reinforcing member 407 provided with the hinge fitting 420 is locked. The piece 421 is pivotally mounted, and when the lock piece 421 is rotated clockwise from the state of FIG. 11, the tip of the piece engages with the receiving portion 508 provided on the back side of the image display body 500, and in this state The image display body 500 is locked in the position where the upper part of the opening 401 of the case member 400 is closed. On the other hand, when the lock piece 421 is rotated in the reverse direction from the locked state, the lock of the image display body 500 is released, and the image display body 500 becomes rotatable around the hinge fitting 420. Normally, the image display body 500 is locked in the closed position to prevent useless rotation when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100, and the image is attached when the case member 400 is attached to the outer body 100. The lock of the display body 500 is released to be rotatable.

6-3. Image Display-Connector]
By the way, since the image display body 500 which can be opened and closed is provided in the case member 400 separately from the door-shaped front member 200 of the outer main body 100, the case of visually recognizing the inside of the case member 400 or working in the case member 400 In order to avoid this, it is necessary to first open the door-shaped front member 200 on the front side and then open the image display body 500 on the back side, which may cause a reduction in workability or an inconvenience. .

  Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the pivoting direction of the image display body 500 is made the same as the pivoting direction of the door-shaped front surface member 200, and the door-shaped front surface member 200 and the image display body 500 are appropriately connected. It connects by 700 and interlock | cooperates with opening and closing of the door-type front member 200, and it is made to open and close the image display body 500 together. According to this, when the door-shaped front surface member 200 is opened, the image display body 500 is also rotated in the same direction via the connector 700, and the front surface of the case member 400 is opened. That is, the image display body 500 is moved along with the door-shaped front surface member 200, and it is possible to visually recognize not only the inside of the outer main body 100 but also the inside of the case member 400 by one horizontal opening operation.

  Here, as described above, in the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 according to the embodiment, the pivoting locus of the image display body 500 corresponds to the rotation axis 100 a of the door-shaped front member 200 by the lever mechanism of the hinge bracket 420. Although it approximates the turning locus centering on a rotation center, still relative movement arises in movement of both. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, in the connector 700 of the embodiment, the fixed sheath member 701 is formed on the back surface on the free end side of the image display body 500, and slides inside the fixed sheath member 701. The rod 702 is accommodated freely, and the tip of the rod 702 is rotatably connected to the back surface of the door-shaped front member 200 (specifically, the base member 215a of the locking device 215) by the locking shaft 703. is there. By doing this, as shown in FIG. 39, the image display body 500 is opened and closed together as if it is an accessory of the door-shaped front member 200 in conjunction with the opening and closing of the door-shaped front member 200. The relative displacement of movement is absorbed by the rod 702 of the connector 700 into and out of the stationary sheath 701.

  The maximum projection length when the rod 702 most protrudes from the rotation outer edge (free end) of the image display body 500 is the case where the image display body 500 is in the open position (for example, 90 ° open), The distance is set based on the distance between the rotation outer edge (the position of the stop shaft 703) of the door-shaped front surface member 200 and the rotation outer edge of the image display body 500. For this reason, the length of the rod 702 can be made the necessary minimum length, and the enlargement of the connector can be suppressed.

  The retaining shaft 703 is vertically movably mounted on support pieces 215b, 215b, 215b formed by bending a part of the base member 215a of the lock device 215, and always biased downward by a spring 703a. It is done. Therefore, the retaining shaft 703 can be moved up against the bias of the spring 703a, and by moving it up to float the lower end, the rod 702 of the connector 700 can be attached or detached. That is, the retaining shaft 703 can be inserted from above into the axial hole portion 702a formed in the tip end portion of the rod 702, and can be held by the biasing force of the spring 703a.

  Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 704 is an elastic cantilever type stopper provided on the upper surface of the fixed sheath member 701 of the connector 700, and the rod 702 removed from the retaining shaft 703 is made of the fixed sheath member 701. It is for holding inside and is engaged with the hook wall 702b at the end of the groove 705 formed on the upper surface of the rod 702 to prevent the blind movement of the rod 702. On the side surface of the rod 702, a knob piece 706 is protruded in a direction perpendicular to the sliding direction, and the stopper 704 is unlocked by pinching the knob piece 706 and forcibly moving the rod 702. It is supposed to be. Further, a retaining prevention piece 701 a is suspended from the bottom surface on the tip side of the fixed sheath member 701 and is inserted into the groove 705 of the rod 702. The retaining prevention piece 701 a abuts on the hooking wall 702 b when the rod 702 is most protruded, and prevents the rod 702 from coming out of the fixing sheath member 701.

  Further, in FIG. 40, reference numeral 509 in the vicinity of the connector 700 is an engaging portion provided to project on the back surface of the image display body 500 on the rotation outer edge side. The engaging portion 509 engages with the reinforcing bar 402 crossing the opening 401 of the case member 400 to support the load on the free end side of the image display body 500 in the closed position. As shown in FIG. 11, the reinforcing bar 402 has a slide-type guide portion 402a which inclines downward toward the image display body 500 so as to smoothly guide the engaging portion 509 to the upper surface of the reinforcing bar 402. It is provided. In addition, the engaging portion 509 of the image display body 500 is formed of a synthetic resin having excellent lubricity different from that of the image display body 500, and is detachably (replaceably) mounted on the image display body 500. There is.

  By the way, the relative shift of the movement due to the difference of the rotation locus of the door-shaped front surface member 200 and the image display body 500 can be made a flexible wire other than the above-mentioned expandable rod type connector 700. Can also be absorbed. However, if the connector is a flexible wire or the like, it will hit the image display body 500 which is stopped with the door-shaped front member 200 open at the stage of closing the door-shaped front member 200, impairing the smoothness. There is a fear. On the other hand, for example, biasing means such as a winding spring may be provided on the image display body 500 to always bias in the closing direction. By doing so, when the door-shaped front member 200 is closed, the image-displaying member 500 closes by its own force while pulling the connector by the action of the biasing force, so that the door-shaped front member 200 and the image-displaying member 500 do not collide. Of course, the means for bringing the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display body 500 together is not limited to the above. For example, hinge fitting 420, which is one element for corotation in the above, is not limited to the structure of the lever mechanism as described above, but may be centered on a single pin 420k as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42. The image display body 500 may be simply rotated.

  Locking means for locking the image display body 500 in the closed position as described above so that the image display body 500 can be pivoted in a door-like manner by attaching the image display body 500 to the case member 400 with a hinge structure. When the lock piece 421) is added, the lock is continued in principle with the case member 400 attached to the outer main body 100, and the lock is released only when necessary, such as checking in the wiring work space 408. It is also possible to select handling, in which case important parts (for example, the main board 409 and the effect control board 510) in the wiring work space 408 can be blocked by the image display body 500, which is effective in improving the crime prevention performance. is there.

  A gap 10 is provided between the upper edge of the opening 401 of the case member 400 and the upper edge of the closed image display body 500, and the reinforcing member 407 of the top plate 406 is a finger with the finger passing through the gap 10. It can be grasped. Further, a handle opening 422 is formed in the front central portion (the reinforcing band 444 between the skylight portions 443, 443) of the top plate 406 of the case member 400, and the finger passing through the handle opening 422 forms the top plate 406. The reinforcing member 407 can be grasped. Therefore, the case member 400 can properly use the handle port 422 and the gap 10 according to the location and attitude to be handled. For example, when carrying the case member 400 in the outer main body 100, it is better to carry it in a hook shape using the handle port 422, while the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 as shown in FIG. Since the handle opening 422 is hidden behind the outer main body 100 so that the finger can not enter, the case member 400 is pulled out by putting the finger on the reinforcing member 407 from the gap 10. The lower handle 316 (see FIGS. 4 and 11) of the device case 302 is projected at the center of the front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400, and the outer body 100 is held by pushing or pulling the lower handle 316. The case member 400 can be easily put in and out. In this case, the lower handle 316 is integral with the case member 400 because the device case 302 is fixed to the case member 400 with a screw, and thus the lower handle 316 is protruded from the front of the bottom plate 403 of the case member 400. Is equal to

6-4. Image display body-frame member]
The image display body 500 has a size that covers substantially the entire area of the opening 401 of the case member 400 above the reinforcing bar 402. Further, on the lower side of the image display body 500, a frame member 501 surrounding a lower portion of the opening 401 of the case member 400 from the reinforcing bar 402, that is, the front region of the symbol variation display device 300 in a frame shape The reels 301a, 301b, and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 are bordered by the frame member 501. The surface of the frame member 501 is a decorative surface, and an appropriate pattern or the like is drawn. Although not shown, the frame member 501 includes a light emission source such as an LED, a light emission control substrate for controlling the light emission source, and a decorative member arranged in front of the light emission source and capable of transmitting light. A department is provided. Here, a combination of the image display body 500 and the frame member 501 will be described as a front opening / closing member 90 (see FIG. 44).

6-4-1. Image Display Body-Frame Member-Lighting Device]
Illumination devices 502 are provided on the upper and lower sides on the back side of the frame member 501, and the illumination devices 502 illuminate the symbols of the symbol variation display device 300 brightly. Since the frame member 501 is vertically provided below the image display body 500 and close to the symbol variation display device 300, the light source can be brought close to the symbol variation display device 300 by incorporating the illumination device 502 in such a frame member 501. it can. Therefore, the means for incorporating the lighting device 502 into the frame member 501 is characterized in that sufficient brightness can be ensured even with a low light quantity as compared with the conventional lighting device.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the illumination device 502 exemplified as the embodiment has a strip-like substrate elongated in a direction (the width direction of the slot machine 1 and the same direction as the rotation axis of the reels 301a...) As shown in FIG. A plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter referred to as "LEDs") 504 are arranged in a row 503, and the lower illumination device 502 has the LED 504 in a tube frame 506 whose upper surface is closed by a translucent translucent cover plate 505, for example. The upper lighting device 502 is arranged with the LED 504 facing downward in a translucent cover 507 which is, for example, a milky white having a U-shaped cross section.

  The upper illumination device 502 is installed obliquely downward toward the player side, that is, the transparent plate 214a side from directly below as the illumination direction is shown in FIG. In the embodiment, the direction of the LED attachment surface of the substrate 503 is the above-mentioned so that the center line L (see the enlarged view in FIG. 4) of the main irradiation area of the LED 504 having relatively strong directivity is obliquely directed to the transparent plate 214a. It is inclined obliquely downward toward the transparent plate 214a side.

  If a rod-like light emitting body such as a fluorescent lamp is adopted as a light source of the lighting device 502, the substrate 503 of FIG. 4 is changed to a plate shape or a concave reflecting member for wrapping the light source. The center line of the main irradiation area directed by the total sum of the reflected light may be set to obliquely hit the back surface on the side of the transparent plate 214a. As described above, if the irradiation target of the lighting device 502 is set to the transparent plate 214a, even if a part of leaked light illuminates the outer peripheral surface of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, there is almost no influence.

  According to the experiment, when the illumination direction of the illumination device 502 is directed to the circumferential surface side of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c, specific portions of the curved reels 301a, 301b, 301c are strongly reflected and hard to see. On the other hand, when the center line L of the main irradiation area is directed obliquely to the transparent plate 214a as described above, the outer peripheral surface of the reel is illuminated through the transparent plate 214a. It has been confirmed that the wide range becomes bright and easy to see. The reason is that the light emitted from the lighting device 502 strikes the transparent plate 214a fitted in the transparent window 214 of the door-shaped front member 200 and is reflected and diffused all over, or the transparent plate 214a is brightly illuminated. It is speculated that a wide range of 301b, 301c appears bright or due to their synergy.

  The structure of the upper illumination device 502 as described above can be adopted for the lower illumination device 502, and as a matter of course, as shown in FIG. 32, it can be adopted only for the lower illumination device 502. In FIG. 32, since the upper illumination device 502 of FIG. 4 is disposed at the lower side and the lower illumination device 502 is disposed at the upper side, “upper” in the description of the illumination device 502 is “lower”. Replace "lower" with "upper".

  By the way, when an LED is employed as a light source of the lighting device 502 as in the embodiment, (a) safety is higher than that of a conventional cold cathode tube driven with a high voltage of about 200 V to drive with a low voltage; ) Longer life than a cold cathode tube, (c) Stronger than a cold cathode tube that is a glass tube, (d) Able to emit multiple colors, can broaden the range of effects, (e) Combined with an inverter It has the merit of being lighter than the cold cathode tube used and therefore less burdening the hinge fitting 420 for supporting the image display body 500.

[7. Wiring means]
The medal release device 110, the power supply device 112, and the operation unit 202 of the door-shaped front member 200 attached to the outer main body 100, for example, the respective input buttons 205 and 206 and the start lever 210 And the main substrate 409 etc. in the case member 400 (sometimes simply referred to as "case member side electric component" as a generic name of the electric components on the case member side). Connected. In the slot machine 1 of the embodiment, since the model unit 50 (see FIGS. 44 and 45) including the front opening / closing member 90 and the case member 400 is detachable with respect to the outer main body 100, replacement of the model unit 50, etc. In this case, rational wiring means is provided to easily connect or disconnect the main body side electrical component (the housing side electrical component) and the case member side electrical component.

7-1. Wiring means-wiring relay member]
As described above, the wiring relay member 113 shown in FIG. 14 is attached to the upper surface of the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the wiring relay member 113 is located at a position corresponding to the wiring window 411 of the case member 400, and faces the vacant space 417 of the case member 400 from the wiring window 411. There is. The wiring relay member 113 relays the main body side wiring 119 connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring 423 connected to the case member side electric component, and is connected to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100. A mounting plate 120 to be screwed, a cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120, and a plurality (two large and small pieces in the embodiment) connector boards housed between the cover body 121 and the mounting plate 120 It may be referred to as a “connector connection terminal board”.

  Of the two connector boards 122 and 123, the larger connector board 122 located on the left side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is fixedly attached to the mounting plate 120 and connected to the main board 409. A connector 124 is provided that mates with the connector 425 at the end of the harness 424.

  On the other hand, the smaller connector substrate 123 positioned on the right side in FIGS. 14 and 15 is attached in a non-fixed, movable state so as to be able to move in the gap between the mounting plate 120 and the cover body 121. It can move up and down as shown, and can also move in the left and right directions. The small connector substrate 123 is provided with a connector 125 which makes a pair with the connector 427 at the end of the harness 426 connected to the case member side electrical components other than the main substrate 409. The connector 125 and the connector 124 are fixed on a printed circuit board by means of a fixing means such as soldering, and an inexpensive DIN standard is used.

  Further, the cover body 121 covering the front surface of the mounting plate 120 has two large and small openings 126 and 127 through which the connectors 124 and 125 pass, a support cylinder 128 protruding in a position parallel to the openings 126 and 127, and a lower half And a tunnel-like wiring duct 129 projecting forward of the part.

  The main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 is bundled in a hook-shaped wiring stopper 130 which passes through the inside of the wiring duct 129 or protrudes on the lower front surface of the mounting plate 120 of the wiring relay member 113. 1 is distributed to the side plates 102, 102 side of the outer main body 100 as shown by the one-dot chain line L in FIG. 1, and the direction is changed substantially vertically near the corners of the side plates 102, 102 and the back plate 104 They are respectively connected to the main body side electric parts through wiring openings 109 provided at the back of the partition plate 105. Of course, when there is a main body side electric component (for example, the external relay terminal plate 131 provided on the inner surface of the side plate 102 in FIG. 1) in the region above the partition plate 105, the wiring opening 109 of the partition plate 105 is irrelevant. It is connected as it is.

The following technical ideas can be understood from the wiring means described so far.
(A) Between the horizontal plane passing through the rotation centers of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300 and the horizontal plane passing through the highest height position of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c on the back plate 405 of the case member 400 The wiring window 411 is formed at a height at which the lower side is located.
(B) On the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100, the wiring relay member 113 for relaying the main wiring 119 connected to the main electric component and the case wiring 423 connected to the case electric component is installed.
(C) forming a wiring path in the vertical direction passing the wiring along the inner surface of the side plates 102 of the outer main body 100;
(D) Lead the main body side wiring 119 connected to the wiring relay member 113 to the side of the case member 400, and connect it to the main body side electric component through the wiring path from there.

  In the gaming machine provided with the components (a) to (d) above, the main body side wiring 119 does not pass behind the reels 301a, 301b and 301c of the symbol variation display device 300, and the side plates 102 and 102 of the outer main body 100 It is possible to move the reels 301a, 301b and 301c close to the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 in order to bypass the wiring path provided along the side (including the corner with the back plate 104 (see FIG. 10)). In the conventional configuration, that is, the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is smaller than that of the conventional configuration in which the main-body-side wirings 119 pass down the approximate center of the back plate 104 and pass behind the reels 301a, It can be enlarged. The larger the diameter of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, the stronger the force at the time of rotation.

7-2. Wiring means-connector 425, 427]
In the two connectors 124 and 125 provided in the wiring relay member 113 as described above, the connector 425 at the end of the harness 424 connected to the main substrate 409 of the case member 400 and the case member side other than the main substrate 409 The connectors 427 at the end of the harness 426 connected to the electrical components are connected respectively.

  The two connectors 425 and 427 are integrally attached to one connector holder 428 as shown in FIG. The connector holder 428 has a holder main body 429 to which the connectors 425 and 427 are screwed, a plate-like attachment piece 431 having a through hole 430 at substantially the center and projecting to both sides of the holder main body 429; A well-known button-type panel fastener 432 (trade name "NILATCH": registered trademark) attached to the through hole 430 of the attachment piece 431, and as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. An attachment piece 431 is placed on the end of the support cylinder 128, and a button-type panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is inserted into the support cylinder 128 and locked. Accordingly, since the connector holder 428 is fixed to the support cylinder 128 serving as the fixing means and is further fixed to the wiring relay member 113, the connection between the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 is not removed.

7-2-1. Wiring relay board-connector 425, 427-Tack shelf temporarily]
As described above, the connectors 425 and 427 are connected to the connectors 124 and 125 of the wiring relay member 113, but before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer main body 100, that is, from the factory shipment to the installation completion Reference numeral 427 is temporarily fixed to a temporarily fixed shelf 418 provided on the case member 400.

  The temporarily fixed shelf 418 is a shelf-plate-like member directed from the inside of the case member 400 to the wiring window 411 as shown in FIGS. 5, 6, 12 and 13. As shown in FIG. And the bench side plate 434 erected on both ends of the bench portion 433 and three inwardly directed claw pieces 435 and 435 protruding from each bench side plate 434. , And 435. There is provided a space where the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be fitted between one inward center of the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 and the other two upper and lower ones. One bench side plate 434 has a thin plate structure in which a finger hook portion 436 is extended at the tip, and one finger is supported on the finger hook portion 436 and a force is applied in an arrow X direction in FIG. Like the leaf spring, the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 can be easily detached from the inward claw pieces 435, 435, 435 in such a state that it can be bent outward. The imaginary line in FIG. 8A shows an example in which the tip of the finger hook portion 436 is bent in a key shape, whereby removal of the connector holder 428 is performed in the sense of pushing a button like arrow Y. It can be done easily.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the connector holder 428 is placed on the bench portion 433 of the temporary fixing shelf 418, and the attachment piece 431 of the connector holder 428 is the inward claw piece 435, 435 of the bench side plate 434, The connector holder 428 is temporarily fixed to the temporarily fixed shelf 418 by fitting between 435. Of course, even if temporary fixing is performed, the connector holder 428 is set so as not to come off the temporary fixing shelf 418 during transportation of the case member 400, and thus before the case member 400 is incorporated into the outer body 100, The connectors 425 and 427 integrated with the connector holder 428 are temporarily fixed on the temporarily fixed shelf 418 provided on the case member 400 and do not move. Therefore, during the operation of transporting the case member 400 or assembling the case member 400 into the outer main body 100, the connectors 425 and 427 at the tip of the harnesses 424 and 426 hit parts in the case member 400 and, of course, There is no such thing as damage to oneself.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 8B to FIG. 8A, in the wiring process after fixing the case member 400 to the outer main body 100, one bench side plate 434 is warped outward as described above. When the connector holder 428 is removed from the temporarily fixed shelf 418 and the connector holder 428 is moved to a position where its attachment piece 431 abuts on the support cylinder 128 of the wiring relay member 113, the connectors 425 and 427 become connectors of the wiring relay member 113. After fitting to 124 and 125 (the details will be described later), the button-type panel fastener 432 of the attachment piece 431 is pushed in to lock the attachment piece 431 on the support cylinder 128. At this time, as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, providing guide rails 440 for guiding in the bench portion 433 requires only pushing the connector holder 428 back, so the workability is improved. improves.

  The connector holder 428 attached to the wiring relay member 113 as described above is stabilized with the back plate 104 of the outer main body 100 as a support base and is separated from the case member and does not contact, so the outer main body Even if 100 and the model unit 50 move relative to each other, no undue load is applied.

The following technical ideas can be understood from the explanation so far.
(A) an outer body which is a box-like shape having a front face open and a rear face covered with a back plate, and provided with a power supply device and other body-side electrical components;
(B) A model unit provided with a symbol variation display device or other case member-side electrical components for varying a plurality of symbols in a case member which is detachable from the outer body.
(C) a wiring relay member attached to the back plate of the outer main body in order to relay the main body side wiring connected to the main body side electric component and the case side wiring connected to the case member electric component;
(D) a connector attached to the tip of the case side wiring,
(E) a connector holder attached to the connector;
(F) a temporary fixing member provided on the case member for temporarily fixing the connector holder;
(G) fixing means for fixing the connector holder to the wiring relay member, and (h) temporarily fixing the connector holder to the temporary fixing member before mounting the model unit to the outer main body (I) A game machine characterized in that the connector holder is changed from the temporary fixing member to the fixing means in a state where the model unit is mounted on the outer main body, and the connector of the connector holder is connected to the wiring relay member.

  In the above-described gaming machine, attachment of the model unit 50 to the outer main body 100 and coupling of the connectors are separately performed. In contrast, for example, the connector is attached directly to the model unit 50 A method is conceivable in which the connectors are automatically coupled by an operation of pushing the model unit 50 into the outer main body 100. However, in this method, when a large-sized model unit 50 vibrates inside the outer main body 100 during transportation or the like, a large load is applied to the connector connection portion, and there is concern about reliability. is there.

  Further, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. In contrast, a game machine is conceivable in which the door-shaped front member is divided into upper and lower two stages, and the upper door-shaped front member is used as a component on the model unit 50 side. However, in such a gaming machine, when a player excited during the game hits the door-shaped front member in the upper part, a direct impact is applied to the connector coupling portion, which may make the coupling of the connector unstable. There is a problem that a new crime prevention structure is required for the joint between the upper and lower door-shaped front members.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention has a configuration in which one door-shaped front member 200 is attached to the outer main body 100, and the model unit 50 is physically independent of the door-shaped front member 200. After the connector holder 428 is connected to the wiring relay member 113, the connector holder 428 is combined with a component (the wiring relay member 113) fixed to the outer main body 100 as shown in FIG. Therefore, even when using a low-cost, general connector used by soldering to a printed circuit board, there is no concern about reliability / durability even during transport or during game play. Further, since only the model unit 50 is a target of replacement at the time of model change, and the door type front member 200 is not a target of replacement, the burden on the game arcade for model change is also lightened.

7-2-2. Coupling of connectors 425 and 427 with connectors 124 and 125]
As described above, the connector 425 and the connector 427 are attached to one connector holder 428. In this way, the connection of the two connectors 425 and 427 is completed in one operation of setting the connector holder 428 to the predetermined position of the wiring relay member 113. However, as a matter of fact, in a structure in which two separate components such as the connectors 425 and 427 and the connector holder 428 are brought together and integrated, the problem of “accurate positioning” of the connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 becomes difficult. encounter. That is, if positioning of the four elements of the two connectors 425 and 427 and the connectors 124 and 125 on the wiring relay member 113 side is not all accurate, collective connection of the connectors 425 and 124 and the connectors 427 and 125 is impossible. This is because it is difficult to achieve such positioning accuracy at mass production cost. One possible means of solving such problems is to use a so-called drawer connector provided with a mechanism for increasing the flexibility of bonding without soldering to a printed circuit board, but the drawer connector itself is expensive. Because of this, the cost burden is still large.

  On the other hand, in the wiring means of the embodiment, the connector boards 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 which is a board support member are divided and the connectors 124 and 125 are mounted respectively, and at least one of the connector boards 122 and 123 is wired Non-fixedly housed in the gap between the mounting plate 120 of the relay member 113 and the cover body 121, and in the direction orthogonal to the connecting direction of the connector 427 and the connector 125 (here, “perpendicular” is strictly 90 degrees In the social sense, it means about 90 degrees.) It has taken measures to make it possible to move. In this configuration, when the connection aim of the connector holder 428 is determined for the connector 425 and the connector 124, even if there is a slight deviation in the relative position of the other connector 427 and the connector 125, the connector substrate 123 floats and causes the deviation. Because of movement for correction, coupling of the connector 427 and the connector 125 is also possible. As a result, it is possible to sufficiently cope with the board fixed type and inexpensive connector of DIN standard.

The following technical ideas can be understood from the explanation so far.
(1) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each of the connectors, one connector group is fixed to one connector holder and also paired with these The connector group is mounted on the connector substrate, and the connector substrate is further divided into connectors, one of which is fixed to the substrate support member, and the other connector substrate is connected to the substrate support member in the connector coupling direction A game machine characterized in that the game machine is mounted so as to be movable in the orthogonal direction. "
(2) “A box with a front open and a back covered by a back plate, and a plurality of symbols on the outer body provided with the power supply and other body-side electrical components, and the case member detachable from the outer body In order to relay the model variation provided with the symbol variation display device and other case component-side electrical components to be varied, the body-side wires connected to the body-side electrical components, and the case-side wires connected to the case member-side electrical components A wire relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wires, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, the connector A fixing means for fixing a holder to the wiring relay member, and a connector which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and fixed to a printed circuit board and used The connector connection includes: another connector group by a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate and fixed to the connector of the other connector group. The terminal substrate for each connector is divided for each connector, and one of them is fixed to the wiring relay member, and the other terminal substrate for connector connection is attached to the wiring relay member so as to be movable in the direction orthogonal to the connector connection direction. A game machine characterized by having done so. "
(3) “In a gaming machine having two or more wiring connectors and two or more wiring connectors paired with each of the connectors, one connector group is fixed to the substrate supporting member via the connector substrate. Together with the other connector group paired with these in one connector holder, and further, fix one connector in the connector group to the connector holder and attach the other connector to the connector holder in the coupling direction of the connector and A game machine characterized in that the game machine is mounted so as to be movable in the orthogonal direction. "
(4) “A box is formed with the front open and the back covered by a back plate, and a plurality of designs are attached to the outer body provided with the power supply and other body-side electrical components, and the case member detachable from the outer body. In order to relay the model variation provided with the symbol variation display device and other case component-side electrical components to be varied, the body-side wires connected to the body-side electrical components, and the case-side wires connected to the case member-side electrical components A wire relay member attached to the back plate of the outer body, two or more systems of connectors attached to the tip of the case-side wires, a connector holder for collectively supporting the two or more systems of connectors as a connector group, the connector A fixing means for fixing a holder to the wiring relay member, and a connector which is paired with each connector of the two or more connector groups and fixed to a printed circuit board and used The connector holder includes: another connector group by a wearable connector; and a connector connection terminal board attached to the wiring relay member attached to the back plate and fixed to the connector of the other connector group. A game machine characterized in that one connector in the connector group is fixed and the other connector is attached to the connector holder so as to be movable in a direction perpendicular to the connecting direction of the connector. "

  If the above gaming machine aims at the connector of the fixed connector connection terminal board and operates the connector holder, even if there is a slight deviation due to a manufacturing error or the like in the relative position of the other connectors, Since the non-fixed connector connection terminal boards move together with the connector and move to correct the deviation and absorb errors, it is possible to connect the connectors not having the joint sight. Therefore, collective connection of a plurality of connectors is possible using one connector holder. Moreover, the connector used is a general-purpose low-cost connector such as a DIN standard used by soldering to a printed circuit board, and the cost is low.

  In addition, the connector holder is securely fixed to the back plate of the outer main body via the wire relaying member and thus the wire relaying member by fixing means such as ny latch (registered trademark). On the other hand, the connector holder and the model unit are only connected via the flexible harness, and even if the model unit moves, the movement is absorbed by the flexible harness, so the movement is not transmitted to the connector holder . For this reason, even if relative movement occurs between the outer body and the model unit due to vibration during transportation, the connector holder moves together with only the outer body and does not receive interference of the model unit. There is no load on the department at all. Therefore, the connector connection is very reliable.

  As in the embodiment, the configuration in which the small connector substrate 123 corresponding to the small connector 125 can be floated and the large connector 425 and the connector 124 are defined as the basis of coupling is the connectors 425 and 124 as compared to the reverse configuration. , 427, 125 can be easily done. This is because the small connector board 123 can be handled with a light force, so that automatic correction of the error is easy. Further, in the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the connectors 425 and 124 are coupled earlier than the other connectors 427 and 125, whereby the connectors of the combined sight can be easily aligned.

  Further, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 9, chamfered portions C (c) are formed on the peripheral corner of the tip of the convex portion of the convex connectors 425 and 427 and / or the peripheral corner of the insertion opening of the concave connectors 124 and 125. If linear chamfering or curvilinear chamfering is possible, the guiding action along the taper of the chamfered part C makes the connectivity between the connectors better.

  Further, as in the embodiment, in addition to the configuration in which the connector substrates 122 and 123 of the wiring relay member 113 can be made to move freely, it is also possible to make either one of the connectors 425 and 427 on the connector holder 428 side movable. Also in that case, the same effect as the above can be obtained. A specific example of the connector holder 428 is shown in FIG. In this example, a receptacle 429a with an internal thread is protruded from the holder main body 429 of the connector holder 428, while an ear piece 427b having free holes 427a is formed on both sides of the connector 427. The play hole 427a of the connector 427 is loosely fitted, and a screw 427c with a washer is used to prevent the ear piece 427b from coming off. By doing so, the connector 427 can freely move relative to the connector holder 428 within the range of the difference in diameter between the free hole 427a and the receiving tube 429a. The connector substrates 122 and 123 in this case may be integrally fixed to the mounting plate 120. In the embodiment, two connectors are handled as one connector group, but the number of connectors in one connector group may be two or more.

  In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4 and FIG. 12, the back of the rear surface plate 405 of the case member 400 is recessed toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300. A cable groove 437 is formed, and in the vicinity of both ends of the cable groove 437, wiring ports 438 and 438 penetrating the side plate 404 (or the back plate 405) of the case member 400 are opened. The wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are for connecting the symbol variation display device 300 to the main substrate 409 and the like, and the right side face of the device case 302 of the symbol variation display device 300 in FIG. The cable 313 (see FIG. 12) of the reel substrate 312 provided on the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 is pulled out of the case member 400 from one wiring port 438, and the cable 313 is as shown in FIG. The cable 313 is accommodated in the cable groove 437, and the end of the cable 313 is returned from the other wiring port 438 into the case member 400 to be connected to the main substrate 409 or the like. A cable stop 439 is provided at a predetermined interval in the cable groove 437 so that the cable 313 does not come off from the cable groove 437.

  The main substrate 409 and the like and the reel substrate 312 are both case member-side electrical components in the case member 400, and it is not necessary to draw the cable 313 out of the case member 400 from the first. The reason why the wiring members 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are provided in the case member 400 to divert the cable 313 to the outside is as follows.

  The installation location of the reel substrate 312 is the non-hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200 among the side surfaces of the symbol variation display device 300 (apparatus case 302) in consideration of the workability of wiring for inserting and removing the connector in a limited space. The side corresponding to is preferred. Conversely, if the reel substrate 312 is provided on the side of the device case 302 corresponding to the hinge side of the door-shaped front member 200, the fully opened door-shaped front member 200 (see FIG. 1) and the reel substrate 312 are in close proximity. Because they face each other, a large working space necessary for inserting and removing the connector can not be secured.

  However, on the other hand, the connection portion of substrates (main substrate 409, effect control substrate 510, image display body 500, etc.) to be connected to reel substrate 312 is on the side corresponding to the hinge side of door-shaped front member 200 of case member 400. And, the cable 313 looks like crossing the inside of the case member 400. As a result, when the device case 302 is attached to the case member 400, the cable 313 may be caught and conversely, the cable 313 may be hooked when the device case 302 is pulled out.

  On the other hand, if the wiring members 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 are provided in the case member 400 so as to bypass the cable 313 as in the embodiment, the trouble of the cable 313 as described above does not occur. In addition, if the wiring work is performed with the device case 302 pulled out slightly from the predetermined position, the workability is better, and accordingly, the length of the cable 313 from the wiring port 438 to the reel substrate 312 is the wiring cost There is room to say. Therefore, slack is generated in the cable 313 with the device case 302 set in a predetermined position, and the slack of the cable 313 becomes large depending on the amount of withdrawal. When the slack of the cable 313 is large, the cable 313 is placed in a triangular space formed between the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 and the rear corner portion of the case member 400, which is located side by side with the wiring port 438. You can escape the slack part of the

  When the cable groove 437 is expanded toward the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 as in the embodiment, the space between the back of the case member 400 and the lower swash plate 310 of the device case 302 is used. It helps to make effective use of dead space that can be The wiring using the wiring ports 438 and 438 and the cable groove 437 does not have to be limited to the cable 313 of the reel substrate 312, and can be applied to all cables crossing the inside of the case member 400.

  In addition, in FIG. 11, reference numeral 441 is a function separation relay terminal board.

  The slot machine 1 configured as described above is shipped from the factory in the state of a finished product in which the case member 400 is attached to the outer main body 100 and necessary wiring is completed. Then, the finished product is attached to the game machine installation island of the game arcade, but at this time the top board 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper crosspiece 600 of the game machine installation island are made of wood screws etc. When it is stopped by the fixing member 601, the door-shaped front member 200 and the image display 500 are opened, and the fixing member 601 is inserted from the inside of the case member 400 to the through hole 132 of the outer main body 100 The fixing member 601 is tightened through the skylight portion 443 with a tool 602 such as a driver to fixedly connect the top plate 103 of the outer main body 100 and the upper crosspiece 600 of the gaming machine installation island. In addition, since the through-hole 132 is provided with two or more, it can select from the inside arbitrarily and can use it as needed. For example, even if there are variations in the position and size of the upper crosspiece 600, the through holes 132 corresponding to the upper crosspiece 600 can be selected. Further, when the entire game machine is replaced, by changing the through holes 132 to be used, it is possible to prevent the problem that the holes of the fixing member 601 are opened at the same position of the upper bar 600 (so-called idiot hole formation).

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 25, a gap S is formed between the outer main body 100 and the case member 400, and the heat generated from the image display body 500 etc. is a cooling fan (not shown) of the image display body 500. The air passes from the skylight portion 443 of the case member 400 to the air vent 133 of the back plate 104 through the gap S, and from there to the inside of the gaming machine installation island. At this time, since the wiring relay member 113 exists between the back plate 104 and the case member 400 and acts as a barrier to block the gap S over a wide area, the heat air flowing in the gap S is blocked by this portion. It is actively discharged to the outside from the vent 133 of the back plate 104 located above. Therefore, the heat dissipation effect is high.

[8. Symbol of each reel, symbol row]
Each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, as an example, as shown in FIG. 46, is a pattern row configured by arranging a plurality of types of symbols at constant intervals (shown by array numbers 1 to 21 There is a reel band (pattern band) on which a total of 21 symbols are written. FIG. 46 shows a state in which the symbol rows described on the respective reel bands 321a, 321b and 321c attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b and 301c are unfolded in a planar manner. In addition, in order to identify the symbol arranged in the symbol row, the above-mentioned sequence number is indicated for convenience.

  Then, in each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged in each symbol row are the openings 401 (also referred to as symbol display windows), and the symbols are hereinafter described It is arranged to be visible to the player via the display window 401 (see FIG. 47 described next). The symbol display window 401 corresponds to the symbol display portion described in the solution means.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46, the types of symbols are "7 symbol painted in red (hereinafter referred to as" 7 symbol red ")," 7 "symbol painted in blue (hereinafter referred to as" "7 blue patterns"), "BAR pattern", "cherry pattern" with cherry pattern, "replay pattern", "bell 1 pattern", "bell 2 pattern", "watermelon pattern", " There are symbols described as "righteousness" (hereinafter referred to as "prosthetic symbol") and symbols described as "positive" (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol").

  In FIG. 46, “7 symbols of red” are two of the array numbers 3 and 6 in the reel band 321a, one of the array No. 12 in the reel band 321b, and the array No. 10 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. "Blue 7 pattern" corresponds to one of the arrangement number 16 in the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement number 3 in the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement number 15 in the reel band 321c. "BAR symbol" (Hanasei Gakuen) is one of the array number 11 in the reel band 321a, two of the array numbers 7 and 9 in the reel band 321b, and one of the array number 2 in the reel band 321c. One corresponds. "Cherry symbol" is one of SEQ ID NO: 10 in the reel band 321a, three SEQ ID NOs: 1, 14 and 17 in the reel band 321b, and SEQ ID NO: 7 in the reel band 321c. Two of the numbers correspond. "Replay symbol" is five of the sequence numbers 1, 4, 7, 12, 12, 17 in the reel band 321a, and sequence numbers 0, 5, 8, 11, 11 in the reel band 321b. In the sixteenth and five reel reels 321c, five of the arrangement numbers 1, 5, 8, 13, 13, and 17 correspond to each other. "BELL symbol 1" is three of SEQ ID NOS: 13, 15, and 18 in the reel band 321a, and five of SEQ ID NOS: 2, 6, 10, 15, 18, and 18 in the reel band 321b. The reel band 321c corresponds to three of SEQ ID NOS: 9, 12, and 16. The "BELL symbol 2" corresponds to three of the array Nos. 2, 5, and 8 in the reel band 321a, and three of the array Nos. 0, 4, and 18 in the reel band 321c. The "watermelon pattern" has three of SEQ ID NOS: 9, 14 and 19 in the reel band 321a, two of SEQ ID NOS: 4 and 13 in the reel band 321b, and SEQ ID NO: 3 in the reel band 321c.・ The 6th and 11th correspond to three. The “design pattern” corresponds to one of SEQ ID NO: 20 in the reel band 321 a, one of SEQ ID NO: 19 in the reel band 321 b, and one of SEQ ID NO: 19 in the reel band 321 c. The "regular symbol" corresponds to one of the arrangement number 0 in the reel band 321a, one of the arrangement number 20 in the reel band 321b, and one of the arrangement number 20 in the reel band 321c. In addition, the kind of symbol is an example, Comprising: It is not restricted to these kinds.

[9. Frame member]
FIG. 47 shows an enlarged portion of the frame member 501 including the symbol display window 401. From the symbol display window 401, three consecutive symbols can be visually recognized among the symbols in the symbol row of each reel 301a, 301b, 301c. From the top three positions where this symbol is displayed "upper (or upper position)" (for example, the position where "bell 1 design" of reel 301a is displayed), "middle (or middle position)" (for example, , A position where the "replay symbol" of the reel 301b is displayed, "lower (or lower position)" (for example, a position where the "bell 1 symbol" of the reel 301c is displayed).

  From the above, it is possible to display "number of stages x number of reels" symbols in the symbol display window 401. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, nine symbols can be displayed at maximum in the symbol display window 401 from "the number of stages (3) x the number of reels (3)".

  Various lamps are provided on the left end (left side when viewed from the symbol display window 401) of the frame member 501 (also referred to as display panel, hereinafter referred to as display panel 501), among which “BET1”, “BET2 The BET lamp (bet lamp) 614 is described as “BET 3”, and the numbers of the BET lamps (the numbers “1, 2 and 3 of the above“ BET 1 ”,“ BET 2 ”and“ BET 3 ”) are Each corresponds to the number of bets (the number of bets and the number according to the number of medals bet), that is, "1" is 1 bet (number of medals bet is 1) and "2" is 2 bets (the number of medals bet is 2), "3" means 3 bets (also referred to as MAX bet, the number of medals bet is 3).

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a sequence to be effective is determined according to the bet number. This "valid sequence" is also called a valid line. It is referred to below as a valid line. A combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination to be described later is determined to be displayed as a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination only after being displayed side by side on one activated line. That is, even if each symbol constituting a symbol corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is individually displayed in the symbol display window 401, if each symbol is not aligned on any effective line (ie, predetermined If the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not aligned on the activated line), it is not determined that the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed. In addition, when the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is not arranged on the effective line, it is determined that the combination pattern of disjointed symbols (that is, the combination of lost symbols) is displayed.

  Next, the bet number and the pay line will be specifically described. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a dedicated three bet machine, and in the normal game, when three medals are inserted, the game can be executed. At this time, a straight line going up to the right and a straight line going down to the right are effective lines.

  Note that the effective line is not limited to the above-described straight upward straight line arrangement or right downward straight line arrangement. Furthermore, although the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a dedicated three bet machine, the number of valid lines may be changed according to the number of bets instead.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the bet number is only 3 bets (MAX bets), and "BAR symbol-replay symbol-proposition symbol" is displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. Only the two lines (i.e., the line rising to the right) 623b and the line on which the "bell 1 design-replay pattern-bell 1 design" is displayed (i.e. the right falling line 623a) are regarded as effective lines.

  The combination of symbols displayed in the symbol display window 401 of FIG. 47 is "BELL 1 symbol-Replay symbol-Bell 1 symbol" displayed on the downward right line 623a which is one of the effective lines. Since the combination of symbols is a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role (replay role) as shown in FIG. 53 described later, in the next game, automatic bets are made without inserting medals, as in the previous game. It is possible to run the game again. Even if "BELL 1 symbol-REPLAY symbol-Bell 1 symbol" is displayed on the effective line, it is difficult for the player to grasp at a glance whether the combination of symbols of any combination has been displayed. However, by displaying the combination of “replay symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol” in the middle line which is not the effective line, the player can grasp that the player has won the replay.

  In addition, the display panel 501 is provided with lamps and LEDs that can be lit (or blinked) in accordance with the gaming state of the slot machine 1. From the top of the figure, these lamps are the error lamp 604 with the letters “ERR”, the replay lamp 606 with the letters “REP” located just below the BET lamp 614, “STR” A start lamp 608 with the characters “”, a medal IN lamp 610 with the characters “INS”, and a payout number display LED 612 having two side by side seven-segment LEDs are provided. In addition to these, a bonus notification lamp for notifying the winning of a bonus game to be described later, a 7-segment LED for displaying a cumulative payout number of medals in a bonus game or the like, and counting a bonus game are separately provided. It is also good.

  The error lamp 604 starts to light up (or blinks) if something goes wrong during the game of the slot machine 1 or a failure etc., and the player etc. (the person in charge of the hall etc. is now Have a role of informing

  The replay lamp 606 has a role of informing the player that a replay can be made (playing again without betting on a new medal) when the game result is replayed (described later).

  The start lamp 608 starts to light (or blink) when the bet number reaches the MAX bet, and has the role of prompting the player to operate the start lever 210 (start operation).

  The medal IN lamp 610 has a role of prompting the player to bet by continuing lighting (or blinking) until the bet number reaches the maximum (MAX bet).

  The payout number display LED 612 has a role of notifying the player of the payout number of medals by displaying the number of payouts (the number of medals to be paid out) when the medals are paid out according to the game result.

[10. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 48 schematically shows the configuration of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members and the like provided in the slot machine 1. The slot machine 1 has a main substrate 409 for overall control of the progress of the game, and the main substrate (main control substrate) 409 is mounted with a CPU 1110, a ROM 1112, a RAM 1114, an input / output interface 1116, etc. ing.

  The single-sheet loading buttons 205, 206, the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c, the storage release switch 209, etc. are all connected to the main substrate 409, and these operation buttons use sensors not shown. Thus, the operation by the player can be detected, and the detected operation signal can be output to the main substrate 409. Specifically, when the start lever 210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 300 (starting the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c) is output to the main board 409, and the reel stop button 211a. , 211 b and 211 c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 301 a, 301 b and 301 c is outputted to the main substrate 409.

  Hereinafter, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c will be referred to as the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c, respectively, as necessary. The reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c corresponding to this are called a left reel stop button 211a, a middle reel stop button 211b and a right reel stop button 211c.

  Further, the slot machine 1 accommodates the main substrate 409 and other devices, and various signals are input to the main substrate 409 from these devices. In addition to the symbol variation display device 300, the devices include the medal discharge device 110 and the like.

  The symbol variation display device 300 includes reel drive motors 341a, 341b and 341c for rotating the reels 301a, 301b and 301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 341a, middle reel drive motor 341b, right reel drive motor 341c). The reel drive motor is a stepping motor, and each of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c can be independently rotated and stopped, and at that time, a plurality of types of symbols continuously from top to bottom in the symbol display window 401 It changes and is displayed. The reel drive motors 341a, 341b and 341c correspond to movable display body drive means. By the stepping motor, each reel can be rotated by a predetermined number of symbols at the time of reel special effect processing described later.

  In addition, position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c are provided to detect the reference positions for the rotation of the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and position sensors 331a, 331b, and 331c are reels for the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. They are provided corresponding to the inside (left reel position sensor 331a, middle reel position sensor 331b, right reel position sensor 331c). The detection signal (index signal) from these position sensors is input to the main board 409, whereby the main board 409 can obtain stop position information of each reel.

  In the medal selector 207, the above-mentioned solenoid 207a and the closing sensor 207b are installed. The insertion sensor 207 b detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 203 and outputs a detection signal of the medal to the main substrate 409. When the solenoid 207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medal is detected by the insertion sensor 207b. Conversely, when the solenoid 207a is in the ON state, the passage that reaches the insertion sensor 207b is locked out in the medal selector 207 and the insertion of medals can not be accepted, and the medal selector 207 is inserted even if the player inserts medals. The medals which have flowed to the return basket 213 through are returned to the medal receiver 201. At this time, since the function of the insertion sensor 207b is invalidated, neither the bet nor medal storage due to the medal insertion is performed.

  The medal discharge device 110 has a payout sensor 110e for detecting the medals paid out one by one in the outlet 110c, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 409 from the payout sensor 110e. It is done. In addition, the medal storage sensor 111a is provided in the game medal auxiliary storage box 111, and when the number of stored medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal indicating that the medal exceeds the predetermined quantity is used as a main board Output to 409. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 500, the error lamp 604 and the like, and the occurrence of the abnormality in the player, the hall employee and the like is notified.

  On the other hand, a control signal is output from the main substrate 409 to the symbol variation display device 300 and the medal emitting device 110. That is, drive pulse signals for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 341 a, 341 b and 341 c described above are output from the main substrate 409. Further, a drive signal is input from the main substrate 409 to the medal emitting device 110 in accordance with the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal releasing device 110 receives the medal and performs a payout operation. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal discharge device 110 or there is no medal at all, detection of the number of medals by the payout sensor 110 e is delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an abnormality signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 110e to the main board 409, and the main board 409 receives the content to notify that the medal payout has occurred. Is displayed on the error lamp 604, the image display body 500 or the like to notify the player or the hall employee or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

  The slot machine 1 includes an effect control substrate 510 in addition to the main substrate 409. The effect control substrate 510 includes a CPU 1118, a ROM 1120, a RAM 1122, an input / output interface 1130, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1124, and an AMP (audio amplifier). 1), a sound source IC 1128, etc. are mounted. The effect control board 510 receives various command signals from the main board 409 and controls the display of the image display body 500 and the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 502 etc. and the operation of the speaker 512.

  Furthermore, when the external relay terminal board 131 is provided on the main board 409, the slot machine 1 is connected to the hall computer 1200 of the game arcade through the external relay terminal board 131. The external relay terminal board 131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, paid out medal signal, gaming status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 409 to the hall computer 1200.

  In addition, the power supply device 112 is provided with a setting key switch 112t, a reset switch 112u, a power switch 112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 1, and can only be operated by opening the door-shaped front member 200. Among them, the power switch 112v is for turning on and off the power supply to the slot machine 1, and the setting key switch 112t is for changing settings (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. . The reset switch 112 u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 1 and is also operated together with the setting key switch 112 t when changing the setting.

  The above is an example of the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. In the game by the slot machine 1, when the player operates the start lever 210 in a state where the bet number of medals is determined, the respective reels 301a, 301b, 301c rotate, and thereafter, the player stops the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c. Is operated to stop the corresponding reels 301a, 301b and 301c, and when all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination of symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary to In response, a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination are awarded.

  As described above, reel bands 321a, 321b, and 321c are attached to the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c (see FIG. 46). Then, when all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped, the display content (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line) displayed in the symbol display window 401 corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination. It is determined whether the combination mode has been displayed. Specifically, a combination combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed in at least one of the effective lines (upper right and lower lines 623b and 623a) in the symbol display window 401. It is determined whether or not it is present. At this time, when combinations of symbols corresponding to different winning combinations are displayed redundantly on the right rising line 623b and the right falling line 623a, combinations of symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously displayed. It is determined that it is displayed, and medals of the number obtained by adding up the number of payouts are paid out. That is, the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to a plurality of winning combinations will be displayed on the effective line in the symbol display window 401 in an overlapping manner).

  Hereinafter, in the case where the combination mode of symbols corresponding to a predetermined winning combination is displayed on any one activated line, the symbol corresponding to the (predetermined) winning combination (this is referred to as a winning combination symbol) is The combination is complete, or the winning combination is complete.

  The symbols of the slot machine 1 are "7 symbols red", "7 symbols blue", "BAR symbols", "cherry symbols", "replay symbols", "bell 1 symbols", "bell 2 symbols", "watermelon symbols" As mentioned above, there are "design pattern" and "regular design", but among them, "7 symbols red", "7 symbols blue" and "BAR symbols" stand out compared to other symbols It is an easy-to-use, easy-to-identify symbol. Here, the ease of identification refers to the degree to which the player can easily identify the symbol during the rotation of the reel and the stopped state of the reel. It is easy to stop these symbols so that these symbols are stopped in the symbol display window 401 when the player performs a stop operation because these symbols have their color and size even while the reel is rotating. (Ie, easy to press). Furthermore, as for "art design" and "normal design", as can be seen also in Fig. 46, "justice" can be read in the form of forming a circle with two designs of "right design" and "normal design". As described above, since they are disposed adjacent to each other in the upper and lower direction, and only one reel is disposed in each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, it is easy to be pushed.

  These symbols by themselves are only symbolic symbols (only one symbol does not correspond to a winning combination), but they become a combination of symbols corresponding to a winning combination by becoming a predetermined combination. . That is, predetermined game benefits are provided. In the following, combination modes of symbols accepted corresponding to each winning combination shown in FIG. 49 will be described.

10-1. Combination of winning combination and design]
Here, combinations of winning combinations (including those called winning combinations) of the slot machine 1 and symbols corresponding thereto will be described with reference to FIGS. 49, 50 and 51-53. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing the winning probability for each winning combination of the slot machine 1, which is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like as a hit value determination table. FIG. 50 is a view showing each winning combination and a condition device established corresponding to each winning combination, which is stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like. 51 to 53 are diagrams showing combinations of symbols corresponding to the respective condition devices and the number of medals paid out, which are also stored in advance in the ROM 1112 or the like.

  As gaming states in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, a general state, a normal RT, a chance RT, a SB, a bonus internal, and a bonus internal are prepared. The winning probability for each winning combination is determined for each gaming state, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 49, the chance RT includes a chance RT1, a chance RT2 and a chance RT3 in which the probability of losing is different. When a winning combination is won as a result of the lottery, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination is activated, and a reel stop process described later is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the activated line. It will be. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one condition device corresponds to the pattern of reel control on a one-to-one basis, one reel is required to prepare a plurality of reel control patterns for one winning combination. There may be a plurality of conditions for the winning combination of. In this way, it is possible to prepare a plurality of stopped symbols (combination of symbols displayed on the activated line) for one winning combination. Here, as for the symbol combinations displayed on the effective line, “RB1 + bell 2”, “watermelon”, “AT1” to “AT10”, “ALL”, “SB1” to “SB3”, “RB1 + BELL 2” shown in FIG. The description will be made with SB1 + normal lip "to" SB3 + normal lip "as an example.

  “RB1 + bell 2” is a double winning combination in which RB1 and Bell 2 are simultaneously duplicated. At this time, the condition device corresponding to both RB1 and bell 2 is activated, and it is permitted that the combination of the symbols corresponding to these is displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the reel stop of step S5 described later Processing is performed. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 2 is displayed on the effective line, for example, nine medals are paid out as a prize, and when a combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is displayed on the effective line, The RB1 game is started. However, even if it is permitted to be displayed on the effective line both for the combination of the symbols corresponding to RB1 and the combination of the symbols corresponding to Bell 2, the combination of the symbols corresponding to Bell 2 has priority over the effective line A reel stop process is performed as indicated above. Here, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 2 is permitted to be displayed on the activated line only for the game that has been won. On the other hand, the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 is not limited to only the game that has been won, and continues to the combination of symbols corresponding to RB1 continuously on the effective line even after the next game, until the combination is displayed on the effective line. It is acceptable to be displayed.

  Here, the overlapping role means that a plurality of roles are selected simultaneously in one lottery opportunity. For example, in the case where a carry over character whose carry-on status is carried over to the next game is selected in the first game but the symbol combination corresponding to the carry over character is not displayed, for example, the first character is the second game. When picked out, it will be in the state where both the carry over part and the first part have been won, but in this case it is not selected as a duplicate because it is selected at another lottery opportunity each other . On the contrary, the single role means a role in which only one role is selected in one lottery opportunity.

  Also, with BB1, BB2, RB1 and RB2 as bonus roles, the roles with payout of medals in FIGS. 51 to 53 (for example, cherry, watermelon, bell 1, bell 2 etc.) are played as small roles and the same game as the previous game is executed. If the player can play the role (for example, a normal lip etc.) as the replay role, and it is simultaneously permitted to be displayed on the activated line for a plurality of symbol combinations, the priority of the replay role, the small role, and the bonus role correspond to these. Reel stop processing described later is performed so that the combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line.

  Also, "watermelon" is a single winning combination of watermelon. At this time, a combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon is allowed to be displayed on the effective line, and based on this, a reel stop process of step S5 described later is performed. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to watermelon is displayed on the effective line, for example, five medals are paid out as a prize.

  In addition, even if one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped in the symbol display window 401 (that is, on the effective line) within the range where the pull-in control described later can be performed. If the stop operation (the operation to press the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) is not performed, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can not be displayed on the activated line. Therefore, even if one of the winning combinations is won as a result of the lottery, if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the effective line, it is indicated that the game result is lost in step S6 described later. It is judged.

  “AT1” to “AT10” are all when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order determined for each, and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211a in the proper pressing order determined for each The number of medals paid out as a prize differs depending on the case where 211 c is not operated.

  Specifically, the proper pushing order for “AT1” and “AT2” is “left → middle → right” (hereinafter referred to as “forward pushing”). Then, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order, it is permitted that the symbol combination of the small item 17 of the operating condition devices is displayed on the effective line, Based on the above, the reel stop processing of step S5 described later is performed. Then, when the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line, nine medals, for example, are paid out as a prize. In addition, since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the small item 17 are disposed within the range where the pull-in control of the reel can be executed, when the result of the lottery is “AT1” or “AT2”, the pressing order is appropriate. As long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the effective line.

  In addition, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an incorrect pressing order, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, for example, two medals are paid out as a prize. The combination is displayed on the effective line. However, if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an inappropriate timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the effective line. At this time, the medal as a prize is not paid out.

  That is, when the result of the lottery is “AT1” or “AT2”, the symbol combination of the bell 1 is always displayed on the effective line as long as the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an incorrect pressing order, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, a combination of symbols in which one medal is paid out as a prize Is displayed on the effective line, and when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an incorrect timing, the lost symbol combination is displayed on the effective line.

  Note that the above-mentioned "appropriate timing" when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an improper pushing order differs between when the result of the lottery is "AT1" and when it is "AT2". There is. More specifically, the “appropriate timing” when the lottery result is “AT1” is the “incorrect timing” when the lottery result is “AT2”, and the lottery result is “AT1”. “Incorrect timing” at that time is “proper timing” when the result of the lottery is “AT2”.

  Also, the proper push order for "AT3" and "AT4" is "left → right → middle" (hereinafter referred to as "scissor push"), and the proper push order for "AT5" and "AT6" is " Middle → left → right or “middle → right → left” (hereinafter referred to as “middle press”), and the proper push order for “AT7” and “AT8” is “right → middle → left” (below) The proper pressing order for "AT 9" and "AT 10" is "right-> left-> middle" (hereinafter referred to as "reverse-scissor pressing"). Then, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order, it is permitted that the symbol combination of the small item 17 is displayed on the effective line, and based on this, step S5 described later Reel stop processing is performed. However, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in an incorrect pressing order, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an appropriate timing, a combination of symbols in which one medal is paid out as a prize Is displayed on the effective line, and when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated at an inappropriate timing, the symbol combination of the missing will be displayed on the effective line. Here, the "appropriate timing" when the result of the lottery is "AT3", "AT5", "AT7" and "AT9" has the result of the lottery "AT4", "AT6", "AT8" respectively. If the result is "AT3", "AT5", "AT7" and "AT9", the "inappropriate timing" is "lottery" respectively. The result is “incorrect timing” when the result is “AT4”, “AT6”, “AT8” and “AT10”.

  When the result of the lottery is any one of "AT1" to "AT10", the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in improper push order, and the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are further improper The symbol combination of the lost displayed on the effective line by having been operated is referred to as "bell-blowing" in this embodiment.

  "ALL" is a combination that becomes a lottery target only during the bonus game, and when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any pushing order and at any timing when the lottery result is "ALL". Even if there is, the symbol combination of the small item 17 is permitted to be displayed on the effective line, and based on this, the reel stop processing of step S5 described later is performed. As described above, since the symbols constituting the symbol combination of the accessory 17 are disposed within the range in which the pull-in control of the reel can be performed, the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is always performed when the result of the lottery is "ALL". Is displayed on the effective line. Then, when the symbol combination of the accessory 17 is displayed on the active line, nine medals, for example, are paid out as a prize.

  Each of “SB1” to “SB3” is a single role called single bonus, and is a lottery target only when it is any one of the general state, the normal RT, and the SB. Then, if the result of the lottery is any one of “SB1” to “SB3”, the combination of the symbols corresponding to each is permitted to be displayed on the activated line, and based on this, step S5 to be described later Reel stop processing is performed. When the combination of symbols corresponding to "SB1" to "SB3" is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state is controlled to "SB" only for the next game (this next game is called a single bonus game) ).

  Specifically, when the result of the lottery is "SB3", the condition device corresponding to SB3 is activated, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the activated condition device (combination of symbols corresponding to SB3) is on the effective line When the combination of symbols corresponding to SB3 is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state of the next game becomes "SB medium" shown in FIG.

  When the result of the lottery is “SB2”, the condition device corresponding to SB2 is activated, and the symbol combination (combination of symbols corresponding to SB2) corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the effective line Is acceptable. Also, when the result of the lottery is “SB1”, the condition device corresponding to SB1 is activated, and the symbol combination (combination of symbols corresponding to SB1) corresponding to the activated condition device is displayed on the effective line Is acceptable. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to SB2 or a combination of symbols corresponding to SB1 is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state of the next game becomes "SB medium" shown in FIG.

  In the case where the result of the lottery is “SB1” or “SB2”, the player can not easily grasp the combination of the displayed symbols on the activated line (“SB1” or “SB2”). It is displayed as a combination called so-called loose eyes. On the other hand, when the result of the lottery is "SB3", the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 50 is displayed on the effective line, and at this time, it is not on the effective line but in the lower part of each reel 301a to 301c. The replay pattern is aligned. As a result, the player can grasp that the result of the lottery is "SB3".

  "SB1 + Normal Rep"-"SB 3 + Normal Rep" are roles in which a single bonus and a normal replay are simultaneously won at the same time, and are not a lottery target in the general state, the normal RT and the SB. Only when (the chance RT1, the chance RT2, the chance RT3), the lottery is made. In other words, in the gaming state in which “SB1” to “SB3” are to be drawn, “SB1 + Rip normally” to “SB3 + Rip normally” are not drawn, and “SB1” to “SB3” are not drawn In the gaming state, "SB1 + normal lip" to "SB 3 + normal lip" are selected as lottery targets. In addition, when winning the “SB1 + Normal Rip”, “SB 2 + Normal Rip” or “SB 3 + Normal Rip”, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role is more than the symbol combination corresponding to the SB role (SB1, SB2, SB3) Reel stop processing to be described later is performed so as to be preferentially displayed on the valid line.

  Here, the bonus role (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2), the replay role (also called replay role), the small role (bell role (Bell 1, Bell 2), cherry role (cherry 1, cherry 2), watermelon role , AT special role, ALL role, bonus game special role), single bonus role (SB1, SB2, SB3) will be described.

[10-1-1. Bonus role]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a bonus combination such as BB1, BB2, RB1 or RB2 is won and a combination of symbols corresponding to any of these combinations is displayed on the effective line, the BB1 game, BB2 game, A bonus game such as an RB1 game or an RB2 game is executed. The bonus game is a game in which an opportunity is provided for the player to earn medals intensively over a plurality of games. However, as shown in FIG. 50, it is only the BB1 game and the BB2 game that the player can obtain a large amount of medals.

  Further, in the slot machine 1, when the symbol combination (symbol combination shown in FIG. 50) corresponding to the activated condition device is stopped on at least one of the valid lines among the upward and downward lines 523b and 623a, 1 As a result of the game of the number of times, an award according to the symbol combination stopped on the active line is awarded. However, in this case, when a combination of symbols corresponding to two winning combinations is displayed simultaneously on two valid lines such as a line going up to the right 523b and a line going down to the right 623a, according to the combination of these two figures Medals are paid out as a prize. Although the number of valid lines is two in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of valid lines is three or more, and the three valid lines are simultaneously overlapped to correspond to three or more winning combinations. When a combination of symbols to be displayed is displayed, a medal corresponding to the combination of three or more symbols may be paid out as a prize. However, the maximum number (for example, 15) of medals to be paid out in one game is determined in advance, and the number of medals to be paid out as a result of one game does not exceed this maximum number.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, single bonus roles such as SB1, SB2 and SB3 are also prepared. When the single bonus combination is won, the next game is controlled during the SB shown in FIG. 49 according to the winning combination of SBs, and the result of the lottery is any of "AT1" to "AT10". At the same time, an AT game extra lottery is performed in which the player is taught the proper pushing order.

[10-1-2. Role of Replay]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a replay role (also referred to as a replay role), normal replay (denoted as “ordinary rep” in FIG. 49) and ART replay 1 to 3 (“ART lip 1” in FIG. 49) "ART RIP 2" and "ART RIP 3" are described. The combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to this replay role is as being shown by FIGS. 51-53. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the replay role is displayed on the effective line, it is determined that the symbol combination of replay is complete. The normal replay is a winning combination in which the condition device of replay 1 is established, and is a winning combination in which a combination of replay symbols can be established in the middle regardless of the pushing order. On the other hand, ART Replay 1-3 is a winning combination in which a combination of specific symbols is established when the reels are stopped in the proper pressing order, respectively, and when operated in the improper pressing order, the symbols of the normal replay The combination takes precedence. In addition, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the above-mentioned replay role is difficult to be grasped by the player immediately as seen in FIG. 49, but the “replay symbol-replay symbol” is not displayed on the middle line. By displaying a combination of symbols of “replay symbol”, the player can grasp that the player has won the replay.

  As a replay role, there is also BAR replay. The BAR replay is a winning combination used as a trigger for a special gaming state using reel special effects on reels, and, for example, as described later, is a dedicated combination that can be won at a chance ART2 or a chance ART3. Furthermore, the BAR replay is a winning combination that triggers a special gaming state in which the number of continued games can be dramatically increased during the game of the chance ART 2 or the chance ART 3, that is, during the ART game.

  When the symbol combination of replay is displayed on the activated line, a game benefit of replay game is provided. In this replay game, the same game as the game in which the symbol combination of replay is displayed can be executed as replay, without inserting a medal or performing a bet operation again. Even if the symbol combination of replay is displayed on the effective line, the medal as a prize is not paid out.

  A feature of the game benefits of this replay game is that it is not necessary to consume new medals (to bet new medals) in the next game instead of not paying out medals. Further, since the replay is a winning combination that does not involve payout of medals, it can be said that, for example, by increasing the winning probability, it is very unlikely that the hole will be disadvantageous even if the winning frequency is high. Therefore, in the slot machine 1, in the normal state (corresponding to the general state and the normal RT in this embodiment), the probability of winning approximately once in 6 to 7 times is described (details will be described later). This makes it possible to keep the amount of medals consumed by the player (the number of medals consumed per fixed time) within a certain fixed range. That is, it is possible to give the winning combination "Replay" a role of suppressing the consumption of excessive medals in the progress of the game.

  In addition, each of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c uniformly arranges the symbols constituting the combination aspect of the symbols corresponding to the replay role (for example, the symbols constituting the combination aspect of the symbols corresponding to the replay role and the same replay role) By using one to at most four other symbols (symbols that do not constitute the symbol combination pattern corresponding to the replay role) to be arranged between the symbols constituting the symbol pattern combination corresponding to the symbol pattern, The combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the replay role can be made uniform without the need for a look.

  In addition, when the combination of the symbols corresponding to the normal replay is displayed on the activated line, the same game as the game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the normal replay is displayed can only be executed as a replay, but the ART replay is When a combination of symbols corresponding to 1 to 3 is displayed on the effective line, it functions as an opportunity to shift to a chance RT.

  When the winning combination is BAR replay, a condition device dedicated to BAR replay not shown in Replay 1 and FIG. 50 is established. If the correct order for pressing the reel stop button is correct, the condition device dedicated to BAR replay is given priority, and if the player operates the reel stop button at an appropriate timing, the main board 409 sets the combination of the winning BAR symbols to a predetermined line. Stop along. The combination of BAR symbols may be made to line up along the effective line, or the arrangement of the symbol combination such that the combination of BAR symbols is established in the middle line etc. of the non-effective line corresponds to the condition device dedicated to BAR replay It is good also as a symbol combination. On the other hand, when the correct order of pressing the reel stop button is not obtained, the condition device of replay 1 is prioritized and the combination of the replay symbols is arranged in the middle regardless of the timing at which the player operates the reel stop button. be able to.

[10-1-3. bell]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “bell 1” and “bell 2” are prepared as the bell role as described above. The combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to this bell combination is as being shown by FIGS. 51-53. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the bell combination is displayed on the effective line, it is determined that the combination of symbol combinations of the bell combination is complete, and medals (for example, nine pieces) as a prize are paid out. In addition, although the combination of the symbol corresponding to the bell 2 is difficult to be grasped immediately by the player as seen in FIG. 49, it is not an effective line but in the middle line, “bell 1 symbol or bell 2 symbol By displaying a combination of “bell 1 symbol − bell 1 symbol or bell 2 symbol”, the player can grasp that the bell 2 has been won. Although there is a slight difference in form between the bell 1 symbol and the bell 2 symbol, the two symbols are the same in that the same idea such as a bell is generated for the player.

  When a combination of symbols corresponding to bell 1 or a combination of symbols corresponding to bell 2 is displayed on the effective line, a prescribed number (for example, nine) of medals are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. Thus, the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 1 or the combination of symbols corresponding to the bell 2 can be expected to increase the number of medals in advancing the game, or can be expected to reduce the consumption of the medals. However, if the combination of symbols corresponding to bell 1 or the combination of symbols corresponding to bell 2 is displayed on the effective line at a high frequency, the player can increase the medal simply by advancing the game. . In addition, the symbol which constitutes the combination of the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 1 and the symbol combination corresponding to the bell 2 is disposed on each reel so that it can be displayed on the effective line without pushing the eyes. .

[10-1-4. Role of Cherry]
As described above, “Cherry 1” and “Cherry 2” are prepared in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as a cherry. The combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to this cherry combination is as being shown by FIGS. 51-53. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination of cherry is displayed on the effective line, it is determined that the combination of symbols of the combination of cherry is complete, and medals (for example, two pieces) as a prize are paid out.

[10-1-5. Role of watermelon]
The combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to a watermelon combination is as being shown by FIGS. 51-53. When a combination of symbols corresponding to the watermelon combination is displayed on the effective line, it is determined that the combination of watermelon combination symbols is complete, and medals (for example, five pieces) as a prize are paid out.

[10-1-6. Special role for AT]
As described above, “AT1” to “AT10” are prepared in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment as an AT-specific combination. The combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to these AT special part is as being shown by FIGS. 51-53. That is, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pushing order and the result of the lottery is any one of "AT1" to "AT10", it corresponds to the small item 17 in the activated condition device. The combination of symbols is displayed on the effective line. However, even if the result of the lottery is any of “AT1” to “AT10”, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated in the proper pressing order, one medal as a prize A combination of symbols to be paid out is displayed or a symbol combination of lost is displayed. The symbols constituting the combination of symbols from which one medal is paid out as a prize are arranged on each reel so that they can be displayed on the effective line without being pushed.

[10-1-7. Role of ALL]
The symbol combinations corresponding to the ALL combination are as shown in FIGS. However, even if the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in any pressing order and at any timing, the reel control is performed so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the small item 17 in the activated condition device is displayed on the effective line. Be done.

[10-1-8. Special role for bonus game]
Furthermore, there is a bonus game exclusive role as a winning combination that is effective only during a bonus game (in BB1 game, BB2 game, RB1 game and RB2 game). The bonus game-dedicated roles correspond to “Logo 1” to “Logo 7” in FIG. 49, and combinations of symbols (bonus game-dedicated role-designs) corresponding to these are as shown in FIG.

  When the bonus game exclusive combination symbols are aligned during the bonus game, a prescribed number (for example, 10) of medals are paid out. The payout of medals at this time is performed in the game. That is, when the bonus game exclusive combination symbols are aligned, a game bonus of payout of ten medals is provided. Then, during the bonus game, it is possible to intensively execute a plurality of games for which it is easy to obtain medals by making it easy to arrange the bonus game exclusive role. Therefore, the respective symbols constituting the combination of the bonus game dedicated combination symbols can be aligned on the effective line without performing a sighting.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the bonus game, the bonus game exclusive role and the ALL role are selected as lottery targets, but winning combinations different from these may be provided. Furthermore, a bell combination or a watermelon combination may be used instead, without providing a limited combination during the bonus game such as the bonus game special combination. In this case, the payout number of medals may be changed between the general state and the bonus game.

[10-1-9. Role of SB]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, “SB1” to “SB3” are prepared as the SB role as described above. The combination aspect of the symbol corresponding to these SB roles is as being shown by FIGS. 51-53. In addition, as described above, the SB role is drawn as a sole role in the normal state (general state, normal RT), but in the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), as a duplicate role with the normal replay. I will be drawn. And, in the normal state, as described above, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to SB1 or the combination of symbols corresponding to SB2 is displayed on the effective line, it is difficult for the player to be grasped, but the combination of symbols corresponding to SB3 When the symbol is displayed on the activated line, since the replay symbols are aligned on the lower side of each of the reels 301a to 301c, it is possible to grasp that the result of the lottery is "SB3". In the above, the general state and the normal RT are referred to as the normal state, but a state corresponding to the chance RT1 of the present embodiment in which loss occurs with the same probability as the general state or the normal RT will be described later. If the ART game is not executed, it may be referred to as a normal state.

  However, in the chance RT (Chance RT1, Chance RT2, Chance RT3), as described above, SB1 to SB3 are not drawn individually alone, and are usually drawn in duplicate in the same time with Replay. Ru. Then, when the normal replay is won at the same time, the reel control is performed such that the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay 1 among the activated condition devices is displayed on the activated line with the highest priority. The combination of symbols corresponding to this replay 1 is a combination in which the replay symbol is displayed in the middle of the non-effective line. Here, when winning in SB1 to SB3, an AT game additional lottery is performed.

  Therefore, especially when the probability of losing in the internal lottery is controlled to the chance RT1 which does not change from the normal state (general state, normal RT), the AT game extra drawing is compared with the time when it is controlled to the normal state. The frequency with which the result of the game is played is displayed, which in turn increases the frequency of giving the player a sense of expectation.

  On the other hand, the probability of losing in the internal lottery is controlled to be extremely low gaming state compared to the normal state (general state, normal RT), or controlled to the chance RT2 which is not lost in the internal lottery as in this embodiment. Since the appearance frequency of the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay becomes extremely high when being played, it is determined whether the AT game extra lottery is performed even if the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed. It will be difficult. As a result, in the case where the player is expected to draw interest, such as that there is a possibility that the additional lottery has been performed, or that there is a possibility that the additional lottery has been won, such an expected effect is effective. It is possible to do

[10-1-10. Missing you]
When it does not correspond to any of the combination of the symbols shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, it is lost. And in the said game which became a loss, provision of a medal | token is not performed, and it does not give a change to the game after next time. In addition, it can be said that a loss is a role which does not give a player any game privilege in the said game and the game after next time.

  The above is the combination aspect of each winning combination in the slot machine 1 and the symbols corresponding to each winning combination.

  In addition, these symbols are not limited to the combination aspect of the symbol and symbol which were demonstrated above. Also, in addition to the above-mentioned symbols, a plurality of kinds of symbols can be newly provided. And, it is possible to further increase or decrease the types of winning combinations. Furthermore, the winning combinations described above are not limited to the provision of all of the winning combinations, but may be selected as needed.

[11. Game processing]
Next, the flow of the game processing in the slot machine 1 will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main substrate 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 etc.).

  FIG. 54 shows one basic game processing procedure in the slot machine 1. First, in step S1, an initial setting for preparing for a game start is performed. In particular, when starting up the power supply, check the connection and operation status of the above-mentioned various devices, check the presence or absence of backup data, and if backup data exists, return to the state before power-off. Run.

  In the next step S2, the bet number is determined by the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203, or when there are already stored medals, by pressing the MAX insertion button 206 (or one-sheet insertion button 205). Thus, the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the bet number of one game is determined, and the BET processing is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a three-card bet-only machine which can execute a game by inserting three medals. Therefore, the one-sheet input button 205 may not be provided.

  In step S3, an internal lottery process is performed to start the game by the operation of the start lever 210 which is in the operation waiting state in step S2 and to determine whether any winning combination is to be the result of the internal lottery. Run. In this internal lottery process, any one of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c starting to rotate in the next step S4 is at a stage before it is in the stop state (stopped by the player's stop operation). It is executed in order to decide whether it is decided that the winning combination of is the lottery result of the game. That is, only when the lottery result of this lottery corresponds to any winning combination, when the stop operation of the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is performed, the symbol combination corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is on the effective line. It is acceptable to stop.

  Next, in step S4, a reel rotation process is performed to start rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c in accordance with the end of the internal lottery process of step S3. In this reel rotation process, when rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c is started, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c is validated, and the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c become valid. While turning on the operation effective lamp (not shown) to notify that the timer has been started, timer counting is started until the next reel rotation processing is executed. The operation effective lamp is a lamp built in each of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c.

  In step S5, the reel stop processing for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 301a, 301b, and 301c while turning off the operation effective lamps in the reception order is accepted when the player presses down the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c. Run.

  In the next step S6, only two lines in which all the lines rising rightward 623b and the lines where "bell 1 symbol-replay symbol-bell 1 symbol" are displayed in step S5 (that is, right falling line 623a) are effective lines When it is determined that the reel is stopped, the display contents (combination of symbols) displayed on the activated line and those permitted as a result of the internal lottery determined in step S3 above are A judgment process of judging the winning combination by collating is executed.

  In step S7, medal payout processing is executed based on the contents of the game bonus corresponding to the winning combination determined in step S6. In addition, when the winning combination is BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2, SB1, SB2, Replay, it grants to various game benefits such as change of the game state (change of the game state shown in FIG. 49) and replay Do.

  The above is the basic one game processing procedure of the slot machine 1. Here, step S2 (BET process), step S3 (internal lottery process), and step S4 (reel rotation process) are performed by the player as a series of external operations. Therefore, these processes (step S2, step S3, step S4) are collectively referred to as start process. The specific description of this start-up process is given below.

[11. Startup process]
FIG. 55 specifically shows each process performed in the start process.

  In the start-up process, first, at step S101, the operation of medal insertion or one-sheet insertion button 205 and MAX insertion button 206 is awaited. If there is a MAX bet operation or medal input, the determination in step S101 is satisfied, and the process moves to step S102. Note that this determination is satisfied only when the medal corresponding to the MAX bet is inserted (that is, three or more medals are inserted), or the one-sheet insertion button 205 and the MAX insertion button 206 serving as the MAX bet are operated. It is assumed.

  In the next step S102, as the acceptance process, the bet number (in this example, only the MAX bet) is determined, and the effective line lamp corresponding to the bet number is turned on. The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment is a dedicated three bet machine, and when three medals are inserted, the two lines of the upward line 623b and the downward line 623a become effective lines to indicate this. Turn on the line lamp.

  In step S103, the operation of the start lever 210 is validated. When the operation of the start lever 210 is validated, the operation waits until the operation of the start lever 210 is accepted, and the process proceeds to the next step S104.

  In the next step S104, it is determined whether the operation of the start lever 210 has been validated, and in this case, the operation of the start lever 210 has been accepted. When the operation of the start lever 210 is activated in the previous step S103, when the operation of the start lever 210 by the player is accepted, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S105.

  In addition, the determination in step S101 is not satisfied until the player does not perform the bet operation or the medal insertion in the above-described step S101, or the MAX bet is not reached, and the process proceeds to step S104. At this time, the determination in step S104 is not satisfied either, and the process returns to step S101 and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  Also, in the replay game, it is not necessary to newly bet a medal. This is automatically put into the MAX bet state when the MAX bet command is stored in the RAM 1114 in the replay game process described later. Thus, the determination in step S101 is satisfied.

  In step S105, in response to the operation of the start lever 210 in step S104, the operation of the start lever 210 is invalidated.

  Next, in step S106, when the start lever 210 is operated, the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c start to rotate, and random numbers are extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210. After extracting the random number, the process proceeds to the next step S107. As to the timing for extracting the random number at this time, set an appropriate extraction timing in the process of programming, such as immediately after operation of the start lever 210 or after a predetermined time (for example, after 0.5 seconds). Can.

  In step S107, it is determined from the extracted random number value (hereinafter referred to as an extracted random number value) that a winning combination (collation of random number values) corresponds to which winning combination. In this hit determination, the extracted random value is collated in a hit value determination table described later. The matching of the random number value performed here is to determine whether or not the extracted random number value corresponds (matches, matches) to the predetermined random number value of the winning combination. At this time, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the winning combinations, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is turned ON (= 1) (see FIG. 50). The winning probability for each winning combination in the win determination performed by collating the extracted random value with the win determination table is as shown in FIG.

  Then, in the flag processing, when the hit value determination table to be the determination reference is determined when the extracted random number values are compared in the game, the game state flag such as the BB game in-progress flag described later is referred to Determine a hit value determination table in the game. That is, the hit value determination table corresponding to the game state flag in the ON (= 1) state in the game is set, and the extracted random number values are compared. The game status flags include a normal RT flag, a chance RT1 flag, a chance RT2 flag, a chance RT3 flag, an SB flag, a bonus internal flag, and a bonus flag. When all of these game state flags are in the OFF (= 0) state, the general state flag is always in the ON (= 1) state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S107 that the extracted random number value does not correspond to any of the winning combinations, it is a "loss" that does not correspond to any of the winning combinations, and no condition device is activated (see FIG. 50) ). Here, when any one of the condition devices is ON (is satisfied), it is possible to arrange symbol combinations corresponding to the satisfied condition devices. The symbol combinations corresponding to the respective condition devices are as shown in FIGS. Therefore, in the case of a loss in which none of the condition devices are established, it is impossible to arrange symbol combinations corresponding to any of the winning combinations on the effective line. The above steps S106 and S107 are performed by random number lottery inside the slot machine 1. Hereinafter, these steps are collectively referred to as internal lottery or internal lottery. The process from the extraction of the random number to the flag process corresponds to the internal lottery (step S3 in FIG. 54 described above).

  Then, between step 107 and the next step 108, the main board performs processing of the special game state when the extracted random number value is a specific value. In this special game state, the main substrate 409 is set so that the rotation of the left middle right reel is not performed for a predetermined period (frozen), and the rotation mode of at least one reel of the left reel, middle reel and right reel is in the meantime Control is performed differently from the normal rotation mode, that is, effects in reel rotation (reel special effects) are performed. The effect control board 510 performs lottery processing for providing a predetermined benefit different from the bonus for payout of the game medal based on the winning combination, such as generation of an effect image for the liquid crystal display device, etc., in conjunction with the effect of reel rotation. Perform effect control processing in the special game state. The main board shifts to step 108 when the special game state is ended.

  In the next step S108, it is determined whether the wait timer started in the previous start process (specifically, the game immediately before the game concerned) has timed up (for example, 4.1 seconds have elapsed). The timer called the weight timer measures the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) from when the rotation of the reel is started in the game to when the rotation of the reel is started in the next game. It is a thing. Here, if the wait timer times up (4.1 seconds have already elapsed), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S109. Also, this determination loops until the wait timer times out.

  In step S109, rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is started. When the speed of rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b, 301c becomes constant, the operation effective lamps of the respective reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, 211c are turned on. By this lighting, the player knows that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c has become effective.

  In the slot machine 1, the reels that have started to rotate are kept rotating at the above-mentioned constant speed until the player's stop operation (pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c) is accepted. .

  Next, in step S110, the wait timer is reset, and the wait timer is started until the next start processing, and the start processing ends.

11-2. Internal lottery probability]
As described above, in the slot machine 1, the result of the internal lottery (the result of collation of the extracted random number values) is permitted as the winning combination (hereinafter referred to as the corresponding winning combination) corresponding to the game. Here, when the corresponding winning combination is permitted, the condition device corresponding to the corresponding winning combination is operated, and the information of the operated condition device is processed as an information command indicating the result of the internal lottery (the reel stop processing, It will be reflected in judgment processing, payout processing, etc.).

  In the slot machine 1, a range of random number values (this is called an extraction range) at the time of random number extraction is determined in advance. The extraction range can be determined, for example, as an integer value from 0 to 16383 (that is, 214 = 16384 random numbers). In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, the random numbers in the extraction range are 0 to 59999 for convenience, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this. When the random number extraction range is expanded, the range of random number values that can be extracted (so-called denominator) is increased by that amount, so it is less likely that a specific random value will be extracted in a biased manner.

  Within the above extraction range, random number values corresponding to the respective winning combinations are assigned in advance. For example, if the random number value corresponding to RB 2 among the random number values in the extraction range (0 to 59999 in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment) is “1”, the extracted random number becomes “1”. The result of the internal lottery is that "RB2 has been won", and the condition device of RB2 is processed as an information command in the game. Further, using this, it is possible to calculate the winning probability of RB2 (the probability that RB2 is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the lottery probability) from the extraction range and the random number value corresponding to RB2. In the above example (RB2), when the total number of random number values corresponding to RB2 is divided by the total number of random number values within the extraction range, the value is 2/60000 and the probability of winning RB2 is 1/30000. It can be calculated.

  As described above, corresponding random numbers are determined for all the winning combinations, and these random values are referred to as winning values corresponding to the respective winning combinations. In the above example (RB2), the random value “1” in the extraction range is the winning value corresponding to RB2. In addition, when there are a plurality of winning values, if, for example, the winning value of a predetermined combination is set to continuous random number values “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” within the extraction range, the winning combination The range of values is from random number "1" to "4". Then, when it is determined that the extracted random number value corresponds to any of the random number values “1” to “4” (collated), it means that “the predetermined winning combination has been won” as a result of the internal lottery. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to a single role winning only one winning combination (for example, RB2, Bell 1, Bell 2 etc.), a double winning combination (for example, “RB1 + "Watermelon", "BB1 + Bell 2", etc. are prepared. Therefore, with regard to such a duplicating combination, the winning combination of the duplicating combination is also included in the above-mentioned winning values.

  From this, the range of winning values is determined for all winning combinations, and it is determined in the internal lottery whether or not the extracted random number value falls within the range of winning values of any of the winning combinations. At this time, if the extracted random number value does not fall within the range of the winning value of any winning combination, it means a loss. That is, the range of the winnings for the loss is outside the range of the winnings for all the winning combinations. The winning value may also be called a winning tolerance value.

  By the way, a single winning combination means that one winning combination corresponds to one extracted random number value, and a double winning combination means a plurality of (two in this case) winning combinations for one extracted random value. Is the corresponding one. That is, when the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning combination of the double winning combination, it means that any of the plurality of winning combinations has been won. For example, in the case where the extracted random number value corresponds to the winning value corresponding to “SB1 + normal ripple” shown in FIG. 49, as shown in FIG. 50 in the above-described flag processing (see step S107 in FIG. 55). The condition apparatus corresponding to SB1 and the condition apparatus corresponding to the normal replay are simultaneously established.

  Further, according to FIG. 49, during the bonus, the winning values of the role of ALL and the role of bonus game exclusive role (logo 1 to logo 7) occupy most of the extraction range. Therefore, when the bonus game is executed, a large amount of medals will be paid out during the period in which the bonus game is executed.

  Further, as can be seen also in FIG. 49, there is a possibility that the sole role of SB1, SB2 and SB3 may be won during the general state, during the normal RT and during the SB, and “SB1 + normal ripple”, “SB2 + normal We will not win the dual role of SB and normal replay such as “rip” and “SB3 + normal ripple”. On the other hand, during the chance RT (Chance RT1, Chance RT2, Chance RT3), there is no possibility of winning the sole role such as SB1, SB2 and SB3, but "SB1 + Normal Lip", "SB 2 + Regular Lip" and "SB 3 + Normal Lip" There is a possibility of winning the dual role between the SB and the normal replay. Moreover, the probability of winning the sole role of SB1, SB2 or SB3 during the general state, during the normal RT and during the SB, is the overlap between “SB1 + normal trip”, “SB2 + normal trip” or “SB3 + normal trip” during the chance RT It is the same as the probability of winning a winning combination. That is, during the chance RT, instead of the sole role of SB1, SB2 and SB3 which may be won during the general condition, during the normal RT and during the SB, “SB1 + normal lip”, “SB2 + normal lip” and It means that there is a possibility of winning "SB3 + Normal Lip".

  As described above, when the player wins “SB1 + Regular Lip”, “SB2 + Regular Rip” or “SB3 + Regular Rip”, it supports the regular replay role more than the symbol combination corresponding to the SB role (SB1, SB2, SB3). The reel stop process of step S is performed so that the symbol combination to be displayed is preferentially displayed on the activated line. Here, since the replay symbols are uniformly arranged on the reels 301a to 301c within the range in which the reels can be drawn in and controlled, the replay symbols correspond to the normal replay role despite being elected as the normal replay role. There is no case where the symbol combination to be displayed is not displayed on the effective line (so-called dropout). Then, when the player wins "SB1 + Regular Lip", "SB2 + Regular Rip" or "SB3 + Regular Rip", the symbol combination corresponding to the Normal Replay combination is always displayed on the active line, even if the combination is SB (SB1, SB1). Even if SB2 and SB3) are elected as overlapping players, it is impossible for the slot machine 1 of this embodiment to display symbol combinations corresponding to the SB positions on the effective line.

11-3. Transition of gaming state]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a game state transition control process executed by the CPU 1110 mounted on the main substrate 409.

  First, it is determined whether or not a bonus game (BB1 game, BB2 game, RB1 game, RB2 game) is being played (step S151), and when the bonus game is over (YES in step S152), the general state is entered ( Step S153). In this general state, when the game is executed for a predetermined period, the number of medals bet for the player to execute the game is larger than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game in the predetermined period. That is, the general state is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game.

  If it is determined in step S151 that the bonus game (BB1 game, BB2 game, RB1 game, RB2 game) is not in progress (NO in step S151), it is determined whether or not the bonus internal is in progress (step S154). That is, when the bonus combination (BB1, BB2, RB1, RB2) is won in the internal lottery, the condition device corresponding to the bonus combination operates, but the condition device corresponding to this bonus combination is the bonus in the game won in the internal lottery Even if the symbol combination corresponding to the combination is not displayed on the effective line, the game continues to be operated until the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the effective line, even after the next game. When it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S155), the bonus game is executed (step S156), and the bonus game is executed.

  If it is determined in step S154 that the bonus is not inside (NO in step S154), it is determined whether or not SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) is in progress (step S157). When the SB is in progress, the SB game of one game is executed, and when this SB game is over (YES in step S158), the original gaming state, ie, the gaming state immediately before the SB game is executed is shifted (step S159). .

  If it is determined in step S157 that SB is not in progress (NO in step S157), it is determined whether it is a chance RT (whether it is any one of chance RT1, chance RT2 and chance RT3) ( Step S160). When it is the chance RT (YES in step S160), it is determined whether or not it is a bonus, that is, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (step S161), the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination If it is determined that the combination is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S161), the process proceeds to the bonus (step S156), and the bonus game is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S161 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the activated line (NO in step S161), it is determined whether or not "bell bump" is displayed on the activated line. (Step S163). If it is determined in this chance RT that "bell-bump eyes" are displayed on the activated line (YES in step S163), the process proceeds to normal RT (step S164). Although not shown here, when the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed despite the bonus winning in the internal lottery, the inside of the bonus is transferred and the SB is won in the internal lottery In the case, it shifts to SB. The same applies to the normal RT and the general state described later.

  If it is determined in step S160 that it is not the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, or chance RT3) (NO in step S160), it is determined whether it is the normal RT (step S165). When it is the normal RT (YES in step S165), it is determined whether or not it is a bonus, that is, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (step S166), the symbol corresponding to the bonus combination If it is determined that the combination is displayed on the activated line (YES in step S166), the process proceeds to the bonus (step S167), and the bonus game is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the activated line in step S166 (NO in step S166), it is determined whether the result of the internal lottery is ART replay (step S168). ). Here, if it is determined that the result of the internal lottery is ART replay (YES in step S168), transition to a chance RT is made regardless of whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to ART replay is displayed on the effective line. (Step S169).

  When the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the normal RT and correct in the pushing order (YES in step S168), the gaming state first shifts to the chance ART1. Then, although not shown in FIG. 56, when the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the chance ART1 and the pressing order of the reel stop button is correct, the gaming state shifts to the chance ART2. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 56, when the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the chance ART 2, the main board performs a gaming state to a special gaming state (described later) which dramatically increases the number of continued games during the ART game. Migrate When the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the chance ART 2, the main board may distribute the transition to the special gaming state and / or the transition to the gaming state of the chance ART 3 based on the lottery result. , And may be distributed according to ART Replay 1-3. Further, the main board may shift the gaming state from the chance ART 1 to the chance ART 3 when winning the ART replay in the internal lottery in the chance ART 1. Even if any gaming state among the chance ART1, the chance ART2 and the chance ART3 is controlled, the gaming state shifts to the normal RT when the "bell-bump eyes" are displayed on the activated line.

  When it is determined in step S165 that the game is not the normal RT (NO in step S165), the gaming state is controlled to the general state. Also in this general state, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus, that is, whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line (step S170), and the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is the activated line. When it is determined that the game is displayed (YES in step S170), the bonus game is executed (step S171), and the bonus game is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S170 that the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is not displayed on the activated line (NO in step S170), it is determined whether "bell bump" is displayed on the activated line. (Step S172). If it is determined in this general state that "bell-blowing eyes" are displayed on the activated line (YES in step S172), the process proceeds to normal RT (step S173).

  By the way, in the normal RT, as in the general state, when the game is executed over a certain period, the number of medals bet for the player to execute the game more than the number of medals paid out as a result of the game within this fixed period. Will be more. That is, the normal RT is a gaming state in which the number of medals decreases as the player executes the game, as in the general state.

  Note that the probability that each winning combination will be won in the internal lottery in each gaming state in the general state, normal RT, chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), SB inside, bonus inside and bonus is shown in FIG. As indicated in.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the result information of the internal lottery is output from the main substrate 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control substrate 510 as an information command. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that receives the result information of the internal lottery output from the main board 409 is provided with means for executing effects using the image display body 500 and / or the speaker 512 based on the result information. . For example, in the chance RT, when the result of the internal lottery is any of "AT1" to "AT10", the proper pressing order for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is, for example, the image display body 500 or / and the speaker It is clearly indicated by the effect using 512. As such, when the result of the internal lottery is any of "AT1" to "AT10", the effect of clearly showing the player the proper pressing order for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is, for example, the general state And usually not done in RT. Therefore, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of “AT1” to “AT10”, the one under the control of the chance RT is more than the one under the control of the general state or the normal RT. It becomes easy for the player to display symbol combinations corresponding to “AT10” on the effective line. In this respect, the chance RT can be said to be an advantageous gaming state for the player compared to the general state and the normal RT.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state is controlled to any one of the normal state (general state and normal RT) and the gaming state including the chance RT (the chance RT1, the chance RT2, the chance RT3). .

  Then, in the above-described normal state, the internal lottery is performed as a sole role that is not selected simultaneously with the other role at the same lottery opportunity for both the normal replay role and the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3). In the normal state, a loss is selected at a predetermined probability.

  In the chance RT (Chance RT1, Chance RT2, Chance RT3), the probability that the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination is selected is 200 / 60,000, which is the same probability as the normal state. However, in the chance RT, an internal lottery is performed so that the normal replay role and the SB role are simultaneously selected at the same lottery opportunity.

  That is, in the chance RT (chance RT1, chance RT2, chance RT3), in place of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) role that was only a single role in the normal state, an SB role and a normal replay role are simultaneously selected. It plays a role. However, with regard to the normal replay role that was the sole role in the normal state, it remains the sole role in the chance RT. That is, in the chance RT, the probability that the normal replay role is selected is increased as much as the normal replay position is selected and overlapped with the SB role. In the chance RT2 of the chance RT, a normal replay role is selected in place of the loss.

  Furthermore, in this gaming machine, when an overlapping combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination and the normal replay combination is selected in the internal lottery at the chance RT, and a normal replay combination not overlapping with the SB combination. When a single character combination is selected, the stop control of the reels 301a to 301c in the rotational display state is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 1 is displayed on the effective line. It will be. Here, when an overlapping combination of the SB combination and the normal replay combination is selected, although the symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination is not displayed, it is the ART provision condition described later that winning the SB combination is described later. Will satisfy the ART grant condition.

  In particular, when the player is in the chance RT1, since the loss probability is the same as in the normal state, the player is made to feel that the expectation of winning the SB role and thus the frequency of the ART provision condition are increased. It becomes possible. As a result, in the chance RT1, it is possible to have an expectation as to whether or not the ART provision condition is satisfied, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when it is in the chance RT2, everything that was a loss in the general condition, the normal RT and the chance RT1 becomes the normal replay, and the combined role of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the normal replay combination, The symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 1 is displayed on the effective line even if any of the normal replay roles (separate role) is selected in the internal lottery. Therefore, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 1 is displayed on the activated line when winning to the SB role is the ART provision condition described later, the player displays it on the activated line. From the aspect of the combination of the designs, it is difficult to grasp whether or not the ART provision condition is satisfied.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in principle, even if the combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the normal replay combination is selected in the internal lottery, A symbol combination (symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 1) corresponding to the replay role (separate role) is displayed on the effective line. However, even if the combination of the SB and the normal replay is selected in the internal lottery, when the specific condition is satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay 1 among the activated condition devices is the best. Instead of being reel-controlled to be displayed on the activated line by priority, reel control is performed such that symbol combinations corresponding to other condition devices are displayed on the activated line by top priority.

  Specifically, when the specific condition is satisfied when the combination selected in the internal lottery is “SB1 + Normal Rip”, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 2 is the highest among the activated condition devices. Reels are controlled so as to be displayed on the activated line by priority. In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied when the combination selected in the internal lottery is "SB 2 + normal return" and "SB 3 + normal return", the condition device of replay 3 among the activated condition devices Reel control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to is displayed on the effective line with the highest priority.

  In addition, when the specific condition is satisfied when the combination selected in the internal lottery is "SB1 + Normal Lip", the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of SB1 among the condition devices that operated is given top priority, Then, the reel combination may be controlled such that the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 2 is preferentially displayed on the activated line. Similarly, when the specific condition is satisfied when the combination selected in the internal lottery is "SB 2 + normal rep", among the activated condition devices, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of SB 2 has the highest priority, Next, the reel combination may be controlled so that the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 3 is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the combination selected in the internal lottery is “SB3 + Normal When the specific condition is satisfied, the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of SB3 has the highest priority among the activated condition devices, and then the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 3 is prioritized. Reel control may be made to be displayed on the effective line.

  By the way, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned specific condition is that the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper pressing order. Specifically, when a combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the normal replay role is selected in the internal lottery, "left → middle → right" is sequentially pressed, and "left → right" → Press the middle of the “middle”, middle press the “middle → left → right”, middle press the “middle → right → left”, reverse press the “right → left → middle” and “right → left → middle” reverse scissors Of the six push orders of push, any one push order is determined. Then, when the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the determined push order, the above-described specific condition is satisfied on the assumption that the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are operated in the proper push order.

  If an overlapping combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the normal replay combination is selected in the internal lottery, it is determined that one of the six pressing orders is selected. However, the number of push sequences determined is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

  Further, it goes without saying that the above-mentioned specific condition is not limited to the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in the proper pressing order. For example, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c may be stopped so that at least one or all of the three reels 301a to 301c are stopped at an appropriate timing.

  By the way, neither of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the normal replay role carry over the winning state until the next game. Therefore, even if the combination of the SB and the normal replay is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay is displayed in the current game, the combination corresponds to the SB unless the combination of the SB and the subsequent replay is won again. Since the symbol combination can not be displayed on the effective line, if the above-mentioned specific condition is not established, the result of the internal lottery may be a combination of the SB combination and the normal replay combination as a mere combination. It is not immediately understood by the player that the player has played the role of normal replay. Therefore, when winning the combination of the SB and the normal replay in the internal lottery, the overlapping game is won in the internal lottery while the ART game is actually executed from the winning game. Even if not, by performing various expectation effects during any period, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation given to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the chance RT2 of the chance RT, a normal replay role is selected in place of the loss. That is, all of the extracted random number values that were lost in the normal state are normally regarded as the replay role, and the probability of losing is zero. Further, with regard to the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3), although the winning probability is 600 / 60,000 which is the same as in the normal state, the combination of the SB role and the normal replay role is performed. That is, in this chance RT2, the player who has lost in the normal state (general state, normal RT) or the chance RT1 is replaced with this loss and the normal replay role is won.

  Also in this chance RT2, in place of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) combination that was the sole combination in the normal state, the SB combination and the normal replay combination are simultaneously selected in the same lottery opportunity. However, with regard to the normal replay role who was a sole role in the normal state, the role remains the sole role also in the chance RT2, and further, the normal replay role is a part until the part which was a loss in the normal state. Therefore, in this chance RT2, even if a symbol combination corresponding to a normal replay player is displayed, the appearance frequency is extremely high (in this embodiment, the probability of losing is 50% or more). Unlike in the case of the chance RT1, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the overlapping role and thus the normal replay position is displayed, the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the ordinary replay position are selected simultaneously at the same lottery opportunity. There is little hope of being As a result, in the chance RT2, it can be made difficult to grasp from the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels 301a to 301c are stopped, whether or not the ART addition lottery has been performed. As a result, for example, in the case where an effect such as clearly indicating to the player that the ART addition lottery is performed or that there is a possibility of winning the ART addition lottery is executed, the plurality of reels 301a to 301c are stopped. It is difficult to know whether or not the ART grant lottery has been performed from the combination of the symbols when played, and it is possible to make such an effect interesting.

[11-3-1. Chance RT]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the ART replay is won in the internal lottery in the normal RT, the chance RT is started from the next game.

  Here, the chance RT is a game in a game period from the start of the chance RT to the display of “BELL BROWN” on the effective line, and in this chance RT, it can be understood also from FIG. As such, the probability of winning the replay is made easier to win than in the general state. In the chance RT, for example, the image display body 500 or / and the speaker is selected by the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 in order to prevent the display of the “bell bump” on the activated line for a certain number of games. An effect using 512 is executed. That is, when the result of the internal lottery is any one of "AT1" to "AT10", the reel stop buttons 211a to 211a in the proper pressing order so that "bells and eyes" are not displayed on the effective line. An effect that urges the operation of 211c or an effect that urges the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c at appropriate timing is performed. By operating the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c based on the effect thus prompted, the chance RT can be continued for a certain number of games. Then, when a game of a fixed number of games is executed, the effect for preventing the display of the “bell bump” on the active line is ended. As a result, any player wins any of "AT1" to "AT10" in an internal lottery, "Bell Bump" is displayed on the activated line, and the chance RT ends.

  Further, during the chance RT, the player is made to execute in a mode that can recognize (identify) that the gaming state is during the chance RT. Specifically, it is assumed that identification is possible by displaying (by the image display body 500 or the like) that the chance RT is being performed or by sound effects (by the speaker 512 or the like).

  The slot machine 1 is provided with a plurality of setting values (four steps from setting values 1 to 4) (not shown). And in each set value, a difference (a step difference, an extreme difference, etc.) is attached to the internal lottery probability. As the setting value, the higher the setting value, such as setting value 1 <setting value 2 <setting value 3 <setting value 4, it is preferable that the bonus winning combination and the internal lottery probability of ART replay be more preferential. For example, since the winning probability of BB1 is determined to be high at the setting value 4 compared to the setting value 1, the possibility of winning the BB1 is high. By providing stepwise setting values in this manner, each setting value has a feature to be used as a clue when the player estimates the setting value, or a setting value according to the management of a hole or the like. It is possible to operate the In addition, it is not restricted to the above setting values.

11-4. Reel stop processing]
When the start-up process is completed, an operation (stop operation, that is, pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c) for stopping the reel which continues to rotate at a constant speed is in a waiting state. FIG. 57 shows the contents of the reel stop processing by the “table method” as an example. Below, the flow of processing of reel stop control is explained.

  In the reel stop process, first, in step S201, the reel stop control table is selected in accordance with the condition device operated in accordance with the result of the internal lottery in the game. In this reel stop control table, patterns corresponding to all the condition devices on a one-to-one basis are prepared in advance, and these are stored in the ROM 1112 of the main board 409 as read-only table data.

  When the reel stop control table is selected based on the condition device established at step S201 above, the process waits until the pressing operation of each reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c is received (step S202). , S210, S217). In these standby states, whether or not each reel of the left reel 301a, middle reel 301b, and right reel 301c has already stopped, or a state where the first reel stop flag is not ON (F = 0, that is, OFF It is also determined whether any one of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c has been pressed. The determination in step S209 is not satisfied until the pressing operation of all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c is accepted, and the processing in step S202 and subsequent steps is repeated.

  Here, the order in which the pressing operations of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c are received (stop operation procedure) is called a stop operation procedure called “forward press”, “reverse press” and “middle press” (or both press orders). Say).

The above-mentioned “forward push” stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the left reel 301 a first (that is, a procedure for pressing the left reel stop button 211 a first), and From the operation order of the reels to be stopped after the
[Left reel → middle reel → right reel],
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures of [left reel → right reel → middle reel]. These two are collectively called "forward push". In addition, the latter stop operation procedure may be called "scissor pushing" especially.

The above-mentioned "reverse press" stop operation procedure is an operation procedure for stopping the right reel 301c firstly in reverse to "forward press" (in other words, the procedure for pressing the right reel stop button 211c first) The order of operation of the reels to be stopped after the second
[Right reel → middle reel → left reel],
Or
It is further divided into two stop operation procedures of [right reel → left reel → middle reel]. These two are collectively called "reverse push". In addition, the latter stop operation procedure may be called especially "reverse scissor push".

The above-mentioned "middle press" stop operation procedure refers to an operation procedure for stopping the middle reel 301b first (that is, a procedure for pressing the middle reel stop button 211b first) and the second operation procedure. From the operation order of the reels to be stopped later,
[Middle reel → left reel → right reel],
Or
It can be further divided into two stop operation procedures of [middle reel → right reel → left reel]. These two are collectively called "middle push".

  In step S202, it is determined whether the flag (left reel stop flag LF) indicating that the left reel 301a is in the stop state is OFF (LF = 0) and whether the pressing operation of the left reel stop button 211a is accepted. Do. In step S201, assuming that the left reel stop button 211a is pressed first (first) along the stop operation procedure of "forward press" from the standby state of the press operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c, step S202. Is satisfied, and the process moves to step S203.

  In step S203, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0). The term "first reel" as used herein refers to the first reel on which the stop operation is accepted or the first stop. In this example (“forward press”), the stop operation of the left reel 301 a is received first, so the first reel stop flag is in the OFF state (F = 0). Therefore, the determination in step S203 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

  In the next step S204, the first reel stop process is performed on the left reel 301a. In this first reel stop process, control of the stop position of the winning combination symbol corresponding to the internal lottery flag is executed based on the reel stop control table corresponding to the operating condition device.

  In step S206, the reel stop control tables for the remaining middle reels 301b and right reels 301c are determined. As described above, since the effective line of the slot machine 1 is only two lines of upward and downward right lines and right and downward lines, the stop control table of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b and right reel 301c) is one at this point. It can be decided. In other words, among the symbols in the symbol display window 401 of the first stop reel (in this case, the left reel 301a) (this will be referred to as a stop, the same applies hereinafter) If it is a symbol with character, select a reel stop control table capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination symbols of the remaining reels (middle reel 301b, right reel 301c) on the effective line based on the corresponding symbol It will be.

  In step S207, the first reel stop flag is set to ON (F = 1), and the process proceeds to the next step S208.

  Next, at step S208, the left reel stop flag LF is set to ON (LF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Then, in step S209, it is determined whether all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c have stopped. In this example, only the left reel stop flag LF is turned ON, and since the middle reel 301b and the right reel 301c are still rotating, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202 and the subsequent processing is repeated. Run.

  Then, when the process after step S202 is executed again, the determination of step S202 is not satisfied because the left reel 301a is already in the stop state, and the process proceeds to step S210.

  In step S210, it is determined whether the flag (medium reel stop flag MF) indicating that the middle reel 301b is in the stopped state is off (MF = 0), and whether the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211b is accepted. Do. Here, in order to follow the stop operation procedure of “forward press”, the pressing operation of the middle reel stop button 211 b is accepted. Therefore, the determination in step S210 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S211.

  In step S211, it is determined whether the first reel stop flag is OFF (F = 0) as in step S203. Then, since the first reel stop flag is already ON (F = 1) at this time, this determination is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, as the middle reel stop processing, control of the stop position of the corresponding winning combination based on the reel control table corresponding to the operating condition device (in this case, the reel stop control table determined in step S206 above) Run. At this time, the middle reel 301b is the second reel to stop (second reel), and steps S212, S214, and S215 are all bypassed, and the process proceeds to step S216 to turn on the middle reel stop flag MF (MF = 1). Then, the process proceeds to step S209.

  Then, in step S209 again, only the left reel 301a and the middle reel 301b are in the stop state, and the right reel 301c is still rotating and in the stop state (the right reel stop flag RF is OFF). Since there is not, this determination is not satisfied, and the process returns to step S202, and the subsequent processes are repeated.

  Furthermore, in the processing after the third step S202, it is first determined in step S217 whether the right reel stop flag MF is OFF (MF = 0) and whether the pressing operation of the right reel stop button 211c has been accepted. Although the processing of the subsequent steps S218 and S220 is the same as the processing after the above-described step S210 (steps S211 and S213), the detailed description will be omitted.

  Then, in step S223, the right reel stop flag RF is set to ON (MF = 1), and the process proceeds to step S209.

  Finally, in step S209, since all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are in the stop state at this time, this determination is satisfied, and the reel stop process is ended.

  In addition, since the description similar to the above can be performed also in the case of the stop operation procedure of "middle press", details are omitted. However, in the case of the "reverse push" stop operation procedure, since there are some differences from the above description, it will be described below.

  The difference between the “reverse push” stop operation procedure and the “forward push” or “middle push” stop operation procedure is in step S 221 (decision of the remaining reel stop control table after the first reel stop processing). is there. That is, in the stop operation procedure of "reverse push", only the right reel 301c is in the stop state, and if there is any winning symbol in the lower position among the stop positions of the right reel 301c, two valid still It is possible to arrange the corresponding winning combination in any of the lines. Therefore, at the stage of step S221, a plurality of reel stop control tables capable of aligning the corresponding winning combination on any activated line may be prepared, and one of them may be selected.

[11-4-1. Reel stop control]
In the above-described reel stop processing, reel stop control is performed to draw in the winning combination (corresponding winning combination) corresponding to the formation flag as much as possible into the symbol display window 401 (so-called pull-in control). Specifically, when the player's stop operation of the reel is accepted, the range which can be stopped in the symbol display window 401 (the range where the corresponding winning combination can be drawn, for example, four symbols) Minute) is determined in advance, and if there is a corresponding winning combination in the range, this is drawn into the symbol display window 401 to execute control to stop the reel. Note that the "retractable range" mentioned here refers to the maximum number of symbols that can be moved in the direction of rotation of the reel after the reel stop operation is received until the reel is stopped. Say. For example, if the drawable range is at most four symbols, when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, the reel can be further rotationally moved by four symbols based on the position.

  Therefore, according to such reel stop control, at the time when the stop operation of the reel is accepted, even if there is no corresponding winning combination in the symbol display window 401, the corresponding corresponding winning combination can be drawn in. If so, it is possible to stop the corresponding winning combination by moving it into the symbol display window 401. In addition, by performing this retraction control, even if the player has made the timing of the pressing of the corresponding winning combination somewhat earlier, if there is the winning combination within the retractable range, the winning combination is displayed as a symbol. It can be pulled into the window 401 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a dropout (the fact that the game bonus disappears without being able to obtain the game bonus corresponding to the winning combination without aligning the winning combination).

  In the slot machine 1, when the condition device corresponding to the normal replay role, the bell 1, the bell 2, the role ALL, etc. is in operation, the corresponding winning role symbols must be aligned without the need for the player's eyes (See FIG. 46 above). This is that, for the symbols that make up the symbol combinations corresponding to each of the normal replay role, bell 1, bell 2 and ALL role etc., the corresponding winning combination symbols are arranged at intervals of up to four symbols It is because

  Further, focusing on the replay symbol, up to four other symbols are arranged on the left reel 301a from the replay symbol to the replay symbol (see FIG. 46). As a result, on the left reel 301a, regardless of the position on the reel where the stop operation is accepted, the replay symbol is always drawn to any position on the effective line and stopped as long as the condition device corresponding to the replay role is operating. be able to.

  Further, when the result of the internal lottery is a bonus combination and a combination of the small combination, it is assumed that the small combination is preferentially drawn over the bonus symbol. When the bonus combination and the small combination are won, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination is displayed in this winning game, the symbol combination corresponding to the bonus combination is displayed in the next and subsequent games. It is.

  The above is an example of the reel stop process by the table system. Although there is a reel stop process by a control system separately from this, since a well-known process is applicable also about this, concrete description is omitted here. Further, in the present embodiment, either reel stop processing of the control method or the table method may be executed, and which method is adopted may be appropriately determined when constructing the control program.

11-5. Determination process]
When the reel stop processing is completed, whether or not the winning combinations are aligned on any of the activated lines in the symbol display window 401 (whether the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations is displayed) Make a decision. In FIG. 58, the contents of this determination process will be specifically described.

  When all reels 301a, 301b, 301c are stopped by the reel stop processing, whether the winning combinations or symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines from the stopping eye aspect in the symbol display window 401 (corresponds to the winning combination) It is determined whether the combination aspect of the symbol to be displayed is displayed). In addition, the thing of the stop in particular when all the reels come to a stop state may be called an outcome.

  In steps S301, S302, and S303, it is determined whether the SB game, the RB game, or the BB game is in progress. This is to determine the ON state (= 1) and OFF state (= 0) of the game state flags such as the flag during SB, the flag during RB game, and the flag during BB game.

  If the flag during SB is ON (= 1), the determination in step S301 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S390. Similarly, when the RB game in-progress flag is ON (= 1), the determination in step S302 is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S380. If the BB game in-progress flag is ON (= 1), the determination at step S303 is satisfied, and the routine goes to step S370.

  If any of the flag during SB, the flag during RB game and the flag during BB game is OFF (= 0), the determinations of steps S301, S302, and S303 are not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S304.

  After executing the RT game end determination process (details will be described later) in step S304, the following steps S310, S320, S330, S340, and S350 are further performed according to the winning combinations arranged on any of the activated lines. Move to any of.

  In step S310, it is determined whether the BB symbols are aligned. If the BB symbols are aligned on any of the activated lines ("Red 7 symbols-Red 7 symbols-Red 7 symbols"), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S312.

  In the next step S312, a BB game start process is executed. Here, as the BB game, processing is performed to concentrate on a plurality of games in which medals can be easily obtained (the details will be described later).

  In step S320, it is determined whether the RB symbols are aligned. If the RB symbol is aligned on any of the effective lines ("White 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol-Red 7 symbol"), this determination is satisfied, and the routine goes to the next Step S322.

  In the next step S322, an RB game start process is executed. Here, as the RB game, processing is performed to concentrate on a plurality of games in which it is easy to obtain medals according to the BB game (details will be described later).

  In step S330, it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination (SB1, SB2, SB3) is complete. If the symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination is complete on any of the activated lines, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S332.

  In the next step S332, SB game start processing is executed. Here, as the SB game, only in the next game of the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the SB combination is displayed on the effective line, the game over several times where it is easy to obtain medals according to the winning probability for the winning combination is concentrated Processing will be performed (details will be described later). The CRB game start process in step S332 corresponds to the forced winning game state starting means described in the solution means.

  In step S340, it is determined whether the replay symbols are in alignment. If the replay symbol is aligned on any of the activated lines ("lip bell symbol-replay symbol-replay symbol"), this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S342.

  In the next step S342, a replay game process is executed. In this replay game process, the MAX bet command is temporarily stored in the RAM 1114 in order to start the next game with the same bet number as the bet number in the game (MAX bet in this example). Based on this command, the next game can be started as replay.

  Then, in step S344, the replay winning flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process is ended.

  In step S350, it is determined whether the small winning combination symbols are aligned. If the small winning combination symbol is aligned on any of the activated lines, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S352.

  In the next step S352, payout of a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the small symbol combination is executed (the prescribed number of medals are dispensed from the medal discharge device 110). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612). As a result, the player is informed (notified, displayed) that the specified number of medals corresponding to the small winning combination have been paid out.

  Then, in step S354, the corresponding small winning combination flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process is ended.

  If none of the winning combination symbols are aligned on the activated line, none of the determinations in steps S310, S320, S330, S340, and S350 are satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S360. In addition, the result at this time is also referred to as "missing eyes (combination pattern of separate symbols)".

  In step S360, a losing process is performed. In this loss process, when the winning flags that are in the ON (= 1) state at this point in time are the other winning flags except for BB and RB, the winning flag is set to OFF (= 0). If none of the winning flags is ON (= 1) (in this case, the lost flag is ON (= 1)), the lost flag is turned OFF (= 0).

  The processes from step S304 to step S360 described above are processes to be executed in the case of the general state and the normal RT. Next, the process after step S370 will be described. The process here is a process executed in the case of a BB game (BB1 game, BB2 game), an RB game (RB1 game, RB2 game), and an SB game (SB1 game, SB game, SB3 game).

  First, in step S370, it is determined whether or not the BB game payout symbol combination is complete. The “BB game pay-out role” mentioned here is a generic name for the role of ALL and the role for exclusive use of the bonus game. Then, if the BB game pay-out symbol is aligned on any of the activated lines, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S372.

  In the next step S372, payout of a prescribed number of medals corresponding to the BB game pay-out symbol being prepared is executed (payout of the prescribed number of medals from the medal discharge device 110). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), thereby notifying the player that the predetermined number of medals corresponding to the payout symbol during the BB game have been paid out (notice, display ).

  Following step S372, in step S374, a BB game end determination process is executed (the details will be described later). Thereafter, the process moves to step S376, and an RT game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S370 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378, where the establishment flag is turned off (= 0). In particular, in this example, since no dropout occurs, the lost flag corresponds to the establishment flag. That is, in step S378, the lost flag is set to OFF (= 0).

  Next, step S380 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S380, it is determined whether the RB game pay-out symbol is complete. Note that this “RB game pay-out role” is also a generic term for winning combinations that have payouts during the RB game similarly to the above-mentioned BB game pay-out role, and in the present embodiment are the same as “BB game pay-out role” It is. Then, if the RB game payout symbol pattern is aligned on any of the activated lines, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S382.

  In the next step S 382, payout of a prescribed number of medals according to the RB game time pay-out combination symbol being prepared is executed (payout of the prescribed number of medals from the medal discharge device 110). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), thereby notifying the player that the prescribed number of medals corresponding to the payout symbol during the RB game have been paid out (notice, display ).

  Following step S 382, in step S 384, an RB game end determination process is executed (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process moves to step S386, and an RT game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S380 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 378 described above, where the establishment flag is turned off (= 0). Since this is described above, the description is omitted.

  Next, step S390 and subsequent steps will be described. In step S390, it is determined whether the SB game payout symbols have been aligned. Note that this “SB game pay-out role” is also a generic term for winning combinations that are paid out during the SB game. If the SB game payout symbol pattern is aligned on any of the activated lines, this determination is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S392.

  In the next step S392, payout of a prescribed number of medals is executed according to the prepared SB game time pay-out combination symbol (payout of the prescribed number of medals from the medal discharge device 110). Then, the payout number of medals is displayed (displayed on the payout number display LED 612), thereby notifying the player that the predetermined number of medals corresponding to the payout symbol at the time of the SB game have been dispensed (notice, display ).

  Following step S392, in step S394, a CRB game end determination process is executed (the details will be described later). Thereafter, the process moves to step S386, and an RT game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

  If the determination in step S390 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step 396, where the establishment flag is turned off (= 0). This is the same content as step S378 described above, so the description will be omitted.

[11-5-1. BB game start process]
If the determination in step S310 of FIG. 58 described above is satisfied, the BB game start process is executed. This BB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S401, it is determined whether the BB flag (BB1 flag or BB2 flag) is ON (= 1). If the determination in step S401 is satisfied, the process moves to step S404. In step S404, the BB game in-progress flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the BB flag is turned OFF (= 0) at this time. Next, at step S406, the cumulative payout number count in the BB game is cleared. As a result, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the BB game is started with the bet number 3 bet (three bets) similar to the normal game.

  If the determination in step S401 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S402 to execute error processing. Such a case corresponds to the case where the BB symbols are aligned although the BB flag is OFF (= 0). That is, it may happen in some case that some illegal means (for example, a goto action) has been performed, or the slot machine 1 has a failure. Therefore, in the error processing, the lighting of the error lamp 604, and the display of notifying the occurrence of an error on the above-mentioned LED and the like are performed.

[11-5-2. BB game end judgment processing]
Subsequently, the BB game end determination processing of step S374 of FIG. 58 described above will be described using FIG.

  First, in step S451, receiving the medal payout in step S372 in FIG. 58 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the BB game.

  Next, in step S452, it is determined whether the total payout number has exceeded 300 (200 in the case of BB2). If the determination in step S452 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S454 to display the cumulative payout number during the BB game (display on the payout number display LED 612 etc. Note that the cumulative payout number is separately provided with a display LED etc. It may be displayed on this). In addition, when the determination in step S452 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S460.

  In step S460, the flag during BB game is set to OFF (= 0), and then, in step S462, the CRT game start flag is set to ON (= 1), and the process is ended.

[11-5-3. RB game start process]
If the determination in step S320 in FIG. 58 described above is satisfied, the RB game start process is executed. The RB game start process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S501, it is determined whether the RB flag is ON (= 1). If the determination in step S501 is satisfied, the process moves to step S504. In step S504, the RB game in progress flag is set to ON (= 1). Although not shown, the RB flag is turned off (= 0) at this time. Next, at step S506, the cumulative payout number count in the RB game is cleared. As a result, accumulation of the cumulative payout number is executed from the next game. Then, from the next game, the RB game is started with the bet number 3 bet (three bets) similar to the normal game. As a result, the player can play the game without feeling any particular discomfort as compared with the normal game.

  If the determination in step S501 is not satisfied, the process moves to step S502 to execute error processing. Such a case corresponds to the case where the RB symbols are aligned although the RB flag is OFF (= 0). That is, it may happen in some case that some illegal means (for example, a goto action) has been performed, or the slot machine 1 has a failure. Therefore, in the error processing, the lighting of the error lamp 604, and the display of notifying the occurrence of an error on the above-mentioned LED and the like are performed.

[11-5-4. RB game end judgment processing]
Subsequently, the RB game end determination processing of step S384 of FIG. 58 described above will be described using FIG.

  First, in step S551, receiving the medal payout in step S382 in FIG. 58 described above, the payout number of the game is added to the cumulative payout number in the RB game.

  Next, in step S552, it is determined whether the cumulative payout number exceeds 20. If the determination in step S 552 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S 554 to display the cumulative payout number in the RB game (display on the payout number display LED 612 etc. Note that the cumulative payout number is separately provided with a display LED etc. It may be displayed on this).

  In addition, when the determination in step S552 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S556.

  In step S556, the in-RB game flag is set to OFF (= 0), and in step S558, the LRT game start flag is set to ON (= 1), and the process is ended.

[11-5. ART game start process]
The ART game is a game to be executed at the chance RT, and is normally played when the ART replay is won at RT (the gaming state shifts to the chance RT) and the ART grant lottery is won.

  The ART grant lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is included in one of the above-described predetermined conditions that the result of the internal lottery is an SB combination (SB1, SB2, SB3). That is, based on the fact that the result of the internal lottery is the role of SB, the ART grant lottery is performed. When the ART grant lottery is won, it is determined which of the SART game and the LART game is to be executed. The ART grant lottery is not only when the result of the internal lottery is the sole combination of the SB combination (SB1, SB2, SB3), but also the combination combination with the normal replay (“SB1 + normal ripple”, “SB2 + normal ripple”), It is also performed when "SB3 + Normal Lip".

  By the way, as described above, in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the result of the internal lottery is the combination of the SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the normal replay combination, the specific condition is not satisfied. A symbol combination (symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 1) corresponding to the normal replay role (separate role) is displayed on the activated line. Therefore, if the gaming state is a gaming state where there is no loss such as chance RT2 or chance RT3 or if there is a low gaming state even if there is a loss, whether or not the ART addition lottery has been performed It is difficult to grasp from the aspect of the symbol combination displayed on the effective line. However, when the specific condition is satisfied, as described above, re-play 1, re-game than the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role (separate role) (symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of replay 1) 2. Reel control is performed so that the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device of 2, 2, SB1, SB2 or SB3 is preferentially displayed on the effective line. Thereby, in the chance RT2, although it is basically difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the ART grant lottery is performed from the aspect of the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, the specific condition is Only when it is established, it is possible to grasp whether or not the ART addition lottery is performed from the aspect of the symbol combination displayed on the activated line. Therefore, the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in hopes of being operated in the proper pressing order at the chance RT2, and can operate the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c with interest. It becomes. In particular, even if the result of the internal lottery is an overlapping player, the game result is not carried after the next game, because it is an overlapping role of SB (SB1, SB2, SB3) and the regular replay role, the ART grant lottery The game which can be grasped whether it is played or not is limited to one game.

  As described above, it is determined whether the SART game or the LART game is to be executed when the ART grant lottery is won, but the SART game is, for example, an ART game having 50 games as one set, The LART game is, for example, an ART game in which 4000 games are one set.

  When one ART award lottery is won, one set of ART game is executed. Then, when an ART grant lottery is performed during the ART game, one set of ART game is added each time the ART grant lottery is won. Then, the ART game continues until all the ART games for the added number have been consumed. Hereinafter, the ART game start process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether the SART game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of SART games is set to "50 times" in step S802.

  Then, in the next step S804, the in-SART game flag is turned ON (= 1). Further, although not shown, at this time, the SART game start flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the SART game is started from the next game.

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S810, in which it is determined whether the LART game start flag is ON (= 1). If this determination is satisfied, the number of LART games is set to "4000" in step S812.

  Then, in the next step S814, the LART in-game flag is turned ON (= 1). Also, although not shown, at this time, the LART game start flag is set to OFF (= 0). Thereby, the LART game is started from the next game.

  If neither of the determinations in steps S801 and S810 is satisfied, no process is performed and the process ends.

[11-5-6. ART game end judgment processing]
Next, the ART game end determination process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the determination process of FIG. 58 described above, when “BELL BROWN” is displayed on the activated line, when the ART game has been performed the set number of times, the ART game end determination process is executed.

  First, in step S 901, it is determined whether the ART game in-progress flag (SART game in-progress flag or LART game in-progress flag) is ON (= 1). If this determination is not satisfied, any processing is not performed and the process ends.

  Then, if the determination in step S901 is satisfied, in the next step S902, the number of ART games is decremented by “1”, and the process proceeds to step S904.

  In step S904, it is determined whether the number of remaining RT games is “0”. If the number of ART games is “0”, this determination is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next step S906, and the ART game in-progress flag (SART in-game flag or LART in-game flag) is turned OFF (= 0).

  On the other hand, if the determination in step S904 is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S910, in which it is determined whether "bell flutter" is displayed on the activated line.

  Then, if the determination in step S910 is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S906, the ART in-game flag is set to OFF (= 0), and the process is ended.

  If the determination in step S 910 is not satisfied, the process ends.

11-6. Control of production operation]
The above is an example of control by the main substrate 409, but in the slot machine 1, control of various rendering operations is executed by the rendering control substrate 510 in accordance with the progress of the game. This is executed by the effect control board 510 (mainly the CPU 1118 or the like) based on various commands (information command, output signal) outputted from the main board 409. As described above, the various commands output from the main board 449 are temporarily stored in the RAM 1122. And based on the said command, the presentation aspect prepared beforehand is selected and performed. Such an effect mode is stored in the ROM 1120 as an effect mode data table (not shown), and a plurality of effect modes corresponding to the command are prepared.

  For example, the effect mode includes one that is completed only by the game (hereinafter, referred to as a one-shot effect mode), one that is performed over a plurality of games (hereinafter, referred to as a continuous effect mode), and the like. Among them, the one-shot effect mode includes effects that indicate the winning flag (suggested effects, notification effects, details will be described later), effects that notify the payout of medals (payout effects, it may be an aspect that notifies up to the number of payouts), etc. There is.

  In contrast to the effect of notifying the player of the winning flag directly (indication effect), the suggested effect refers to an effect of indirectly notifying the winning flag, for example, the form of the winning combination corresponding to the winning flag , Color, etc. are displayed. In addition, the suggestion effect is performed also when there is no such winning flag (that is, in the case of a loss). In this case, it is an effect of the content that is hard to notice that there is a loss (for example, ambiguous content that can be taken with any winning combination). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the game is lost.

  For example, when the winning flag is BB, the notification effect can clearly know which winning combination the player has won in the game, such as “bonus confirmed!”. This effect is more effective when executed for a winning combination for the player such as BB and RB (because a large amount of medals can be obtained). That is, when the player wins BB or the like, it is possible to give meaning to bless that.

  In addition, as the continuous effect mode, there are those corresponding to gaming states such as a general state, a normal RT, a chance RT, a bonus middle, and the like. These are for clarifying what the gaming state is, and the player is given, for example, a normal RT during the current gaming state by performing these effects (continuous effects). It becomes easy to distinguish whether it is during RT or not.

  Then, during the ART game, continuous effects are executed so that the player can recognize that from the start to the end. For example, a display for counting the number of SART games, or generating a sound effect that impresses a crisis as the specified number is approached. In this way, the player can proceed with the game while confirming how much the remaining number of SART games is.

  Further, in the LART game, although the continuous effect is executed, the count display of the number of LART games may not be particularly performed. This is because the LART game has a fairly long game period from the viewpoint of a player of 4,000 times, and it is hardly necessary to care about the end of the prescribed number of times. If the player does not know the predetermined number of LART games, the ART game (LART game) can be continued without knowing how long the ART game (LART game) will continue. The effect can be achieved.

  The above presentation mode can be executed as display of an image by the image display body 500, generation of a sound effect by the speaker 512 or the like, light emission or lighting by LED decoration or the like. Such a presentation mode can make it difficult to give a boring impression, for example, when the player has been playing the game for a long time. The effect mode is not limited to being performed by the image display body 500, the speaker 512, the LED decoration, and the like. For example, in place of the image display body 500, an EL display (Electroluminescence Display) or a dot LED may be used. Furthermore, a doll imitating a character, a movable model, etc., or a side reel (for example, it is arranged at a position different from each reel, and its start and stop are not caused by the player's operation as part of the effect. What is to be performed) or illumination such as a lamp (for example, a rotatable light represented by a rotating light) may be provided to execute various effects. If such a method is adopted, it is possible to entertain the player sufficiently without using a liquid crystal display or the like.

  Next, the special game state will be described. As described above, the special game state is a game state in which the number of continued ART game games can be increased during the ART game. In the special game state, the main board performs special effect processing (to be described later) for reel rotation control, and the effect control board performs processing for increasing the number of continued ART games in accordance with the reel special effect process. First, the transition opportunity to the special game state will be described. In the gaming state of the normal RT, for example, when the winning combination of ART replay is established and pressed in the correct order and the ART grant lottery is won, the main substrate 409 selects the normal RT as a chance RT1. Transition to). If the main board wins the ART replay in the gaming state of the chance RT1, and the reel stop button is operated according to the instruction of the pushing order by the effect control board, the gaming state of the chance RT1 becomes the chance RT2 The game state (ART game: for example, LART game or SART game described above) is shifted to.

  When the main board is in the gaming state of chance RT2, either one of ART replay 1-3 as a specific combination or winning of a particular ART replay (or further, the pressing order of the reel stop button is correct) ), The special game state is started while maintaining the gaming state in the state of the chance RT2, and the effect control board also starts the special game state in response to a command from the main board. As mentioned above, it is assumed that the field gaming state which won the ART replay by internal lottery in the chance RT2 shifts to the chance RT3, but as described here, the special gaming state is started without shifting to the chance RT3. Ru. However, it may be shifted from the chance RT2 to the chance RT3, and may be shifted from the state of the chance RT3 to the special game state. The advantages of shifting from the chance RT3 to the special game state will be described later. Moreover, it may shift to chance RT3 from chance RT1 and may shift to a special game state.

  This special game state is managed in a mode different from the number of games of the chance RT2, and ends with the defined number of games or the bell runout of the push order bell (AT1-AT10). The special game state is a game zone that gives the player a chance to increase the number of ART game continuation games, and the effect control board does not subtract the number of ART game remaining games during the special game state. During the special game state, there is a special game state (described later) in which the effect control board can dramatically increase the number of continued ART game games. When the special gaming state ends, the main board returns the gaming state to the gaming state (chance ART 2) in which the reel special effect is not performed. The effect control board executes an effect for informing the player of transition to the special game state by the winning of the ART replay. Although the termination timing of the special game state is defined as the number of defined games or bell pop, it may be triggered as part of replay (for example, normal replay + fall lottery by effect control board). As a result, since the frequency of displaying the replay is high, a tension is created that the player does not know when the special game will end.

  Conventionally, there have been many gaming machines that are transitioning to a special gaming state or making a transition lottery based on a small winning combination with a low winning probability, so the winning probability is low and the timing that can be expected in the special gaming state is also small. It was a thing. This time, ART replay, which is one of the triggers for special gaming state, has the same pattern as normal replay, so the player does not know whether ART replay is won or normal replay (ART replay is not displayed in the order of pressing) Or, if the order of the push is usually displayed in Replay). Even if the player normally wins the replay, from the expectation that the ART replay will be won or not, it is possible to generate the timing at which the special gaming state can be expected with high frequency. On the contrary, since the player can be made to think that the player may be normally replayed despite winning ART replay, the player is suddenly given a surprise by being transferred to the special game state. You can also. The transition to the special game state is triggered by the winning of the ART replay, but in addition, for example, a transition lottery of the special game state may be performed on the side of the effect control board with all the winning combinations including a loss. In the special game state, when the winning combination wins the transition lottery and the effect control base side guides a specific pushing order and the main board recognizes that the reel stop button is operated in the specific pushing order. It may be made to shift.

  When the special game state is started, the main board executes a special effect of the reel in each game of the specified game number of the special game state. When the effect control board shifts to the special game state, it determines the number of added games with respect to the number of continued ART games while synchronizing with or relating to the special effects of the reels, and executes the effect for informing the addition of the number of games. Do. The reel special effect is a game where the main board (specifically, the CPU mounted on the main board) is in the special game state, and the operation to the left middle right reel stop button becomes effective after the start lever operation. It means that it is possible to change the rotation form of at least one of the left middle right reels from the normal rotation form to various special patterns by delaying the timing up to that point.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing start processing of the special game state. The main board executes the flowchart of FIG. 65 for each game in the special game state, and determines a pattern of reel special effects. First, based on the winning combination (conditional device), a pattern of reel special effects is selected (S6500). Next, it is determined whether the selected pattern is pattern 1 or not (S6502), and if this is affirmed, pattern 1 is executed (S6504). If the selected pattern is not pattern 1, it is judged whether it is pattern 2 or not (S6506), and if this is affirmed, pattern 2 is executed (S6508). If the selected pattern is not pattern 2, it is determined whether it is pattern 3 or not (S 6510), and if this is affirmed, pattern 3 is executed (S 6512). If the selected pattern is not pattern 3, pattern 4 is executed (S6514). Next, the main board determines the end of the special game state (s6516), and when affirming this, ends the special game state, and a normal ART game (chance RT2) in which the reel special effect is not performed If the result is negative, the process returns to S6500.

  According to the flowchart of FIG. 65, the main board determines a pattern of reel special effects based on the winning combination (conditional device) for each game during the special gaming state. A plurality of patterns (pattern 1 to pattern 4) are set in the reel special effect pattern. FIG. 66 shows an example of a pattern setting / selection table for reel special effects. This table is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM of the main board. The main board determines the one reel special effect pattern based on the winning combination with reference to the table when the winning combination is determined by lottery in each game in the special gaming state.

  When a plurality of reel special effect patterns correspond to one winning combination, the main board performs distribution lottery to determine a reel special effect pattern. The numbers in the table of FIG. 66 are numerator values (the value of the denominator is 256) indicating the winning probability of the reel special effect pattern. FIG. 67 shows a reel special effect execution control table of patterns 1 to 3 of reel special effect, and FIG. 68 shows an execution control table of pattern 4. After the main board determines the reel special effect pattern, the reel special effect control table corresponding to the determined reel special effect pattern is read out, and the reel special effect is executed while controlling the rotation form of the reel in accordance with the control order of each table Do.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the special effect pattern (pattern 1 in FIG. 67) is a table selected when a bonus combination such as BB1, BB2, RB1 or RB2 is won in the internal lottery. As the explanation of the reel special effect executed by the special effect mode 1, first, after the operation of the start lever, the main board invalidates the reel stop, and the left reel (L), the middle reel (N), and the right reel ( R) is controlled to a weight (W) state that does not rotate for a predetermined time (order 1), and then all reels are reversely rotated (R) (order 2). Then, the left reel is stopped (S) so that the first specific symbol is displayed in the middle line (order 3), and the middle reel is stopped so that the second specific symbol is displayed in the middle line. Then, the right reel is stopped so that the third specific symbol is displayed in the middle (order 5). Further, the main board is controlled to wait state for a predetermined time (order 6), and after the wait state or when the player operates the start lever by the player in the middle of the wait state, the wait state is interrupted. After the effect is finished, the reel is then rotated forward to accept the operation of the reel stop button.

  In the main board, the first specific symbol, the second specific symbol, and the third specific symbol displayed on the middle line by the reel special effect are different depending on which winning combination is won by the internal lottery. That is, the specific symbol displayed in the middle line differs depending on whether BB1 or BB2 is won or RB1 or RB2 is selected, and the symbol allowed to be displayed based on the win is displayed on the middle line. For example, when the player wins BB1, the first specific symbol, the second specific symbol, and the third specific symbol displayed by the reel special effect become the "blue 7 symbol". In addition, the main board grasps the position of the "blue 7 design" which is in the state of being stopped in the previous game as processing of the main substrate executing the reel special effect in which "blue 7 design" is displayed in the middle row. Necessary to be displayed on the middle line from the stop position of the "blue 7 symbol" which has been stopped in the previous game, based on the determination that the reel special effect is performed. A process of controlling the movement of the reel for several minutes is executed.

  In the reel special effect pattern 1, after the reel special effect (orders 1 to 6) is executed, the reel stop button becomes operable, and the "blue 7 symbol" displayed on the middle line (if the winning combination is BB1 When the stop operation is accepted within the range in which the player can control the pulling of the reel by the player, the reel is stopped in a symbol combination in which "blue 7 symbols" are aligned on the effective line. With the symbol combination corresponding to BB1, BB2, RB1 or RB2 being established, the main board executes the BB game start processing along with the determination processing, and the BB (RB) game ends after the BB (RB) game is played The determination process is performed to end the BB (RB) game, and the normal chance ART 2 state without the reel special effect is restored. During the BB (RB) game, the digestion of the chance game in the chance ART 2 state is suspended until the BB (RB) game is over.

  As described above, when the special effect pattern 1 (FIG. 67 described later) in the special game state is executed, the player performs the reel stop operation of the symbol combination established corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery. Will be taught in advance (2-5). As a result, the player can not only improve the interest for the reel special effect but also grasp the winning combination in the internal lottery during the winning game. Even a player who is not familiar with the game experience who has difficulty in grasping the winning combination can be aware that the winning combination has been established, and can prevent the game medals from being consumed by useless gaming. Furthermore, after the processing of stopping for a predetermined time from the state where the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the number 6 of the special effect pattern 1, the reel special effect is ended triggered by the operation of the start lever of the player, Normal rotation of is started. As a result, since the player can start reel rotation at any timing from the state of grasping the winning combination won, the player can stop the symbol corresponding to the winning combination. Since it is possible to adjust the time allowance until the situation is completed and also the reel rotation before the stop operation of the reel is started from the state in which the specific symbol combination is even (order 3-5), the reel Even if the reel rotates at a normal speed without reducing the rotational speed of the above-mentioned, it is possible to reduce the so-called difficulty in pressing.

  Although it is preferable to simultaneously rotate the reels after the procedure 6 to start the rotation of the reels in order to reduce the degree of difficulty in eye pressing, the rotation timing may be separately started instead of simultaneously using the reels. As a result, based on various patterns in which the difficulty level of the eye-catching changes gradually, it is possible to improve the interest by making the player challenge the eye-catching game.

  As shown in FIG. 66, patterns 2 and 3 (FIG. 67 are selected when the winning combination is other than the bonus (pattern 1) and the winning combination is other than BAR replay (pattern 4), and the reels are selected. Reel special effects based on the vibration (V) of the reel are executed instead of the rotation of the reel, which means that the reel repeats forward and reverse rotation several times with a short cycle within the range of the rotation angle of one symbol In pattern 2, the main board vibrates the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in this order (order 1-3), and then weights all reels for a predetermined time (order 4), Then, the state of the reel being frozen is released, and the operation of the reel stop button is made valid.Then, when the player operates the stop button to stop the reel, the symbol displayed based on the winning combination is displayed. Depending on the combination Te, performance control board determines the number of plus game of ART game. This is the same even pattern 3.

  In pattern 3, the main board vibrates the left reel, the middle reel and the right reel in this order (order 1-3) and makes all reels wait for a predetermined time (order 4), then the right reel, middle reel, After the left reel is vibrated in this order (order 5-7) and all reels are weighted for a predetermined time (order 8), the reel special effect state of the reel is released and the operation of the reel stop button is validated. Depending on the winning combination, the effect control board may generate a special benefit such as addition to the number of continued games in the ART game, or, it may be necessary to draw the number of additional games or to draw the number of additional games. You may

  The player can be aware of the formation of a specific winning combination and the size of the bonus for the addition of the number of games from the reel special effect pattern for each game in the special gaming state. As described above, when the reel special effect is pattern 1, it is possible to know that the bonus is won, and in the case of pattern 3, it is possible to expect an increase in the number of games more than pattern 2. The reel special effect in pattern 3 has one more process in which three reels vibrate in order than the reel special effect in pattern 2 and thus gives the player a strong impression. Therefore, when the reel special effect of pattern 3 is executed, it is preferable that the effect control board increase the number of added games.

  Pattern 4 (FIG. 68) is a reel special effect performed in a special game state in which the effect control board can dramatically increase the number of added games, among the reel special effects. FIG. 68 is a control table for executing reel special effects of pattern 4 on the main board, and FIG. 69 is a flowchart for executing pattern 4 of reel special effects performed by the main board. As shown in FIG. 66, pattern 4 is selected only when a specific player combination (BAR replay) is drawn, and the main board allows a combination of specific symbols (BARs) to be established multiple times within one game. The effect control board determines the number of games to be added each time a combination of specific symbols is established, and displays it to the player. The main board continues the addition game of the ART game by the combination of the specific symbols as long as the winning lottery is won. The continuous lottery is managed by a loop rate, and the loop rate has a plurality of modes, for example, a mode with a loop rate of 70% and a mode with a loop rate of 80%. In addition, since the specific symbol is the BAR symbol, it is easy to attract the attention of the player, and the player can recognize that the special gaming state is reached.

  As shown in FIG. 69, when the main board receives the operation of the start lever (S6900) and determines that the winning combination is the BAR replay as a result of random number lottery (S6902), the reel special effect pattern 4 is selected. The mode of the loop rate of the continuous lottery is determined by lottery (S6904). The distribution ratio is managed so that each of a plurality of modes is drawn at a predetermined ratio.

  Next, it proceeds to reel special effect processing (S6906), and as shown in FIG. 68, after executing the reel special effects (orders 1 to 9) similar to pattern 3, the main board executes vibration effects for all reels. (Order 10) The left and right reels are rotated forward (F), the middle reel is rotated reversely (R), and all reels are stopped at the preparation stage (order 11).

  The preparation eye is a symbol combination as a preparation state of a combination of a specific symbol (BAR symbol), and for example, as shown in (1) of FIG. It is a combination of the replay pattern of. The numbers in parentheses are the sequence numbers in the three reel symbol array (FIG. 46). In the state where the preparation eye is displayed as shown in FIG. 70 (1), the specific symbol (BAR) stops at the position directly below the lower end of the left and right reels, and the specific symbol stops at the position immediately above the upper end of the middle reel. In this state, the player can not foresee the formation of the specific symbol by assuming that the preparation eye is merely a replay that can be established frequently without frequent payout of game medals. That is, at the stage where the replay symbol is established on the line, the player can not be aware of the establishment of the BAR replay winning combination. In the conventional gaming machine, although the specific symbol combination is not displayed in the symbol display area, the specific symbol combination is arranged in the upper or lower frame of the symbol display area in order to quickly display the specific symbol combination in the display area. I was waiting for you. However, in the form of FIG. 70 (1), the player can not predict the specific symbol combination because the specific symbol combinations are separately arranged.

  After the main board is weighted for all reels for a predetermined time (order 12), the left and right reels are reversely rotated by 2 symbols (up from the bottom), and the middle reel is rotated forward by 2 patterns (from top to bottom) Rotation), that is, with the minimum amount of rotation of all the reels, the reels are stopped so as to establish the combination of the specific symbols in the middle line as shown in FIG. 70 (2) in S6908 (order 13). As the player rotates the left and right reels and the middle reel in the opposite direction to each other (while the plurality of reels rotate irregularly), the symbol combination suddenly turns out to be a specific symbol while blinking from the preparation eye By changing to the combination of, it becomes possible to notice for the first time that it has shifted to a special gaming state based on pattern 4 of the special gaming states for the first time at this point.

  The winning combination in the ART game (chance RT2) is almost a replay, and repeating the replay (high frequency winning combination) will result in a monotonous game despite the ART game, but as described above, the replay symbol The special game state period is an expectation that a combination of specific symbols can be displayed even if a monotonous replay symbol combination is displayed only by winning frequently with a reel special effect in which the combination suddenly changes to the combination of specific symbols It can be given to the player for each middle game.

  The pattern 2 to the pattern 4 are based on the reel special effect processing using the vibration of the reel, and when the effect of the pattern 2 is generated, the player is expected to proceed to the effect of the pattern 3, When the effect of pattern 3 is generated, it is expected to proceed to the effect of pattern 4. In the effect of pattern 4, in response to the display of the combination of the specific symbols in the middle line, the effect control board can determine the number of added games (granted bonus) by lottery or the like, which is notified to the player (S6910).

  Next, after the main board causes all reels to wait for a predetermined time (order 14), it vibrates all reels (order 15), and then all reels are again waited for a predetermined time (order 16). Next, the main board rotates the left and right reels forward by two symbols and reversely rotates the middle reel by two symbols and prepares from the state (FIG. 70 (2)) in which the specific symbol combination is in line with the middle line. The combination of the symbols of the preparation eye is instantly reproduced so as to be in the state of the eye (FIG. 70 (1)).

  Next, the main board causes all reels to wait for a predetermined time (order 18), and during this time, continues the lottery whether or not to continue the processes after order 13 at the loop rate obtained by the draw in loop rate mode ( S6912). When this wait time has elapsed, the main board sets a new wait time (order 19), and during this time, the effect control board is operated by the player (for example, start lever) as a trigger for notifying the player of the result of the continuous lottery. An effect to urge (the operation of the specific symbol display means) is performed (S6914). There is no need to bet for the player's operation, and the main board continues processing based on the result of the continuous lottery at the earlier timing between the time the player operates the start lever etc. and the lapse of the predetermined time (S6916) Set That is, when the main board determines that the special gaming state is to be continued (S6918 YES), after the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the process returns to the step of order 13 (order 20), and the combination of symbols is made middle from the state of preparation described above. The drive control of the reels is executed so that the combination of the specific symbols is aligned ((2) in FIG. 70 → (1)).

  On the other hand, when the main board gets out of the continuous lottery and determines the non-continuity of the special gaming state, after the wait time has elapsed (order 20), all reels are rotated forward to cancel the reel special effect (order 21), The operation of the reel stop button is validated (S6920). Then, the effect control board performs the teaching effect of the pushing order for the BAR replay (S6922). If the player corrects the pressing order of BAR replay which is the winning combination in the current game and the reel stop button is operated at an appropriate timing and the combination of BAR symbols is displayed in the middle (S6924 Yes), the main board is next While making the game into the state of re-playing, and making the effect control board execute the process of adding the number of games (granting of benefits), and notifying the number of added games while notifying that the special gaming state is over (S6926) .

  Thus, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided corresponding to a plurality of movable bodies with a plurality of kinds of symbols, start-up start means for starting the rotation of the plurality of movable bodies, and the plurality of movable bodies. , Stopping means for individually stopping the rotation of the plurality of movable bodies, lottery means for performing a lottery on the winning combination based on the start starting means, and symbol display means for displaying a symbol combination based on the result of the lottery , Award giving means for giving a prize based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means, another lottery means for performing a lottery different from the lottery by the lottery means, and the lottery performed by the other lottery means A privilege giving means capable of giving a privilege different from the prize given by the prize giving means based on the result, and the operation of the start starting means when the privilege is given by the privilege giving means Based on the benefit providing expectation effect means for performing effects by the movable body after the start of the plurality of movable bodies is started, and after execution of the benefit imparting expectation effect for the merit, regardless of the operation of the stopping means, the symbol A privilege imparting instructional effect that teaches that the privilege imparting means is provided with the privilege before the operation of the stopping means is made effective by causing the display means to display a predetermined symbol combination in a viewable manner. Even if the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed without the benefit award instruction effect being executed despite the benefit award expectation effect being executed, based on the stop operation of the stop means Based on the stop display of the predetermined symbol combination permitted by the specific mode display permission control unit capable of accepting the stop display of the predetermined symbol combination and the specific mode display permission control unit Te, in addition to the prize by the award imparting means, by further comprising a, a privilege granting re opportunities means capable of imparting the benefits, thereby achieving the benefits of the player in the special game state.

  In addition, when the player does not operate the reel stop button at an appropriate timing while correctly pressing the reel stop button, the plurality of reels stop at symbol combinations which can not display the specific symbol combination in the middle row, but the main board The next game is re-played, and while the effect control board adds the number of games, it does not indicate the number of added games (S6948), etc., and discriminates against the player who operated the reel at the proper timing. You may perform the presentation process for FIG. In this way, the player may be given a benefit even if the combination of the specific symbols is not complete. When the specific symbol combinations are aligned, it is desirable to be advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the specific symbol combinations are not aligned. For example, even if the specific symbol is not stopped on all three reels, giving a benefit according to the number of reels on which the specific symbol is stopped in the effective line, or of a benefit to be given when the specific symbol combination is complete If the player is notified of the content but the specific symbol combination is not complete, as described above, such as concealing the content of the benefit to be provided, discrimination from the player who operated the reel at an appropriate timing. It is desirable to perform rendering processing for the purpose.

  According to the reel special effect by pattern 4, even if the player never wins the continuous lottery, the gaming machine performs addition of the number of games in two stages of the order 13 and the order 21 during one game, It is possible to answer the player's expectation for the increase in the number of continuing ART games.

  On the other hand, since the addition of the number of ART games is repeatedly executed in one game as long as the continuous lottery is won, the player can feel a sense of acceleration of the number of games. And from the display (order 13) of the combination of the specific symbols where the addition of the number of ART games is executed first to the continuation of the addition of the ART game (step 20), it is currently carried out across multiple games. In order to advance in one game, the player can enjoy an accelerated sense of game that the addition of the number of ART games advances at a stretch.

  As described above, at the start of the special game state, the replay symbol combination is displayed before the BAR symbol combination is established. By doing this, the reel special effect is started, and the player is surprised at the start of the special game that the BAR symbol combination in which the high benefit can be expected after the display of the replay symbol which can not be expected very much is established. Can be given to Then, by displaying the replay symbol combination as a preparation before the main board displays the BAR symbol combination in the middle of the special game, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the replay symbol. The Replay combination is highly prized even in the normal gaming state and ART game state, but it is a low bonus part because it is not paid out, and it is not expected even if replay symbol combination display is displayed, but it specifies a replay symbol combination By setting it as the preparation of the symbol combination, the expectation for the replay symbol combination can be improved, and the gaming feeling can be enhanced.

  That is, the gaming machine according to the present invention individually stops the rotation of the plurality of movable bodies having the plurality of kinds of symbols, the start-up start means for starting the rotation of the plurality of movable bodies, and the plurality of movable bodies. Stop means, lottery means for performing drawing on a plurality of winning combinations based on the start start means, symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the result of the lottery due to the operation of the stop means A game profit giving means for giving a game profit based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means, and the plurality of winning combinations may be a high frequency winning combination that can be won with a relatively high probability, and the high winning combination The game has a low frequency winning combination that can be won with a lower probability than the frequency winning combination, and further, if the low frequency winning combination is won by the lottery means, the game provided by the game profit giving means Advantage And a symbol combination corresponding to the low-frequency winning combination is displayed on the symbol display means when the low-frequency winning combination is won by the lottery means and the specific-profit granting means capable of further granting a specific profit different from In accordance with the display of the low frequency winning combination display means for controlling the plurality of movable bodies and the control of the low frequency winning combination display means so that the symbol combination corresponding to the low frequency winning combination is displayed. Specific profit giving teaching means capable of teaching the player the giving of the specific profit, and even when the low frequency winning combination is won by the lottery means, the symbol combination corresponding to the low frequency winning combination Prior to the display, a symbol mode forced conversion means capable of executing control of the plurality of movable bodies for displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the high frequency winning combination is provided. To increase the sense of expectation for the role it is possible to improve the enjoyment feeling of the game. Each process (means) described here is performed by the main substrate and / or the effect control substrate.

  As described above, in the state where the replay symbol combination is displayed as the preparation eye, the specific symbol (BAR symbol) is not in a straight line outside the frame of the display window, and is scattered outside the upper frame of the symbol display window and the lower frame of the symbol display window. Can be given non-regularity when a specific symbol combination is established from the preparation stage. Furthermore, since the specific symbol remains at the nearest position outside the symbol display window so that the moving amount of the reel is shortest, the specific symbol combination is from the outside of the frame by the movement of several reels in mutually different directions. As it is displayed on the middle line, it is possible to give the player a feeling of surprise as if the specific symbol combination suddenly appeared in front of the eyes.

  As described above, when it is determined that the main board is out of the continuous lottery, the special effect state of the reel is released and the operation of the reel stop button is accepted. The player rotates the reel when the reel is not rotated, and then stops the reel so as to display the specific symbol combination which is the winning combination while expecting the addition of the ART game continuation number. During the special gaming state in which the reels have been placed in the reel special effect state, at the start of the special gaming state even when winning in the continuous lottery, a plurality of reels are selected each time or even one continuous lottery is not won. The main board displays a specific symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination. The same is true for the pattern 4 as in the case of the pattern 4 in which the player who has stored this is the pattern 1 when the reel stop button after reel special effect is activated and the reel is stopped when the reel is stopped. It makes it easier to look at the combination of specific symbols (BAR symbols).

  When the reel special effect is canceled, the player can operate the start lever at any time to start rotating the stopped reel while displaying the preparation eyes, and then aim for the winning combination corresponding symbol Can stop the reel. Since the player can rotate the reel at any time, it is possible to create the timing for aiming the symbol corresponding to the winning combination by oneself. The arbitrary timing is a predetermined time within the wait time of order 19 of FIG. In FIG. 68, although it has been described that the reel rotates when a predetermined time of order 19 and order 20 elapses if the start lever is not operated, the order 18 and order 19 may be changed as follows. Good.

Order 18: Weight for a predetermined time (operation promotion effect of the start lever)
Order 19: A weight at which the continuous lottery ends (a continuous lottery is performed with the operation of the start lever)
According to this example, the reels do not rotate (order 21) until the player operates the start lever. Therefore, it is possible to optionally start to rotate the reel further according to the player's intention. The point at which the interest of the game is improved by the player's feeling of whether or not the specific symbol array is displayed by the operation to the start lever at any timing by the player also serving as the continuation lottery of the special game state It is effective in

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises a plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of symbols, a starting means for starting rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies, and the plurality of rotating bodies by the starting means. When the stop operation means for stopping the rotating body, the lottery means for performing the lottery for the winning combination due to the operation of the start means, and the stop operation means are operated, the lottery means is won Stop control means for executing stop control of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed in the symbol display area, and the player based on the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display area And the stop control means is configured to select a specific symbol combination in the symbol display area when the specific part of the winning combinations is won by the lottery means. It is permitted to be shown, and when the stopping means is performed in the proper operation mode, there is provided a specific mode permitting means for executing control of the stop control means so that the specific symbol combination is displayed. And, further, the operation non-accepting means for not accepting the operation of the stop operation means despite the fact that the specific symbol combination is permitted to be displayed by the specific mode accepting means, and the operation non-accepting means After the movement of the plurality of rotating bodies is controlled to display the specific symbol combination in the symbol display area while the operation acceptance of the stop operation means is not performed by the means, the symbol combination is displayed to the player In order to cause the player to start the plurality of rotating bodies in the waiting state by the winning combination defining means for maintaining the recognition in the recognizable waiting state and the plurality of rotating bodies in the waiting state by the winning combination defining means, the player Appropriate operation assisting means for rotating the plurality of rotating bodies due to the predetermined operation according to the predetermined operation, and the operation acceptance of the stop operating means is made effective with the rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies by the appropriate operation assisting means In order to provide the player with the operation acceptance start means, it is possible to assist the player with pushing the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination.

  When the defined game number of the special game state (for example, 10 games) is digested and the game processing for adding the ART game number is completed, the effect control board displays the total number of ART games added. The main board can also continue the special game state from the game following the game for which the special game state has ended. The end timing of the continuous game can be a formation of a normal replay role, or a bell pop, or may be a digest of the prescribed number of games. By ending the special game state when the normal replay is won, since the probability of winning the normal replay is high, the duration of the continuation game is adjusted to be relatively short. The main board may determine continuation of the special game state by lottery.

  In the embodiment described above, the transition from the gaming state of the chance RT2 to the special gaming state has been described, but it is determined that the transition to the special gaming state is made when the ART replay is won even from the gaming state of the chance RT3. May be The gaming state of the chance RT3 can be shifted from the chance RT1 based on the winning combination, and can also be shifted from the gaming state of the chance RT2. As can be seen from FIG. 49, the winning probability of ART1-3 at chance RT3 is 10 times higher than the winning probability of chance RT2, therefore, chance RT3 is a high probability for rushing from the ART game to the special game state. It can also be positioned as a mode. In the special game state, even if ART replay is activated (art replay win and push order are correct), the main board maintains the special game state and does not shift to a new special game state. In the above description, it has been described that the reel special effect is performed in all winning combinations when the main board is in the special game state, but it is also possible to perform the reel special effect in a specific winning combination. It is good, and it may decide the necessity of reel special production by the pulling out selection.

11-7. Priority setting of condition device corresponding to winning combination]
As described above in [10-1], [11-4], etc., in the slot machine 1, for example, when any of “AT1” to “AT10” is selected as the winning combination in the internal lottery, etc. The number of medals to be paid out as prizes differs depending on whether the stop operation is performed in the proper pushing order or in the incorrect pushing order. Then, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the control for stopping the combination of different symbols according to the pushing order is performed in the condition device corresponding to the winning combination (or the condition device including the combination of the condition devices). One of the characteristics is to define a conditional device that operates preferentially under predetermined conditions by setting priorities to the devices.

  71 (a) to 71 (c) are diagrams for describing setting of the priority of the condition device. FIG. 71 (a) is a diagram showing the combination of symbols corresponding to each small combination and the number of payouts, FIG. 71 (b) is a diagram showing the contents of each condition device, and FIG. 71 (c) is a diagram It is a figure which shows the priority conditions etc. with respect to an example of a winning combination. In addition, although the content of the small part combination demonstrated here differs from what is demonstrated in FIGS. 51-53, this is from the reason of the convenience of description. In the following, setting of the priority of the condition device will be described using the simple models shown in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c), but in order to make the description easy to understand, The first pressing order is the pressing order correct answer (so-called 3 choice) by operating which reel stop button on the left, middle or right, and the priority of the condition device changes, the pressing order of the reel stop button and the reel symbol The relationship with the pull-in control will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the minors 1 to 8 are each composed of a combination of the symbol "BELL 1" or the symbol "BELL 2" attached to each of the left, middle and right reels. When the symbol combination (bell symbol) of each small winning combination is established on the effective line, nine medals are paid out. Here, in the first reel (left reel 301a) and the third reel (right reel 301c), bell 1 and bell 2 respectively have appropriate stop timings to enable execution of pull-in control on the effective line. In the case of improper stop timing, it is assumed that each bell can not be pulled onto the effective line. However, if either Bell 1 or Bell 2 needs to be retracted onto the effective line (ie, Bell 1 and Bell 2 are not distinguished), any stop timing may be used. It is assumed that the bell of the bell is disposed within the range where the pull-in control to the effective line can be performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), condition devices 1 to 9 are defined for each small winning combination. First, the case where each condition device 1 to 9 is individually selected and operated will be described. The condition devices 1 to 8 are condition devices corresponding to the small members 1 to 8, and therefore, when any of the condition devices 1 to 8 is operated, when the reel stop operation is performed at the appropriate stop timing, The symbol combination of the corresponding small part can be stopped, but if the stop operation of the reel is performed at an inappropriate stop timing, the symbol combination of the lost (corresponding to the above-mentioned “bell bump”) is on the effective line Will stop. On the other hand, since the condition device 9 is composed of the condition devices of the small roles 1 to 8, when the condition device 9 is operated, the bell is operated even if the stop operation of the reel is performed at any stop timing. 1 or bell 2 can be pulled onto the active line, and any symbol combination of the small parts 1 to 8 is stopped.

  Next, a case where a plurality of condition devices are combined and satisfied will be described as an example of “condition device 1 + condition device 9” shown in FIG. 71C. Although “conditional device 1 + conditional device 9” is a combination of conditional devices, it can also be regarded as a conditional device, so it is referred to as conditional device A for convenience. At this time, in the condition device A, the condition device which operates with priority is determined depending on which reel becomes the first stop reel by the stop operation of the reels (priority condition). As for the priority condition in the conditional device A, when the first stop reel is the first reel (left reel 301a) or the second reel (middle reel 301b), the conditional device 1 operates with priority, and the first stop reel Is the third reel (the right reel 301c), the condition device 9 operates with priority. When the condition device 1 operates with priority according to the priority condition, as described above, reel stop control is performed such that the symbol combination of the small combination 1 corresponding to the condition device 1 is drawn. As a result, when the reel stop is in the proper order and the stop timing is the proper stop timing, the symbol combination of the small part 1 is stopped on the effective line and nine payouts are performed, but the stop is performed. If the timing is an improper stop timing, “Bell Run” is stopped as a lost due to the drop of the small role 1 and no payout is made (the number of payouts is zero). Therefore, in the conditional device A, the number of medal payouts that can be expected when the conditional device 1 operates with priority according to the priority condition is less than nine in consideration of the case of the bell bump. On the other hand, when the condition device 9 operates with priority according to the priority condition, as described above, any of the small combinations 1 to 8 corresponding to the condition device 9 regardless of the timing at which the reel is stopped. Reel stop control is performed such as pulling in any symbol combination. As a result, even if the operation of the reel stop button is performed at any stop timing, the symbol combination of any of the small players 1 to 8 is stopped on the effective line, and nine payouts are always made. It will be.

  That is, when the conditional device A is selected and operated, in the case where the first stop reel is the third reel (corresponding to right press or reverse press), nine sheets are always paid out regardless of the stop operation timing. On the other hand, when the first stop reel is other than the third reel (corresponding to forward press, pinch press or middle press), nine sheets are paid out only when the stop operation is performed at an appropriate stop timing. When the stop operation is performed at an inappropriate stop timing, the payout is not performed. And, by setting the above-mentioned priority condition to the condition device A, in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, not only can the control for stopping the combination of different symbols depending on the pushing order be realizable It is also possible to change the expected value of the number of payouts as in the case where the priority device 9 operates with priority is expected to pay out more medals than when the conditional device 1 operates with priority.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c), for the sake of simplicity, only the first stop reel is the condition, and differences with respect to the three push sequences considered based on the first stop reel are made. However, the priority condition of the condition device in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is not limited to this. For example, the second stop reel may have further conditions. By increasing the conditions in this way, the condition device to be operated can be set more finely, for example, stopping not only for the three push sequences but also for the four, five or six push sequences. The combination of symbols can be controlled. In addition, with 6 kinds of pushing order, forward pushing (left → middle → right), scissors pushing (left → right → middle), middle pushing (middle → left → right and middle → right → left), reverse pushing ( It corresponds to right → middle → left), and reverse pinching (right → left → middle).

  Further, in the above description with reference to FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (c), the same number of condition devices 1 to 9 are used when the stop operation is performed at the appropriate stop timing. In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, different numbers of payouts are performed depending on the operating condition device, for example. Control may be performed. As an example, by giving a difference to the number of payouts of at least any one of the minors 1 to 8, when the condition device corresponding to the minor with a difference operates with priority, the difference in the number of payouts Can be generated.

  In this way, if the priority of the condition device that operates based on the push order is set and the number of payouts when the symbol combination is established is changed for each condition device, the condition of the priority condition is satisfied (that is, the symbol is established) Expected value of the payout number of medals in the proper push order above and the medal payout number expected when the priority condition is not satisfied (that is, improper push order on symbol formation) It is possible to realize control to make a larger difference with the expectation value of.

  In addition to [11-7], there are places where "it is permissible to be displayed on the effective line for the combination of symbols corresponding to the condition device", but in this case "permitted As described in [11-7], a predetermined condition device is activated based on the priority condition, and a reel that draws a combination of symbols corresponding to the activated condition device onto the effective line This corresponds to that stop control is executed.

11-8. Penalty setting]
The game processing in the slot machine 1 has been described above, but in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when stopping a rotating reel, a “pushing order navigation” is displayed in which a specific pushing order is taught. A particular push order is recommended or required, except for game conditions under certain conditions such as, etc. It is normal that the specific pushing order is "forward pushing (operation to push from the left reel stop button in order)" (or "pinching pushing" (operation to push the right reel stop button after operation to the left reel stop button)) It is. According to such a recommended stop operation, a pressing order for stopping the left reel 301a first (hereinafter referred to as "regular press") is requested by operating the reel stop button 211a. Then, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 when the improper stop operation for stopping the reels is performed in the pushing order different from the regular pushing (hereinafter referred to as “irregular pushing”). By this, a penalty is set for the subsequent predetermined game. Anomalous pressing includes the aforementioned "reverse pressing", "reverse pinch pressing", and "middle pressing". Hereinafter, the setting of the penalty in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  When the stop order of the reel is taught by the push order navigation, the push order according to the instruction is regarded as the “appropriate push order”, and the push order different from the instruction is “the improper push order”. By considering it as “,” when the stop operation is performed in an improper pushing order, a penalty may be set for a predetermined game thereafter. At this time, for example, when the push order navigation teaches the push order of the "reverse push", the "reverse push" which is originally regarded as an irregular push is determined to be "appropriate push order", and other than "reverse push". The pressing order of is determined to be "incorrect pressing order" even if it is "forward pressing" or "scissor pressing" which is originally regarded as regular pressing.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, whether or not the pushing order is appropriate may not be a problem in the specific advantageous gaming state (for example, during the BB game) (the pushing order may not be determined).

[11-8-1. Command from main board to effect control board]
Here, before describing the setting of the penalty, a command that the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 receives from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 will be described.

  FIG. 72 is a list showing an example of commands transmitted from the main board to the effect control board. Each command shown in FIG. 72 is transmitted from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 via the input / output interfaces 1116 and 1130 at a predetermined timing, and 1-byte mode data (type of command) (MODE) and 1-byte EXT data (EXT) indicating the contents of the command. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that has received such a command can determine the type of the command from the mode data included in the command, and can determine the content of the command from the EXT data. For example, when the command "94XX (h)" is received, the CPU 1118 receives the command indicated by the mode data "94 (h)", and the content of the command is "XX (h)". It can be determined that "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

  In FIG. 72, the command indicated by “85XX (h)” indicates whether the BB is internally elected or not, the type of BB internally elected (BB1 to BB2 shown in FIG. 50) and the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 This is an internal winning command that specifies whether or not to execute (for example, reel special effects). Further, the command indicated by "86XX (h)" is a winning number command for designating an internal winning result (flag number of an internal winning flag). Since the internal winning result can be identified even with the winning number command, the internal winning command may not be generated, but the determination on the program can be simplified by providing the internal winning command. The “information command indicating the result of the internal lottery” described above in [11-2] or the like corresponds to the internal winning command or the winning number command.

  In FIG. 72, the command indicated by "8BXX (h)" is a winning number command for designating the type of winning combination. Further, the command indicated by "8CXX (h)" is a payout number command for specifying the payout number of medals.

  In FIG. 72, the command indicated by "94XX (h)" is a game counter 1 command that designates the value of the game counter at the start of the game. Further, the command indicated by "95XX (h)" is an RT information command specifying whether or not it is in the RT state and the type of RT state. The command indicated by "96XX (h)" is a game counter 2 command that designates the value of the game counter at the end of the game.

  In FIG. 72, the command indicated by “E0XX (h)” is an insertion number command for specifying the insertion number of medals. For example, when the number of inserted medals is one, the command E000 (h) is used, and when the number of inserted medals is two, the command E001 (h) is used, and when the number of inserted medals is three. The command E 002 (h) is used. Further, the command indicated by “E1XX (h)” is a bonus type command for designating whether or not the BB is being executed and which one of the BB1 to BB2 being executed. Further, the command indicated by "E2XX (h)" is a gaming state command that designates a gaming state being executed (BB, RB, re-playing, setting change, etc.). Note that the “MAX bet command” described above in [11-4] is an example of the inserted number command, and for example, when three medals are inserted as the MAX bet, the command E 002 (h) is the MAX bet command. It corresponds to

  In addition, as commands transmitted from the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510, there are a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a return command, a setting change command, an error command and the like.

  The reel start command is a command for notifying the start of the rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c, and can include information that can specify the reel that has started the rotation, the start time of the rotation, and the like.

  The reel stop command can specify which of the reels 301a, 301b and 301c the reel to be stopped is, the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel Command. The reel stop command is transmitted when a stop operation (external operation) is performed on the corresponding reel stop button 211a, 211b, 211c while the reels 301a, 301b, 301c are rotating. The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 can specify which reel stop button of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c has been operated by receiving the reel stop command.

  The return command is a command indicating that the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 has returned to the control state before the power-off. The setting change in progress command is a command indicating that the setting change is in progress, and is transmitted when the setting change state is entered. In addition, since the control state of the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 is initialized along with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the CPU 1110 has been initialized by receiving the command under setting change. . The error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition, the type of the error condition, and the like.

  The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 can determine the winning combination determined by the internal lottery by receiving the internal winning command and the winning number command from the CPU 1110 of the main substrate 409, and the condition corresponding to the winning combination. The device (or combination of condition devices) can be determined. Furthermore, in the condition device (or a combination of condition devices) determined as described above, the CPU 1118 is a condition device for pushing order incorrect answer such as small items 1 to 16 and a condition device for pushing order correct answer such as small item 17 When or the like is combined, it is possible to determine the pressing order (the pressing order of the correct answer) in which the condition apparatus for the correct order of pressing is preferentially operated based on the priority condition for the condition apparatus.

[11-8-2. Penalty processing]
FIG. 73 is a flowchart for explaining the penalty processing of the main substrate 409. With reference to FIG. 73, processing of a penalty in a series of games will be described.

  First, the BET processing (corresponding to step S2 in FIG. 54), the internal lottery processing (corresponding to step S3 in FIG. 54), and the reel rotation processing (corresponding to step S4 in FIG. 54) Is performed (step S1001). The details of the reel start process in step S1001 correspond to the series of processes described with reference to FIG. 55, but the process shown in FIG. 55 is an example of a process for controlling the rotation of the reel and is limited thereto. It is not a thing.

  Next, a stop operation is performed on the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c as an external operation by the player (step S1002). Although the player can freely select the order in which the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are operated (pressed), as described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the specific order of pushing is determined. Except for games under specific conditions, such as the display of "push order navigation" where is taught, the player is recommended to stop operation by "forward push" or "scissor push", such as When the recommended procedure is followed, the reel stop button 211a corresponding to the left reel 301a is operated first.

  In response to the player performing the stop operation in step S1002, in the slot machine 1, the process for stopping the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c corresponding to the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c for which the stop operation has been performed is performed. (Step S1003). The details of the reel stop processing correspond to the series of processing described with reference to FIG. 57. However, the processing shown in FIG. 57 is an example of processing for performing stop control of the reel, and is not limited to this. Absent. When the respective reels 301a, 301b, and 301c stop, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 transmits a reel stop command including information on the stopped reels to the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510. In step S1003, when the reel stop process is completed, if a predetermined symbol combination is established, preparation for refund or replay is performed according to the established symbol combination.

  Since the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 that received the reel stop command in step S1003 knows the order of the reels stopped in step S1003 from the received reel stop command, the order in which the player stops pressing the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c It can be judged. Then, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 is a stop operation for which the player's stop operation for the game should be set (imposed) penalty target (penalty target) based on the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c. It is determined whether or not (step S1004). Details of the determination criteria in step S1004 will be described later.

  When the CPU 1118 determines that the stop operation is not to be a penalty target in step S1004 (NO in step S1004), the series of processes of the game ends. When the CPU 1118 determines that the stop operation is to be a penalty target in step S1004 (NO in step S1004), a process of setting a predetermined penalty for a predetermined game after the game (set of penalty) Is performed, and the series of processing of the game ends. When a penalty is imposed, the CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 notifies the player of the display regarding the setting of the penalty using an LED provided on the frame member 501, a liquid crystal display device (not shown) or the like. You may do so.

  When a penalty is set, for example, a predetermined value is added to the penalty counter held in the RAM 1122 of the effect control board 510. Then, at the start of the subsequent game, the CPU 1118 can determine whether or not the game is a penalized game by referring to the value of the penalty counter.

  Further, in FIG. 73, the judgment process of the penalty target shown in step S1004 and the setting process of the penalty shown in step S1005 are performed after all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c are stopped in steps S1002 to S1003. It may be performed each time the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c stop.

11-8. Judgment of penalty object]
In the following, processing (corresponding to step S1004 in FIG. 73) will be described in which the CPU 1118 determines whether or not the player's stop operation is a target for which a penalty is to be imposed (penalty target).

  The CPU 1118 of the effect control board 510 refers to the pushing order of the stop operation derived from the reel stop command received in step S1003 and determines whether or not the stop operation is “forward press” or “scissor press”. At this time, when the reel stop operation is first performed on the left reel 301 a, it can be determined that “forward press” or “scissor press”, and thus the CPU 1118 is recommended “regular press”. It is determined that it is not a penalty target. In addition, when the reel stop operation is first performed on the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c, it can be determined that neither “order press” nor “scissor press” is performed, so the CPU 1118 determines that “anomalous press” is performed. It is judged that it is a penalty target. On the other hand, when the gaming state is the ART (or AT) state, the effect control board 510 does not perform the judgment of the penalty object, or the operation of the reel stop button is taught by the push order navigation “appropriate push order The penalty target may be determined based on whether or not the reel stop button has been operated as described in the above.

[11-8-4. Contents of Penalty]
As shown in step S1005 of FIG. 73, when the CPU 1118 determines that the player's stop operation is a penalty target, the CPU 1118 performs a process (set penalty) for setting a predetermined penalty for a predetermined game thereafter. However, in the following, the contents of the penalty will be described.

  The contents of the penalty are determined by the effect control board 510. The content of the penalty is not particularly limited, but, for example, the number of games (ceiling) in which the game state transitions to the advantageous game state is not performed while the transition lottery to the above-mentioned ART is not performed for a fixed number of games. Do not add the number of games in the middle (ie, do not target the number of games during the penalty period), the current mode of the gaming state during the penalty period has an advantage mode (high probability mode with high winning probability of ART, Alternatively, the transition to the super high probability mode) may not be made, or a lottery for the transition may not be made. In the game in which the reel stop button is irregularly operated to be a penalty target, if there is no payout of the medal by the established small combination, it may not be a target of the penalty. For example, when the winning combination is AT 9 shown in FIG. 50, when the reel stop button is operated in the order of reverse pinching (right → left → middle) against the order pressing, the bell symbol is displayed according to the condition device of accessory 17 Because the medal must always be established on the activated line and the winning of nine medals is established, this is targeted for a penalty, but the reel stop button is pressed halfway (the middle reel stop button is operated first) or scissors are pressed (left → It is not operated as a target of the penalty when it is operated as right → middle) and the bell symbol does not hold on the effective line.

  The effect control board 510 sets the contents of the penalty period and the penalty when the penalty is set. The penalty period is mainly set by the number of games. For example, assuming that the penalty period is 10G, a penalty is executed during 10G. The start of the penalty period can be appropriately set from the game subjected to the penalty, or from the next game, or from the later game. Management of the penalty period is performed by the counter set in the RAM 1122 of the effect control board 510. The effect control board 510 describes the subtraction of the counter for each game after the start of the penalty, and ends or cancels the penalty when the counter value becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, for example, zero. Alternatively, the increment of the game medals in the game subjected to the penalty, that is, the increase in the number of game medals in the case of pressing the reel stop button and the case of irregular pressing in the counter is set in the counter. The difference between the number of consumption and the number of game medals paid out (the number of consumption-the number of payouts) may be subtracted from the counter to continue the penalty until the number of games for which the value of the counter becomes less than or equal to zero.

[11-8-5. Avoiding Penalty]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, the reel stop button is operated in a pushing order different from the prescribed pushing order (the pushing order recommended by the game machine for the player). The form can be treated as an object that can not be penalized to a certain extent. That is, even if the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c so as to be irregularly pushed, the main substrate 409 stops the reel drive motors 411a, 411b, and 411c so that the irregularly pushed is not eventually obtained. Execute control (penalty avoidance control). In the following description, the prescribed pushing order is as follows: the left reel stop button 211a is first stopped (the left reel stop button 211a (first stop) → the middle reel stop button 211b (second stop) → the right reel) Stop button 211c (third stop) or scissors press (left reel stop button 211a (first stop) → right reel stop button 211c (second stop) → middle reel stop button 211b (third stop)) .

  The main board 409 starts rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c, and when the speed of rotation of all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c becomes constant, the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c are respectively By turning on the operation effective lamp, the player can know that the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c has become effective (corresponding to step S109 in FIG. 55).

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state (general state or normal RT), the main board 409 does not activate all the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c at the same time, but reel stop buttons other than the first stop button The timing at which the operation of (1) is enabled is delayed from the timing at which the operation of the first stop button (left reel stop button) is enabled. Since the middle reel 211b or the right reel 211c is not stopped even if the middle reel stop button 211b or the right reel stop button 211c is operated earlier than the left reel stop button 211a within this delay period, the player operates the reel stop button Not subject to penalty.

  At this point, the player notices that the pressing order of the reel stop button is not correct, and when all reels are stopped by pressing the left reel stop button 211a again in order, the effect control board 510 operates the player's reel stop operation. It is determined negative in S1004 on the assumption that the operation mode is as prescribed. On the other hand, although the player noticed that the pressing order of the reel stop button was not correct at the above-mentioned point in time, the same reel stop button was pressed again, and after the delay time has elapsed, When the middle reel stop button 211b or the right reel stop button 211c is operated, the corresponding reels 301b and 301c are stopped earlier than the left reel 301a, and the player's operation of the reel stop button becomes an out-of-spec operation Treated as

  If the player operates the left reel stop button 211a first and then operates the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c, if the delay time described above is long, the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c are used. It is not preferable because the corresponding reels 301b and 301c can not be stopped. The penalty avoidance process is intended to prevent the player who intends to operate the left reel 301a first from taking a penalty object if the player mistakenly operates the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c. Therefore, if the delay time is too short, in most cases, the operation of the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c other than the left reel stop button 211a is performed after the operation of the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c is activated. Unfavorable. From such a viewpoint, the delay time is preferably about 0.5 seconds. When the middle reel stop button 211b or the right reel stop button 211c is operated first after the delay time elapses, the corresponding reel (the middle reel 301b or the right reel 301c) is stopped earlier than the left reel 301a. The control board 510 processes the operation of the reel stop button as a penalty target.

  In the normal gaming state, after the player turns on the start lever 210, the player tries to operate the respective reel stop buttons 211a to 211c at once in a stroke from the left reel stop button 211a, but if this rhythm is broken, There is a possibility that the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c may be operated earlier than the left reel stop button 211a. For example, following the on operation of the start lever 210, the effect control board 510 executes a display prompting the user to press the chance button. When the chance button is displayed, the player tries to operate the chance button earlier than the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c as much as possible, but first operates the left reel stop button 211a with the rhythm of the forward press operation of the reel stop button. Do. However, if the player attempts to operate the chance button in the process of the operation of the player for the operation, the player confuses the operation order of the reel stop button, and the reel stop button 211 b other than the left reel stop button 211 a, In some cases, the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c other than the left reel stop button 211a may be touched in the course of the operation toward the operation of the chance button. The chance button is a display button for generating effects such as effect switching. It may be provided separately from the medal insertion button 206, but may be combined with the medal insertion button 206.

  Therefore, the main board 409 avoids the penalty only when the condition device of the winning combination determined in the internal lottery process S3 can execute the promotion display of the operation of the chance button on the effect control board 510, such as SB or chance eye, Processing may be performed.

  Further, the main board 409 does not perform the avoidance operation of the penalty except when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (general state, normal RT). This is because, for example, in ART which is the advantageous gaming state, the other reel stop buttons 211b and 211c are normally operated prior to the left reel stop button 211a. In this case, when the player operates the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c other than the left reel stop button 211a according to the display of the pressing order, if the delay period is set, the middle and right reel stop buttons 211b and 211c are displayed. The reels 301 b and 301 c can not be stopped by the operation. In addition, during the bonus, "ALL" (It is a winning combination to be a lottery target only during the bonus game, when the result of the lottery is "ALL", the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in any pressing order and at any timing Even if the symbol combination of the small item 17 is displayed on the effective line), the reel stop button 211a to 211c may be operated from any position. .

  The player knows that the reel stop buttons 211b and 211c corresponding to the reels other than the left reel 301a are activated late from the left reel stop button 211a by the delay in lighting of the operation enable lamps of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. be able to. The operation effective lamps of all the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c may be turned on at the effective point of the left reel stop button 211a. Also, the rotation of each of the reels 301a to 301c may be started at the timing of the reel stop button activation. Furthermore, in place of the effect control board 510 performing the ART transition lottery, the main board 409 performs the ART transition lottery, and when the transition lottery is won and the effect control board 510 starts the ART game, the AT 1 to AT 1 As in AT10, the winning combination has superiority or inferiority to the winning combination. Therefore, the activation timing of the second stop / third stop button operation other than the reel stop button to be stopped first should be the activation of the first stop button. You may make it delay from the timing of conversion. Furthermore, the main board 409 can change and set the delay time as appropriate. For example, the delay time in the latter is made shorter than the former in the winning combination in which the operation promotion display of the chance button can be performed on the effect control board 510 and the winning combination in which it can not be expected. Furthermore, when the recommended operation form of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is a forward push mode in which the left middle right is in order, the delay is further delayed from the activation timing of the middle reel stop button 211b (second stop button). Then, the right reel stop button 211c (third stop button) may be activated. As a result, even if the correct reel stop button 211a is operated as the first stop button, the player is rescued so that the third stop button is not erroneously operated earlier than the second stop button. be able to.

[11-8-6. Penalty reduction process]
In the gaming machine according to the present invention, although the inappropriate operation to be penalized has been executed, it is estimated or determined whether the mode of the inappropriate operation is due to the player's intentional result. It is configured to adjust the degree of the disadvantageous gaming state (penalty) to the player. In the case where the game machine is clearly made by the player's intentional operation (inappropriate operation with a positive intention), the game machine executes the processing of the penalty as it is. Check the situation in which the improper operation was performed, and depending on the situation, it is not severe to give the player the penalty as it is, not cause the penalty, cancel the penalty that has once occurred, or the contents of the penalty Adjust the degree of adverse gaming conditions, such as reducing so as not to be too disadvantageous to the player.

  The gaming machine having the main board 409 and the effect control board 510, the situation of the player's inappropriate operation, the temporal element in the player's reel stop button operation, the past history of the inappropriate operation, or a combination thereof Evaluate by etc. First, the case where the situation of the player's inappropriate operation is evaluated based on the time lapse of the player's operation on the reel stop button will be described. Although the player has tried to operate the reel stop button in the predetermined pushing order after the rotation of the plurality of reels is started, the operation mode of the inappropriate game is not achieved as a result of the pushing order being made. There is a possibility that it will be reached. For example, the reel stop button to be operated first is operated before the operation of the reel stop button is activated, and the other reel stop buttons are operated first after the reel stop button is activated, resulting in In this case, the gaming machine recognizes that the reel stop button has been irregularly pressed. Since such an operation of the player is not intentionally performed, the main board detects such an operation mode by checking the timing at which the reel stop button is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c start rotating from the time of wait timer time-up after the start lever is operated, and in synchronization with that, the stop button of each reel is enabled Then, the reels 301a to 301c are stopped by the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. In the normal gaming state, the player tries to execute each game repeatedly and quickly in order to shift to the advantageous game. Therefore, after the operation of the start lever 210, the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are tried to be operated in order from the left. The setting value of the wait timer is regulated to be somewhat longer, such as 4.1 seconds, and sometimes the player operates the first stop button before the wait timer time-up, and as a result, (1) The second stop button which continues without the operation of the stop button being activated will be operated after the wait timer time-up. Then, the effect control board 510 determines that the operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c by the player is anomalously pressed, assuming that the second stop button to be operated is operated most quickly, and generates a penalty.

  Therefore, after the operation of the start lever 210, the main board 409 detects the operation of the first stop button within a predetermined period before the wait timer time up (immediately before the time up), and the command including the detection result is produced By passing to 510, the effect control board 510 can know that the first stop button is operated immediately before the wait timer time-up and the other reel stop button is operated after the wait timer time-up. As a result, the effect control board 510 does not determine the player's operation as a penalty target, because the player's inappropriate operation is not intended by the player, cancels the penalty, or sets the penalty counter to zero. It is possible to prevent the player's operation from being penalized by, for example, setting a penalty such that the content of the penalty is nothing.

  However, if the effect control board 510 does not treat the player's improper operation as the player's abnormal operation, the player's inappropriate operation is permitted as a penalty without becoming a penalty target. Therefore, a skilled player may actively execute such inappropriate operations. Therefore, the main substrate 409 sets the predetermined time for which the player is allowed to operate improperly, that is, the time until the wait timer is up, thus setting the time to an extremely short time, thereby making the skill conscious player illegally operated. Will be able to eliminate

  Since the main board 409 detects the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c immediately before the wait timer time-up, the reel stop button is operated such that the operation of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c can be detected before the wait timer time-up. The flag area is set in the RAM area 1114 for each of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c for checking the presence / absence of the stop operation for the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c immediately before the wait timer time-up. . The player operates the left reel stop button 211a immediately before the time timer time-up, and continues operation with the middle reel stop button 211b and the right reel stop button 211c after the wait timer is up, and the left reel 301a is not stopped. When the left reel stop button 211a is operated again to stop the left reel 301a, the player's operation is subject to the conventional penalty as an irregular push against the forward push. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the main substrate 409 is in the operation recording area of the left reel stop button 211a to be operated first, and the left reel stop button 211a is in a short time until the wait timer time-up. Information indicating that it has been operated is set in the flag area, and the flag information and information on the operation order of the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are included in the command and transmitted to the effect control board 510. Receiving this, the effect control board 510 can know that the left reel stop button 211a is operated earlier than the middle reel stop button 211b and the right reel stop button 211c immediately before the weight timer time-up. The player's operation mode of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in this game is not intentional of the player, and the penalty process can be relaxed to be advantageous to the player as described above. Note that after the start lever 201 is operated, the player intentionally operates the reel stop button 211a to be operated first multiple times before the wait timer time-up, and as a result, the operation immediately before the wait timer time-up There may be a set of flags on. Therefore, when the reel stop button 211a is operated a plurality of times before the wait timer time-up after the operation of the start lever 201, the main board 409 does not set the flag, or the flag information is subjected to effect control It is possible not to transmit to the substrate 510.

  The effect control board 510 can record the occurrence history of the operation that has become a penalty in the RAM area for each game. The effect control board 510 can refer to the occurrence history of the penalty in the past game in the processing of the penalty in the game in which the inappropriate operation described above has occurred. For example, check the frequency of operations that have been subject to penalty from the previous game count (eg, several hundred times) to the current game, and if the occurrence frequency is equal to or higher than a predetermined value, In addition, all operations in which the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c are not operated according to the determined pushing order can be targeted for the penalty. If the frequency of operations subject to penalty is high, it can be regarded that the player has an intention not to observe the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c recommended or required by the player, and therefore the penalty By referring to the past history, it can be determined that the above-described improper operation was originally based on the player's intention. The operation history subjected to the penalty may or may not include the inappropriate operation described above, or may be a history of only the inappropriate operation described above.

  Next, another embodiment of penalty reduction processing will be described. In this embodiment, the stop operation means should be operated first within a predetermined time after the disadvantage game degree adjustment means (effect control board 510, etc.) starts rotation of the plurality of rotary display bodies. It is determined whether or not this is affirmed determination, and if the disadvantageous gaming state (penalty) is further executed, the degree of the disadvantageous gaming state is further determined as the disadvantageous gaming state if the determination is denied It is characterized by salvaging so that it becomes a game rather than the said disadvantageous game when (penalty) is performed.

  For the main substrate 409, the left reel 301a, the middle reel 301b, and the right reel 301c are rotated, or each reel is activated after the left reel stop button 211a, the middle reel stop button 211b, and the right reel stop button 211c are activated. The required time until the operation of the stop button 211a to 211c is recorded in the RAM area 1114. Next, the main board sends information of the RAM area 1114 to the effect control board 510. The effect control board 510 determines whether the operation of the reel stop button operated first is in agreement with the reel stop button to be operated first based on the recommended push order, and when it does not coincide. It is determined whether the reel stop button operated first is operated within a predetermined time after the rotation of the reel. If the reel stop button operated first is operated within a predetermined time, it is determined that the player's improper operation is not intended for the player, and the penalty mitigation process is applied. On the other hand, if the reel stop button operated first is not operated within the predetermined time, it is determined that the player's inappropriate operation is due to the player's intention and the penalty is not taken without taking a measure to alleviate the penalty. Determine the content. Inappropriate operation with respect to the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c not intended by the player is highly likely to occur by chance in the process of the player trying to sequentially press the operation of the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c without getting lost Therefore, there is a high tendency to be performed within a short predetermined time after the start of reel rotation. On the other hand, since the improper operation by the player's intention is performed while the player is aiming to deprive the game medium and at least to some extent the pressing order of the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, after the reel rotation starts There is a high tendency to take place at a point beyond this rather than a short time. Therefore, the effect control board is classified into the latter case as a penalty adaptation target, and the former case as a penalty reduction application target.

  In the above description, the penalty reduction process is applied based on the operation mode of the reel stop button operated first, and the second operation stop button and the reel stop button operated secondly Various determinations of the penalty reduction process are performed in consideration of the comparison with the reel stop button to be performed and the comparison result of the elapsed time from the operation point of the reel stop button operated first and the predetermined time. You may Further, various determinations regarding the operation timing of the reel stop button may be made to be performed on the main substrate 409. Furthermore, the penalty reduction process may be performed with reference to the execution history of the target operation of the penalty in the past game.

[11-8-7. Diversification of penalty processing]
The gaming machine according to the present invention can achieve diversification of penalty processing. Conventionally, when there has been the above-described irregular push on the reel stop button, which is a penalty target, a uniform form of penalty processing such as not performing a lottery for advantageous game in a subsequent game is performed. On the other hand, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a plurality of penalty processing modes, achieves diversification of penalty processing, and can suppress a decline in the player's willingness to play even if a penalty is imposed. .

  The first of the various aspects of the penalty processing is the conventional penalty processing, and when there is anomalous operation on a plurality of reel stop buttons in the normal gaming state etc., the player is regarded as a penlty for the prescribed number of games from the next game Under the constraints of adverse gaming conditions. In other words, the penalty process is continued until the prescribed game is consumed.

  The second of the various aspects of the penalty processing is that the penalty processing can be terminated early. In other words, the player is given a chance to cancel the penalty. For example, the player can have the opportunity to end the penalty positively early by spending a predetermined cost. It is possible for the player to be more motivated to tackle the game by being released early from the suppression of the penalty.

  A third of the various aspects of the penalty processing is that the penalty can be ended before the player feels the penalty. Since the player does not have to be conscious of the suppression of the penalty, it is possible to work on the game while maintaining the gaming desire.

  Each aspect of the penalty process is managed by the effect control board 510 with a flag. When the effect control board 510 determines a penalty and determines the content of the penalty, a random number is used to draw an aspect of the penalty process. The effect control board 510 sets a penalty pattern flag based on the lottery result, and executes a penalty processing mode in accordance with the flag. The first aspect of the penalty processing is as conventional, and as described above, the penalty processing is continued until the number of games set by the penalty counter is consumed.

  Next, the second aspect of the penalty processing will be described. First, in the normal gaming state, there is an irregular operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, and in the orderly pushing operation (the left reel stop button is operated first) as defined by the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c, the reels in the left and right The effect control board 510 performs a penalty process when a small combination in which the arrangement of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is difficult to be established is established by the abnormal operation over the 301a to 301c and the payout of the game medium is obtained. Decide as what to do. For example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, in most cases, even if the player operates the winning combination AT3 (scissors) in order, the arrangement of small combinations for incorrect order of pressing is displayed. On the other hand, if the AT 3 is pinched (the left reel stop button 211a, the right reel stop button 211c, and the middle reel stop button 211b are operated in this order), the condition device of the small winning combination 17 has priority and the player is It is possible to receive a payout of nine game media. As a result, the player can obtain an extra +8 medals unexpectedly due to the irregular operation, as compared to the case where the player does not do so. Therefore, the effect control board 510 determines an irregular operation on the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c as a penalty target.

  When the effect control board 510 performs a lottery for a penalty processing mode to determine the win of the second mode, the player is prevented from acquiring game media that can be originally acquired by the player, and the game is set before the number of games set in the penalty counter. You can end the penalty. For example, if the player presses the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in order from the left, the condition device of the winning combination is prioritized, and the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is established on the effective line, In the case where it is possible to receive the payout of the game medium, the effect control board 510 navigates (teaches) the pressing order other than the forward pressing to the player, and the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c according to the navigation. If, without giving priority to the condition device of the winning combination, the symbol arrangement for pushing order incorrect solution is established on the effective line and the acquisition of a small number of game media is continued, the player daresly obtains the game media which can be originally acquired Since it is lost, the effect control board 510 executes the alleviation or reduction process of the penalty process based on the number of unexpected acquisitions of game media and the number of lost game media.

  When the effect control board 510 determines the second mode in the penalty process, the value of the penalty counter is checked in the next game. The value of the penalty counter corresponds to the remaining number of continuing games of the penalty, so the penalty processing is continued until the value of the penalty counter becomes zero. If the value of the penalty counter is not zero, the effect control board 510 checks whether or not the winning combination has the condition device of the small combination to which priority is given in order. For example, AT1 and AT2 in FIG. 50 are winning combinations having the condition device of the small winning combination 17 prioritized by forward pressing. With regard to the winning combinations of AT1 and AT2, if the left reel stop button 211a is operated to the first, there are payouts of nine medals, but except for the forward pressing operation, the payout for pressing order incorrect solution (one sheet) It is almost always to stay. When the effect control board 510 determines this winning combination, a navigation prompting to operate the buttons other than the left reel stop button 211a first is displayed. At this time, the effect control board 510 is displayed immediately before the navigation recommending the player to follow the navigation, such as "Damage (penalty) recovery chance! Operation can be recovered according to the navigation!" It may be displayed on the screen. It is natural that the player's operation according to this navigation is not subject to a penalty. In addition, when the irregular operation on the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c is determined as the target of the penalty, the effect control board 510 causes the screen of the liquid crystal display device to be displayed as an image which is truly damaged. It is also good. At that time, every time the recovery chance is cleared, the effect control board 510 changes the screen of the liquid crystal display device to display the process of recovering from the damage, and indicates the recovery of the damage when the penalty is completely eliminated. An image may be displayed.

  If the winning combination is a condition device to which priority is given by other than the forward press, the effect control board 510 performs a penalty process and shifts to the next game. When the player operates the reel stop buttons 211a to 211c in accordance with the above-described navigation, game media which can be originally acquired if the forward pressing operation is performed are lost. Whenever a game medium is lost, the effect control board 510 subtracts a predetermined number of games from the penalty counter. When the value of the penalty counter reaches zero, the effect control board 510 ends the penalty process. In the game during the penalty period, the penalty process may be ended when the accumulated value of gaming media missed by the player reaches the number of gaming media randomly obtained by the player. When ending the penalty process, the effect control board 510 resets the flag for the second mode of the penalty process. According to the second aspect of the penalty processing, by intentionally losing without obtaining the game media that the player can originally obtain during the penalty period, instead, the penalty can be made early even if it is before the number of penalty setting games It is possible to avoid the decline in the player's willingness to play by ending it.

  Next, the third aspect of the penalty process will be described. The effect control board 510 checks the presence or absence of the flag corresponding to the third mode when it is determined that the ART lottery which is an advantageous game is won. When the effect control board 510 determines that the flag of the third mode is satisfied, a penalty mask process is performed to execute a penalty without making the player feel a penalty. The penalty mask process is intended to use the reduced number of game media for the penalty by lowering the expected value of the game media in the advantageous game to which the third aspect of the penalty process is applied lower than the expected value It is.

  Assume a winning combination including a plurality of condition devices (small combinations) in which the display of the combination of symbols is prioritized in different operation correspondences in operation modes other than the forward pressing operation of the plurality of reel stop buttons 211a to 211c. . For example, in this winning combination, the small combination A (a condition device in which priority is given to the operation of the scissors pressing and the bell is aligned in the lower stage), and the small combination B (corresponding to the small combination 17 in FIG. 49) The overlapping part of the condition device in which the bell is aligned on the effective line is established. When the combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination A is aligned, there are payouts of five medals, and when the combination of symbols corresponding to the small combination B is aligned, there are nine payouts. The effect control board 510 determines a flag corresponding to the third aspect of the penalty process, and when this winning combination is determined, navigation of scissors is pressed to induce the payout of five medals, and the reverse push is performed. Guide the payout of nine medals by navigating. The number of medals paid out is smaller by four with the scissors-loaded navigation as compared to the reverse-loaded navigation. When the effect control board 510 does not determine the third flag, it displays the reverse push navigation almost always. In addition, since the condition device of these small winning combinations A and B is not prioritized in the sequential pressing operation in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to establish the combination of symbols corresponding to the small winning combination.

  If the effect control board detects a flag corresponding to the third aspect of the penalty process, and the number of medals obtained out of the schedule is, for example, eight, until it becomes equal to the number of medals, it has already been described in the ART game. When the winning combination is detected, a scissors push navigation is displayed instead of the reverse push navigation. If the player follows the navi of the scissors press, the number of medals obtained at one time is small, and by following the navi of the scissors press twice, the total shortfall becomes 8 and the operation is performed in a non-standard push order. The number is the same as the number of out of specification At this point, the effect control board 510 resets the flag to end the penalty. In addition, if the total number of medals for the shortfall does not reach the total number of medals obtained in an unexpected schedule in one advantageous game, the effect control board 510 does not reset the flag, and the number of medals for the shortfall will be next You may carry over to the ART of. Also. If there are multiple strikes that are subject to a penalty, the total number of unscheduled medals is counted as a subject of the penalty. According to the third aspect of the penalty processing, since the number of medals paid out is slightly reduced within a period in which a large number of medals can be expected to be acquired in the advantageous gaming state (ART), the penalty is merely absorbed. The penalty can be ended without making the player aware of the penalty or feeling the penalty.

[11-9. Reel special effects]
Next, reel special effects executed by the main board 409 will be described. The main substrate 409 executes the lottery of the specific reel special effect in the internal lottery process (S3) of the game process (FIG. 54). First, prior to describing the special reel special effects, the conventional special reel effects will be described. The reel special effect delays the timing at which the operation to the left middle right reel stop button becomes effective after the start lever operation (after the game start) as described above, that is, the reel stop button is effective. It is a process in which the lighting of the lamp is delayed, and in the meanwhile, the main substrate is performed on at least one reel of the left middle right reel.

  For example, the reel does not rotate even though the start lever is turned on, the reel locks when the start lever is turned on (the reel rotates slightly and stops immediately), the reel reversely turns even though the start lever is turned on, the start lever on However, only a part of the reels rotate. When the period of the reel special effect elapses on the main board, the left and right middle reels are normally rotated to activate the operation of the left and right middle stop button. Reel special effects are often generated for the winning combination of the bonus game obtained in the internal lottery, but also in the case of the winning combination of the small part (Replay, Bell, Watermelon) or the internal lottery being missed Reel special effects may be performed. Although the winning combination itself as a result of the internal lottery is to be originally expected by the player, the player is expecting the reel special effect to occur after the start lever operation, and is elected if the reel special effect does not occur. It has tended to lower the expectations for the role. In this case, the original fun of the pachislot machine, that is, the function to make the winning combination itself be expected is lost.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the main board performs the reel special effect utilizing the period from the reel stop processing (S5) to the start of the next game. This period has a strong aspect as a waiting period for the next game after the game is over, and it has not been actively used conventionally to improve the gameplay. The main board can perform reel special effects during the start of the next game after the reel is stopped and the symbol combination for the winning combination is displayed. This reel special effect is sometimes referred to as a specific reel special effect to distinguish it from the conventional reel special effect performed after the game is started, and the latter is sometimes referred to as a conventional reel special effect. The main board can hold the timing at which the bet for the next game can be made during the specific reel special effect so that the next game is not performed during the specific reel special effect.

  The main board can start the special reel special effect triggered by the operation of the player from the display of the symbol combination to the winning combination to the start of the next game. For example, the operation of the reel stop button, the operation of the effect button, and the operation of the start lever. After the symbol combination for the winning combination is displayed on the main board, the reel special effect is executed before the next game is started, so that the player's expectation for the game is maintained even after the winning combination is determined in the game. It is possible to suppress the drop and to have another expectation for the benefit of the specific reel special rendition. After the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, the main substrate may start the special reel special effect when there is no operation by the player.

  The specific reel special effect does not deny the conventional reel special effect, and the specific reel special effect may be performed in one game in a plurality of games, and the conventional reel special effect may be performed in another game. Also, two reel special effects may be performed in the same game. In the special reel special effect in the present invention, the main board displays the symbol combination for the winning combination to the player, and the bonus for the winning combination (payout of game medals, replay, bonus game such as regular bonus or big bonus, or ART game) Etc. After the determination of the transition to the advantageous gaming state etc.) is presented to the player, a benefit different from the benefit given to the winning combination is given to the specific reel special effect. The additional benefit for the special reel special effect is a benefit other than the benefit for the winning combination (a different benefit different from the benefit for the winning combination), for example, the number of ART games added to the ART game played by the effect control board 510 and the number of added sets In addition to setting the number of cancellation games in ART game or setting the number of cancellation games in ART game, etc., etc., the probability of winning in a specific gaming state (bonus game, ART game, etc.) in main board 409 is usually probability Including low probability to high probability or ultra high probability state.

  The specific reel special effect is started for a specific winning combination or may be started by lottery. The lottery means (main board) for the special reel special effect may carry out the lottery even when the result of the internal lottery is out. The lottery means for the specific reel special effect may increase the winning rate so as to make it easier to win the specific reel special effect as the specific winning combination. After the symbol combination based on the winning combination is displayed on each reel, the specific reel special effect execution means causes some reels of the plurality of reels in the stopped state to stop after moving again and stops the remaining reels. To realize the movable stop control means to leave. The movable stop control means determines a reel special pattern for selecting which reel is to be moved again, and how many symbols the reel which has been moved is to be rotated and then stopped, or selects a reel special pattern from a plurality of patterns. . The movable stop control means is configured to display a specific reel special effect during a period from when the symbol combination is displayed on the reel based on the winning combination by the role lottery until the next game is started (during the next combination lottery is performed) Run. After confirming the benefit of the winning combination, the player can predict the additional benefit in the form of the specific reel special effect. The effect control board can receive an information command from the main board and derive an effect image and an effect sound synchronized with reel control in the specific reel special effect to the player.

  Next, the specific reel special effects will be described in detail. FIG. 74 is a timing chart of conventional reel special effects, and FIG. 75 is a timing chart of specific reel special effects of the present invention. In the conventional reel special effect, when the player operates the start lever, it is assumed that the winning combination A is won. The effect on the winning combination A is started on the liquid crystal display device. Next, the player sequentially executes the first reel stop operation, the second reel stop operation, and the third reel stop operation, and when the three reels stop, the player wins the winning combination A as a reward for the winning combination A. A predetermined payout of game medals is made. The player continues to have the expectation for the winning combination from the start lever operation to the payout of the benefit for the winning combination A, but if there is the payout of the game medals, the expectation for the winning combination is rushed until the internal lottery of the next game is executed. When it is lowered and the next game starts (next start lever operation), it starts to have an expectation for the winning combination again.

  When the main board determines that the internal winning combination B at the time of the start lever operation is a trigger of the reel special effect, the timing for making the stop operation of the reel effective is delayed from the normal, while the reel special effect is performed on the reel during this time. The reel special effects are continued by the main substrate for a predetermined period. During this time, the stop operation for one or more reels is invalidated. When the reel special effect is finished, the main board rotates the left middle right reel normally and cancels the reel stop operation invalidity, and accepts the reel stop operation. When a reel special effect is executed after the start lever operation, generation of a reel special process such as a reverse rotation of the reel or a lock of the reel occurs rather than the player expects the symbol arrangement of the winning combination obtained as a result of the lottery The player is expected to have more than the winning combination, and the sense of expectation for the winning combination remains lowered even if the reel special effect is finished. In particular, when the reel special effect has a weak pattern, the expectation for the winning combination displayed after the reel special effect is significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, in the specific reel special effect (FIG. 75) of the present invention, the expectation for the winning combination is lowered because the bonus period for the winning combination is paid out (the benefit for the winning combination is paid out). Period of time). When the winning combination A is determined by the internal lottery, the effect on the winning combination A is executed on the liquid crystal display device, the first reel stop to the third reel stop are executed, and the payout for the winning combination A is performed. After that, a specific reel special effect is executed during the next winning lottery. During this time, the player continues to expect, for example, reel special effects without reducing the sense of expectation for the game. After that, even if the reel special effect is not performed at the timing in the next game, the player feels an expectation for the winning combination B. In the process of repeatedly playing a plurality of games, the player can always hold a sense of expectation for the game.

  The main board executes necessity processing of specific reel special effects in the internal lottery process (S3). As a result of the internal lottery, the main board checks the condition device to determine whether or not the specific combination is won. When the specific combination is won, the reel special determination flag is set in the reel special determination area of the predetermined area of the RAM 1114. When the main board determines that the reel is stopped in the determination process (S6), the display content (symbol combination mode) displayed on the activated line and the internal lottery process (S3) are determined. The determination processing of the specific winning combination is performed by collating with what is permitted as a result of the internal lottery performed. When the winning combination is determined, the main control board sets a reel special execution flag. The main control board checks the reel special determination flag and the reel special execution flag, and when it is determined that both flags are set, confirms the operation of the third stop button or the stop of the third stop reel, etc. Start special reel special effects.

  The specific reel special rendition is executed by re-moving (re-rotating) one or more of the plurality of stopped reels and then stopping it, and more specifically, which reel is enough In the state where the reels moved by the symbols are stopped and the moved reels are stopped, a different benefit different from the benefit of the winning combination is given according to the symbol combination of the plurality of reels on the left, middle and right. Which reel is rotated (reel special effect pattern) is set to a predetermined area of the RAM 1114 by the sorting table by the main board according to the winning combination when the reel special determination flag is set. Ru. The determination of the reel special effect pattern may be performed at a stage of setting a reel special execution flag. Further, even when the player can not withdraw the corresponding symbol combination of the specific combination on the activated line (that is, even when the reel special execution flag can not be set), the reel special effect may be executed.

  As an aspect of the processing of the specific reel special effect, a series of operations may be repeated a plurality of times in which a part or all of the reels of the first to third reels are stopped after restart and another bonus is added. . The main board may set information to repeat the reel special effect at the time of setting the reel special determination flag, or after the series of reel special effects from the restart of the reel to the stop, the continuous lottery is executed. When the continuous lottery is won, the next reel special effect may be performed based on the stop symbol.

  The main board checks a reel special effect pattern flag (a flag indicating which reel is rotated by what number of symbols), and after the stop symbol by the internal lottery is displayed, the reel special effect is executed. FIG. 76 is a transition diagram of symbol rows of reel bands, showing a specific example of specific reel special effects. FIG. 76 shows stop symbols of a plurality of reel bands displayed in the symbol display window. The symbol row of the reel band according to FIG. 76 relates to a modification different from the symbol row of the reel band of FIG. 46, and seven symbols of the same color are continuously attached to two left and right reel bands In the center reel band, the same color 7 designs are formed independently without being continuous. Seven symbols of left and right reels and seven reels of middle reel are combined, and as a stop symbol of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, seven symbols are established in one line or two lines or both of them. . FIG. 76 shows which reel is rotated from the stop symbol of the specific part obtained as a result of the internal lottery. In the stop pattern of the stop pattern A, a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is established along the effective line while 7 symbols of the same color are arranged in two lines of a central line and a line downward to the right. The seven symbols in this two-line arrangement give, for example, a big bonus bonus as a bonus for the internal lottery. Note that, for example, a benefit of regular bonus is given to seven symbols arranged in one line as a benefit for the internal lottery.

  After the main board rotates the left reel by a predetermined symbol after restart (in the middle reel and the right reel is held in the stopped state) in the re-movable pattern 1 by the reel special effect based on the stop pattern of the stop pattern A Stop it. In the re-moving pattern 2, after the middle reel is restarted, it is stopped after being rotated by a predetermined symbol. In the re-moving pattern 3, after the right reel is re-rotated, the right reel is rotated by a predetermined symbol and then stopped.

  In the re-movement pattern of the reels in the re-movement patterns 1 to 3, the main board is based on the winning combination because the main board is rotating the partial reels instead of rotating all the reels of the stop symbol. The symbol combination can be displayed multiple times in one game. The player can be expected to reproduce the stop pattern of the winning combination by reel special effect. In particular, since the reel of one of the stop symbols of the winning combination is rotated, the player's expectation for reproduction of the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is increased. In addition, when the reels of two or more symbols re-move, the degree of expectation for the reproduction of the winning combination decreases as compared with the case where one reel re-moves. On the other hand, the re-movement of two or more reels is effective when the player is expected to have a symbol arrangement which can have a benefit more than the benefit of the stop symbol of the winning combination. For example, the stop symbol of the winning combination may be a chance eye or the like.

  In the re-movable patterns 1 and 3 in the stop pattern A, there are three stop patterns of 7 symbols aligned in one line, aligned in two lines, or not aligned in the special reel special effect. On the other hand, in the pattern 2, there is a pattern in which seven designs are aligned or not aligned in two lines. By the stop symbol pattern A of the winning combination, the BIC bonus and the ART game after the BIC bonus end are decided as the bonus by the role lottery. Depending on whether the 7 symbols are aligned in one line or in two lines, the sub bonus as an additional bonus (a bonus given by the effect control board) is given by the re-movement of the reel. The sub-reward is the addition of the number of continued ART games. The sub privilege may be added to the number of sets of ART games.

  In the stop symbol pattern B of the winning combination, seven symbols are established in one line of the lower right. Since the stop symbol pattern is B, the regular bonus as a winning combination and the ART game after the regular bonus end are decided. In Removable Pattern 1, the left reel stops after rerotation, and in Removable Pattern 2, the middle reel stops after rerotation, and in Removable Pattern 3, the right reel stops after rerotation. In the re-movable pattern 1, there are patterns in which seven designs are aligned in two lines, in one line, or not aligned, depending on the stop position of the left reel. In the removable pattern 2 and the removable pattern 3, there are patterns of whether the seven designs are aligned or not aligned in one line depending on the stop position of the seven designs.

  In the case where the symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern C, 7 symbol 1 lines are formed in the middle of the row. Since the stop pattern of the symbol combination of the winning combination is C, the regular bonus as the winning combination and the ART game after the regular bonus end are decided. In Removable Pattern 1, the left reel stops after rerotation, and in Removable Pattern 2, the middle reel stops after rerotation, and in Removable Pattern 3, the right reel stops after rerotation. In the removable pattern 1 and the removable pattern 3, depending on the stop position of the left reel, there are patterns of 7 designs aligned in 2 lines, aligned in 1 line, or not aligned. In the re-movable pattern 2, there are patterns of whether the seven designs are aligned or not aligned in one line depending on the stop position of the seven designs.

  As described above, the combination of the stop symbols after the special reel special effect differs depending on the combination of the stop symbols of the winning combination and which reel of the stop symbols restarts. When the symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern A, when the left reel or the right reel re-moves, there are two cases where the 7 symbols are established in one line and in the two cases where the 7 symbols are established in 2 lines In the case where the middle reel is moved again, there is only one case that is established by two lines of seven designs. Therefore, when the left reel or the right reel is restarted, the player is given a sense of security in obtaining the additional benefits, whereas when the middle reel is restarted, the player is felt in the acquisition of the additional benefits. (Tense) is given. Therefore, the degree of additional benefits when the middle reel is restarted and 7 symbols are established may be increased compared to the degree of additional benefits when the left reel or the right reel is re-movable and 7 symbols are established. it can. That is, the combination of the specific symbols (7 symbols) displayed on the non-removable reel among the combinations of the stop symbols of the winning combination causes the main board to stop the symbols of the plurality of reels at the time of the reel special effect for the player. The degree of additional benefit based on the combination of can be taught.

  The main board allows the player to always visually recognize the specific symbol displayed on the non-removable reel, and makes it possible for the player to predict, expect, recognize, etc., the symbol arrangement after special reels relatively easily. A control can be realized that allows the player to clearly determine whether or not the additional benefit is given. The main board teaches the player the addition of additional benefits by the combination of the stop symbols of the plurality of reels after the reel special effects. In addition, the main board can make the player expect the player to arrange the specific symbols more than the specific symbols in the symbol combination based on the winning combination. In the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, although seven symbols are formed in one line, seven symbols are formed in two lines as a result of the reel special effect. That is, it is possible to realize a chance of winning the winning combination as a result of the internal winning by the reel special effect. As described above, since the reel special effect based on the winning combination is executed after the symbol combination for the winning combination is displayed, the symbol combination is displayed a plurality of times based on the winning combination during one game, and the player is elected Continue the sense of expectation for the role, and the benefits for the display of the first symbol combination consisting of the symbols of the winning combination being displayed, followed by the additional benefits for the display of the symbol combination after the first based on the reel special effects The player's sense of progress can be given to the player by changing the value of.

  FIG. 77 is a lottery table of a reel special effect pattern for the stop symbol of the winning combination. This table is recorded in the ROM of the main board, and the main board refers to the lottery table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern of the winning combination, and uses random numbers from the lottery table to combine the number of restart reels and the number of added games. decide. When the left reel and the right reel are restarted, the lottery table (stop pattern A) is realized by one line (single) or two lines (double) of seven symbols, and a predetermined number of games are added (10 games) In the case where the middle reel is restarted, 7 symbols may not be aligned, but when 7 symbols are established, 2 lines are always established. It is shown that (50 G) can be realized. Then, when the left reel or the right reel is restarted, in the stopped symbols after restart, the number of additional games in which seven symbols are more established in two lines than seven symbols are established in one line is set. . Which reels re-move, in which form a specific symbol (7 symbols) is established, and how many additional games there are (combination of reel special effect pattern and additional benefits), table distribution rate Determined by As can be seen from the lottery table, which reel is to be rerotated, but the distribution rate is set to be lower as the number of added games is larger. As a result, the expectation of the additional benefit is that which reel is re-movable The rate of game medals is almost the same.

  The lottery table 2 is a lottery table in the case where the stop symbol combination of the winning combination is the pattern B. Since 7 symbols are established on one line in stop pattern B, distribution ratio (probability) in which 7 symbols are not aligned after reel restart as compared to lottery table 1 of stop pattern A in which 7 symbols are established on 2 lines Is 50%, which is larger than the value of lottery table 1 (10%). In addition, even if the middle reel is restarted, the number of games to be added to the middle reel is suppressed to a smaller value than in the case of the lottery table 1 (stop pattern A) because the middle reel remains established in one line of 7 symbols. It is done. In the case of restart of the left reel, 7 symbols may be established in 2 lines, and the number of games with the largest number of games on the top is set. The number of top games on the entire lottery table based on the stop pattern B is limited to be lower than the number of top games on the stop pattern A.

  The lottery table 3 is a lottery table when the combination of the stop symbols of the winning combination is the stop pattern C. The stop pattern C is the same as the stop pattern B in which the seven symbols are aligned in one line, but the stop form after the restart of the right reel is the stop in the stop pattern B, in contrast to the stop pattern B. In order that the pattern C may have two lines, it is assumed that the stop pattern C is higher than the stop pattern B in the degree of advantage, and the probability that 7 symbols are not formed is the case of the stop pattern C as a result of the specific reel special effect. Is set lower than in the case of the stop pattern B (50% in the case of the stop pattern B, and 40% in the case of the stop pattern C). Then, in the stop mode after the restart of the right reel and the stop mode after the restart of the left reel, the maximum number of additional games (30 games) is set when two lines of seven symbols are established.

  As can be seen from the lottery table in FIG. 77, when the stop pattern after symbol restart for the combination of symbols A, B and C with respect to the winning combination results in the arrangement of seven symbols as specific symbols being established by the stop after the reel restart. The stop pattern of any one of the stop patterns A, B and C is reproduced. In this case, the main substrate may continue the reel special effect processing to realize a continuing means for continuing the reel special effect until the seven symbols are not aligned.

  According to the special reel special effects described above, the following effects are achieved. The stop symbol of the winning combination (the formation of the seven symbols) is displayed, and a feeling of expectation maintaining means is realized which can maintain the feeling without losing the sense of expectation for the game until the next game is started after the benefit for the winning combination is decided. . The main board gives the player a sense of relief since the player confirms the finalization of the benefit (playing of game medals or replay, BIC bonus, regular bonus and other advantageous games) for the winning combination to the reel special effect. A sense of relief provision can be realized. Since the reels of some symbols of the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination are restarted, the combination of stop symbols to be provided with additional benefits after special reel special effects is predicted based on the display of stop symbols not to be restarted be able to. The stop symbol of the reel after the reel special effect realizes teaching means for the additional benefit. Since the symbol combination after the reel special effect is generated based on the stop symbol corresponding to the winning combination, the expectation maintaining means is realized that maintains the sense of expectation for the winning combination even after presenting the bonus to the winning combination to the player. In the range of one game, the player is provided with the rotation and stop of the reel based on the winning combination, and the subsequent rotation and stop of the reel by the specific reel special effect and a plurality of reel operation modes provided to the player. It is possible to improve the sense of fun of the player in the reel operation.

  In the embodiment described above, although the main board determines the reel to be moved / stopped in the processing of the specific reel special effect, the player can also select the reel to be restarted (the movable selection means ). When the main board wins a specific combination as a result of internal lottery processing, at this time, a line of 7 symbols or a line of 2 lines is displayed (a lottery of whether or not to perform reel special effects is performed to start reel special effects May be won.) Set reel special decision flag. After the third reel is stopped, when the symbol corresponding to the specific combination is displayed, the main board notifies the player to select a reel to be moved / stopped through the liquid crystal display device by the effect control board. In response to this notification, the player operates the stop button corresponding to the reel to be restarted to select the reel to be stopped after re-moving. When the main board is operated the stop button, the stop pattern of the movable reel corresponding to the stop button is determined by drawing.

  FIG. 78 shows a lottery table in the case where the stopped symbol patterns of the winning combination are A, B and C when the reel to be moved is selected by the player. In the lottery table 1 (stop pattern A), as a result of the reel special effect in the middle reel, there are two ways whether 7 symbols are established in 2 lines or 7 symbols are not established, and 7 symbols do not align Although the probability is as high as 40%, the addition of 30 games or more is decided by 60%, half of which is the addition of 50 games or more. Therefore, to select the middle reel as the restart target is notified to the player by the effect control board via the liquid crystal display device that the game property of "super wave" is selected.

  When the player selects the left reel, there is a 20% probability that 7 symbols will not be established after reel special effects, and the maximum number of added games by the establishment of 7 symbols after reel special effects in 2 lines (30 games Although the probability of) is as low as 10%, the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 70% by the formation on one line of 7 symbols. Therefore, the selection of the left reel is notified to the player as "steady". When the player selects the right reel, there is a 30% probability that 7 symbols will not be established after reel special effects, and the maximum number of added games (30 games due to 7 symbols after reel special effects being established in 2 lines Although the probability of) is 20%, the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 50% by the establishment on one line of 7 symbols. The additional bonus for the reel special effect by the selection of the right reel is set to have a slightly larger value for the number of additional games although the probability that 7 symbols are not established is somewhat higher than the additional bonus for the reel special effect for the left reel. Therefore, the reel special game according to the selection of the right reel is notified to the player as "normal" to the fact that the left reel is "solid".

  The lottery table 2 is a distribution table when the stop pattern of the symbol combination of the specific combination of internal lottery is B. In the middle reel, as a result of reel special effects, there are two ways whether 7 symbols are established in one line or 7 symbols are not established, and the probability that 7 symbols are not aligned is 30%, 70% 10 games will be added. Therefore, it is notified to the player that the middle reel is to be the restart target is "steady" playability. When the player selects the left reel, there is a 50% probability that 7 symbols will not be established after reel special effects, but the maximum number of added games by the establishment of 7 symbols after reel special effects in 2 lines (30 Although the probability of the game is as low as 10%, the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 60% by the establishment of 7 lines in 1 line. Therefore, the selection of the left reel is notified to the player as "disturbance" although it does not go to "super turbulence". When the player selects the right reel, the probability that 7 symbols will not be established after reel special effect is 40%, and the number of added games by the establishment of 7 symbols after reel special effect in one line is 20 games or The probability of 10 games is 60%. The additional bonus due to the reel special effect by the selection of the right reel is set to have a slightly larger value for the number of additional games although the probability that 7 symbols are not established is somewhat higher than the additional bonus with reel special effect for the middle reel. Therefore, the reel special game based on the selection of the right reel is notified to the player as "normal" to the fact that the middle reel is "solid".

  The lottery table 3 is a distribution table in the case where the stop pattern of the symbol combination of the specific part of the internal lottery result is C. In the middle reel, as a result of reel special effects, there are two ways whether 7 symbols are established in one line or 7 symbols are not established, and the probability that 7 symbols are not aligned is 20%, 80% The addition of 10 games or 20 games is decided. Therefore, it is notified to the player that the middle reel is to be the restart target is "steady" playability. When the player selects the left reel, there is a 30% probability that 7 symbols will not be established after reel special effects, and the maximum number of added games (30 games) due to 7 symbols after reel special being established in 2 lines Although the probability is as low as 10%, the addition rate of 10 games or 20 games is 60% by the establishment of one line of 7 symbols. Therefore, the selection of the left reel is notified to the player as "normal" although it can not be "solid". If the player selects the right reel, the probability that 7 symbols will not be established after reel special effect is 40%, and the number of added games by the establishment of 7 symbols after reel special effect in 2 lines is 30 games The probability is 20%, and in the case where seven symbols are established in one line, the probability of 10 games or 20 games is 40%. The additional bonus for reel special effects by selection of the right reel has a slightly higher probability that 7 symbols will not be established compared to the additional bonus for reel special effects for left reel, and the probability of the maximum number of games to be added is set with a slightly higher value ing. Therefore, the reel special game according to the selection of the right reel is notified to the player as "disruption" against the fact that the left reel is "normal".

  As described above, the combination of the specific symbols (7 symbols) displayed on the reels not to be restarted, that is, according to which reel the player selects and restarts the stop symbol of the symbol combination of the winning combination. Depending on the mode, the form of the symbol combination when the restarted reel is stopped, the distribution ratio of each stop symbol, and the combination of the degree of additional benefit to each stop symbol are appropriately set. Thus, the degree of expectation due to the distribution rate of the additional benefit, the degree of the benefit, etc., corresponds to the appearance of the apparently stop symbol by the non-moving reel. Therefore, it is possible to easily clarify the degree of expectation of the award provided by the player selecting the reel. In addition, the game property for additional benefits, the degree of additional benefits is high, but the probability of establishment of the game mode for the generation of additional benefits is low "(super) turbulence" game, the level of additional benefits is ordinary, additional The probability of the establishment of the game mode for the generation of benefits is also normal "normal" game, although the degree of added identification is low, but the probability of establishment of the game mode for the generation of additional benefits is high "solid" game such as By realizing the game character setting means of the additional benefit, it is possible to realize the determination of the playability by the action of the player who selects the reel, and it is possible to change the playability by the player's will according to the progress status of the game. Become.

  In the embodiment described above, the sorting table is recorded in the ROM of the main board, the additional bonus of the reel special effect is determined by the main board, and the additional bonus is notified from the main board to the effect control board. The effect control board may receive an information command indicating a reel special effect pattern from the main board, and the additional benefit degree may be determined based on the lottery table recorded in the ROM of the effect control board. When the additional bonus is determined by the reel special effect, the game to which the additional bonus is given in the subsequent games is executed. When the additional benefit is the number of added ART games, the ART control board is the ART added with the number of added games after the next game on which the reel special effect is performed (after the bonus game based on the winning combination is finished). Start the game.

  As described above, the player can select any reel among the left middle, right middle reel in consideration of the stop symbols other than the reels to be selected, but by sorting the specific reel special effect pattern based on the lottery. (See FIG. 78), the main board has a probability (proposed rate of additional bonus) at the time when the selected reel selected by the player is stopped after the specific symbol combination (the establishment of 1 line or 2 lines of 7 symbols) is moved. A change can be given to the degree of provision of additional benefits provided when the movable reel is stopped to form a specific symbol combination (specific reel special effect pattern variation means). Therefore, depending on which reel is selected at the time of specific reel special effect, fluctuation occurs in the degree of provision of additional benefits, which may cause the player to be unfair. Therefore, when the main board or the effect control board is a special reel special effect, an equalization means is realized which balances (equalizes) the degree of advantage of the additional benefit no matter which reel is selected. The details will be described below.

The first form of distribution of the special reel special effect pattern will be described. The specific symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern A of FIG. 76 as in the first embodiment.
(1) Selection of left (right) reel (move and stop of left (right) reel)
Probability that the specific symbol combination will not be established: 4/8 Additional bonus: 0 G
Probability of specific symbol combination being established: 4/8
Probability of 1 line formation of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional bonus: 30 G
Probability of 2 lines of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional bonus: 50 G
(2) Selection of middle reel (motion and stop of middle reel)
Probability that the specific symbol combination is not established: 6/8 Additional bonus: 0 G
Probability that a specific symbol combination will be established (2 rye establishment of 7 symbols): 2/8 Additional bonus: 80 G
When the left (right) reel is selected for the main board (effect control board), a specific symbol combination is likely to be established but the added bonus is small, and when the middle reel is selected, a specific symbol combination is established. A special reel special effect is realized that it is difficult to do, but the added benefit is large.

The expected degree of additional benefits when the left (right) reel is selected is
(4/8) * 0 G + (2/8) * 30 G + (2/8) * 50 G = 20 G,
The expected degree of additional benefits when the middle reel is selected is
(6/8) * 0 G + (2/8) * 80 G = 20 G.

  In the first embodiment, the main substrate (effect control substrate) restarts two kinds of symbol identification combinations (first symbol identification combination (one line of seven symbols) and a second symbol identification combination (7 symbols). If you select the left reel (or the right reel) that can display the 2 lines of the symbol), the decision to give additional benefits is made with a probability of 50%, and one type of symbol is specified by restarting When the middle reel capable of displaying the combination (the second symbol specific combination only (two lines of seven symbols)) is selected, it is determined that the additional benefit is given with a probability of 25%. That is, when a left reel (or a right reel) which is a reel on which a plurality of symbol specific combinations belonging to a specific symbol combination can be displayed among a plurality of reels, any of the plurality of symbol specific combinations is selected. The award of the additional benefit is determined at a higher rate (probability) than when the middle reel which is the reel that can be displayed is selected. However, the additional benefit given when the second symbol specific combination is displayed by selecting the middle reel is 80G in the number of ART game additions, and the second symbol by selecting the left reel (or the right reel) The additional benefit awarded when the specific combination is displayed is the number 50G of ART games. It is possible to obtain advantageous benefit contents by selecting a reel that is determined to give additional benefits at a low rate (probability). That is, as the possibility of the additional benefit is low, the additional benefit per reel so that the degree of advantage can be balanced by making the benefit details of the additional benefit more advantageous when the additional benefit is granted. A balancing means is realized by setting the determination ratio of and the distribution of the content of the benefit.

  As a result, when the middle reel is selected, the above-mentioned "(super) turbulence" game is temporarily realized as compared to the case where the left (right) reel is selected, but Expected values are the same. Therefore, although it is possible for the player to select different game characteristics different in the probability of being given by the selected reel and the content of the benefit when being given, it is possible to maintain fairness even in the selected game characteristics. Furthermore, since the payout rate due to the additional benefit is not unstable depending on the reel selected by the player, and the payout rate is approximately constant, sales management becomes easy not only on the player side but also on the hole side.

  In addition, two types of symbol identification combinations (the first symbol identification combination (one line of seven symbols) and the second symbol identification combination (two lines of seven symbols) can be displayed or one symbol identification combination ( Whether only the second symbol specific combination (two lines of seven symbols) can be displayed can be displayed by the reels that are not selected but maintained at a stop by the transition diagram of symbol rows of the reel band such as FIG. 76 Since a plurality of symbol specific combinations belonging to a specific symbol combination are in a form that can be recalled, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance. That is, it is possible to clearly and simply guide the player to the relevance to the benefit that can be provided by the reel option based on the display symbol aspect. The degree of expectation of the additional benefit in the first embodiment is twice the degree of expectation of the additional benefit in the first embodiment. Therefore, the high probability state and the low probability (normal probability) state are set in the distribution of the specific reel special pattern in the specific reel special effect processing, and the main substrate (effect control board) is highly probabilityed by lottery or according to the winning combination. A state or low probability state may be selected.

The first embodiment is preferable because the present invention is intended to clarify the degree of expectation of additional benefits by giving the relationship between the specific symbol combination and the application rate and the degree of addition of the additional benefits, but the first form is preferable, but The distribution processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the second embodiment will be described. The stop symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern A of FIG. 76.
(1) Selection of left (right) reel (move and stop of left (right) reel)
Probability that the specific symbol combination is not established: 6/8 Additional bonus: 0 G
Probability of specific symbol combination being established: 2/8
Probability of 1 line formation of 7 symbols: 1/8 Additional bonus: 30 G
Probability of 2 lines of 7 symbols: 1/8 Additional bonus: 50 G
(2) Selection of middle reel (motion and stop of middle reel)
Probability that the specific symbol combination will not be established: 4/8 Additional bonus: 0 G
Probability that a specific symbol combination will be established (2 rye establishment of 7 symbols): 4/8 Additional Bonus: 20 G

  In the main board (effect control board), by executing the specific reel special effect pattern distribution control of the second mode, the left (right) reel is selected and the left (right) reel is moved or stopped in 0. Is a special symbol combination is hard to be established, but the additional bonus is large, and when the middle reel is selected and the middle reel is moved and stopped, a special reel special effect that the specific symbol combination is easily established but the additional bonus is small To achieve.

The expected degree of additional benefits when the left (right) reel is selected is
(6/8) * 0 G + (1/8) * 30 G + (1/8) * 50 G = 10 G,
The expected degree of additional benefits when the middle reel is selected is
(4/8) * 0 G + (4/8) * 20 G = 10 G.

  Even if the player chooses the left reel or the right reel where 7 symbols may be established in one or two lines and tries to obtain additional benefits firmly, or, the middle reel in which 7 symbols are aligned only in 2 lines Even if it is selected to obtain additional benefits at once, the expected value of the degree of additional benefits is the same. Therefore, the main board (effect control board) executes, in the specific reel special effect process, means for equalizing the degree of provision of the additional benefit (advantage) regardless of which reel is selected.

Furthermore, a third form of distribution of the specific reel special effect pattern will be described. The specific symbol combination of the winning combination is the stop pattern A in FIG. 76 as in the first and second embodiments. (1) Selection of left (right) reel (move and stop of left (right) reel)
Probability that the specific symbol combination will not be established: 4/8 Additional bonus: 0 G
Probability of specific symbol combination being established: 4/8
Probability of 1 line formation of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional bonus: 30 G
Probability of 2 lines of 7 symbols: 2/8 Additional bonus: 50 G
(2) Selection of middle reel (motion and stop of middle reel)
Probability that the specific symbol combination will not be established: 4/8 Additional bonus: 0 G
Probability that a specific symbol combination will be established (2 rye establishment of 7 symbols): 4/8 Additional bonus: 40 G

  Unlike the first form and the second form, in this third form, the probability that the specific symbol combinations for providing additional benefits are aligned is the same regardless of whether the left (right) reel or the middle reel is selected. is there. Then, when the left (right) reel is selected, the specific symbol combination of the specific reel special effect has one line of 7 symbols and 2 lines of 7 symbols, so that the degree of additional benefit to each is different Although the left (right) reel is selected and the middle reel is selected, the expected value of the additional benefit is the same (10 G). Which reel is selected for the main board (effect control board), but balances the degree to which the added benefit is given, but if some reels are selected, according to the established state of the specific symbol combination A means is provided to disperse (disperse) the mode of giving additional benefits. Note that the probability of establishing a specific symbol combination of the specific reel special effect and the application degree of the additional benefit may be different between the selection of the left reel and the selection of the left reel. In addition, although the player is allowed to freely select the movable and stopped reels from among the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, the player is notified of the reels from which the main board can be selected via the effect control board. You may do so. For example, “left reel or right reel can be selected”, “selectable except for left reel”, “select any two reels”, and the like. If the player selects a reel other than the one notified, the player is required to reselect the reel.

  In the embodiment described above, it is first determined which reel is to be restarted as a reel special effect, and the number of games to be added is determined depending on what form of stop symbol is obtained as a result of restarting the reels. The On the other hand, when the main board determines the start of the reel special effect based on the winning combination, the degree of additional benefit is determined by lottery, and the reel special effect pattern such as a reel to be re-moved is determined accordingly. Good. FIG. 79 shows a distribution table for determining the degree of additional benefit of a specific reel special effect (for example, FIG. 76 distribution table for stop pattern A. A distribution table may exist for each stop pattern). The main board draws the degree of additional bonus award from any group of A, B, C from the group, and restarts the corresponding reel as specified in the distribution table, and establishes 7 symbols which is a specific symbol. Let The group A has 50 games or 30 games as the degree of additional benefit, and the main board has 7 symbols established in 2 lines in any case. In the group B, the additional benefit degree consists of 10 games or 20 games, and 7 symbols are established in one line in any case. In group C, the degree of additional bonus is zero game, and the main board re-moves the reel without establishing seven symbols.

  If the stop form of the winning combination corresponding combination symbol is pattern A, the additional benefit degree is determined by the A group (1) of the distribution table (50 additional games, middle reel movable, 7 symbol 2 lines established), and the distribution table A group (2) (number of games with 30 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols and 2 lines established), group A of distribution table (4) (number of over 30 games, right reel movable, 7 symbols and 2 lines established), Group B of the distribution table (5) (number of games with 20 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbol 1 line established), group B of the distribution table (6) (number of games with 20 additional games, right reel movable, 7 symbols one line) B), distribution group B group (7) (number of added games 10, left reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line formed), distribution table group B (8) (number of added games 10, right r Le movable, 7 satisfied in design single-line), C group (9) (plus game number 0 of the distribution table, the center reel movable, 7 symbols not satisfied) is drawing to either the reel special effect pattern. The main board controls which of the left reel, the middle reel and the right reel how to control the specific symbol in order to realize the degree of additional benefit by the reel special effect based on the determined reel special effect pattern. It is determined whether or not it is established (whether 7 symbols are established in 2 lines or 1 line, or 7 symbols are not established), the reel is re-moved and then stopped.

  When the stop form of the winning combination corresponding combination symbol is pattern B, the additional benefit degree is the A group of the distribution table (2) (the number of added games is 30, the left reel is movable, 7 symbols and 2 lines are satisfied), the distribution table Group B (5) (number of games with 20 additional games, left reel movable, 7 symbols and 10 lines established), group B of distribution table (6) (number of supercharged games with 20 right reels movable, 7 symbols and 1 line established), Group B of distribution table (7) (number of added games 10, left reel movable, 7 symbol 1 line established), group B of distribution table (8) (number of added games 10, right reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line And a reel special effect pattern of group C of the distribution table (9) (number of added games 0, middle reel movable, 7 symbols not established).

  When the stop form of the winning combination corresponding combination symbol is pattern C, the additional benefit degree is the A group of the distribution table (2) (the number of added games is 30, the left reel is movable, 7 symbols and 2 lines are satisfied), the distribution table A group (4) (number of games with 30 additional games, right reel is movable, 7 symbols and 2 lines are established), group B of distribution table (5) (number of 20 top games and left reels are movable, 7 symbols and 1 line is established), Group B of distribution table (7) (number of added games 10, left reel movable, 7 symbol 1 line established), group B of distribution table (8) (number of added games 10, right reel movable, 7 symbols 1 line And a reel special effect pattern of group C of the distribution table (9) (number of added games 0, middle reel movable, 7 symbols not established). In this manner, the main board determines the special reel special effect pattern based on the additional degree of the additional special benefit to be added to the additional game by the special reel special effect after the special combination of the reel combination is determined in the special reel special effect. You may

  Next, another embodiment of the special reel special effect process of the gaming machine will be described below while adding the explanation described above with reference to FIG. The main board 409 executes various control modes related to the specific reel special effects based on the program recorded in the ROM 1112. When the main reel rotates the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel, it is determined by the stop button whether all reels have been stopped. When all the reels are stopped, the main board determines whether or not the specific winning combination has been drawn. Here, the specific winning combination is a target of the special reel special effect described above in the symbol display window 401, for example, a line (specific symbol combination) of "7" as a specific symbol in one line or a plurality of lines. It is a winning combination that can be aligned on the effective line the symbol to be established. If the main board denies the lottery of the specific winning combination, the lottery of the other winning combination, the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the other winning combination is determined, the necessity of payout of the game medal is processed, and the next game Transfer to processing.

  Next, the main board determines whether or not a specific symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display window, and when it is affirmed, sets benefits such as a bonus game or ART lottery, and determines the necessity of specific reel special effects I do. The necessity of the special reel special effect is determined by the lottery as described above. When the main board makes a negative determination on the execution of the specific reel special effect, it proceeds to processing for the next game.

  On the other hand, when the main board affirms the execution of the specific reel special effect, the BET for the start of the next game of the game currently being played is reserved until the specific reel special effect is over, and among the plurality of reels stopped The one or two reels are stopped after re-moving (specific reel special rendition). The special reel special effect pattern is recorded in the ROM 1112 such as which reel is moved, which movable reel is stopped at which symbol, and how many times the reel movement and stop are repeated, etc. The main board is a plurality of patterns The predetermined pattern is selected from among to continue the specific reel special effect processing.

  At the time of specific reel special effect, the main board collapses the specific symbol combination once established across a plurality of reels by moving some of the reels. The main board is a straight line in at least one of the upper, middle, lower, diagonal right, and diagonal left, in which the symbol combination related to the specific symbol arrangement combination is a line straddling a plurality of reels during the specific reel special effect continuation period. It is determined whether or not the above is established, and when the related symbol combination is established linearly on these lines, it is recorded as an additional benefit provision target based on the specific reel special effect. Since the specific symbol combination is a sequence of symbols such as "7" that can be easily recognized by the player, the related symbol combination is also set as the same or similar form as the specific symbol combination.

  After the player confirms the particular symbol combination which can be easily recognized by himself and has a high degree of advantage, the player is again made to visually recognize that the particular symbol combination is broken as some of the reels rotate again. Based on the display of the specific symbol combination left in the non-rotating stop symbol, it is possible to easily predict the combination of the stop symbol to which the additional benefit is to be given. Thereafter, when a related symbol including a specific symbol constituting a specific symbol combination is viewed across a plurality of reels so as to be associated with a specific symbol combination to be an additional benefit, stop at a predetermined position connected by a straight line By doing this, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the additional benefit is given in the current game before the start of the next game.

  When the main board determines the end of the special reel special effect, a predetermined additional bonus is determined based on the game result such as how many times the symbol combination related to the specific symbol array is established during the special reel special effect. The additional benefits are, as described above, the number of additions of the set of ART, the number of additions of the number of ART games, etc., which are different from the award based on the winning combination. The main board sets the number of set additions of ART and the number of additions of ART games to the effect control board. Next, the main board and the effect control board execute the advantageous game for a predetermined number of games based on the bonus and the additional bonus associated with the specific symbol arrangement.

  On the other hand, when the specific winning combination is established but the specific symbol combination can not be drawn to a plurality of reels, the main board is used to make the player recognize the advantageous state accompanying the establishment of the specific winning combination. Execute control processing using as follows. When the main board determines that the specific symbol combination is not displayed, it is determined whether or not the reel special effect is necessary, that is, whether or not some of the plurality of stopped reels need to be re-moved.

  If the symbol combination displayed on a plurality of reels is not a specific symbol combination, for example, a specific symbol (for example, “7” described above) that can be easily recognized by the player is established on a line across the plurality of reels. It means the case where it is not a symbol combination. If the specific symbol is displayed on one or two of the reels constituting the line, but the specific symbol is not displayed on another reel, it may be determined that the main board is not a specific symbol combination. In addition, the symbol combination which is not a specific symbol combination may be limited to a predetermined one. The necessity of the special reel special effect is determined in advance by lottery.

  When the main board denies the execution of the special reel special effect, the processing of the next game is started. When the main board decides to execute the special reel special effect, it selects re-moving patterns for a plurality of reels. There are a plurality of re-movable patterns, for example, a specific symbol combination formation pattern and a partial reel movable pattern.

  In the specific symbol formation pattern, the main substrate rotates at least one of the stopped reels, and sets the symbol combination different from the specific symbol combination formed on the plurality of reels currently stopped to the specific symbol combination Force change. For example, in the case where "7" which is a specific symbol is partially present in the same straight line of a plurality of reels, at least a reel in which the specific symbol is not established may be rotated. Furthermore, depending on the number of reels that rotate, it may be suggested that the size of the benefit provided for the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific winning combination. As a result, it is possible to realize a game characteristic in which the behavior of the reel and the size of the benefit given thereto are proportionally or correlated with each other, so that the size, type, etc. of the benefit provided by the reel behavior in which the reel is rerotated. It is possible for the player to deduce that the game can be made clearer.

  In the above description, although it is assumed that some reels are moved again, even if the specific symbol “7” is partially present in the same straight line of a plurality of reels, all reels are dare rotated. A pattern may be provided which is forced to change to a specific symbol combination after being let go. It can give the appearance impact as an effect rather than rotating some reels, and it can further emphasize that additional benefits are given.

  When the main board displays the specific symbol combination, it gives a privilege related to the specific symbol combination corresponding to the specific winning combination, and then determines whether or not the specific reel special effect is necessary, and then the specific reel special effect process has already been described. Execute as follows. The main board has one or more reels even when the stopped mode of the plurality of stopped reels is different from the specific symbol combination although the specific winning combination corresponding to the specific symbol combination is drawn. By showing the player a specific aspect by moving and stopping it once, the player knows that the specific winning combination has actually been drawn regardless of the effect on the liquid crystal display device by the effect control board, and the specific symbol A game can be continued while being relieved that a specific reel special effect is generated based on the combination and an additional benefit may be obtained. Furthermore, when generating a specific reel special effect described above, even if a different symbol combination is displayed, it is possible to execute the specific reel special effect after the specific symbol combination is displayed by the control according to the specific symbol combination formation pattern. It is possible to clearly provide the player with the effect utilizing the stop mode.

  In the partial reel movable pattern, the main substrate rotates a part of reels, for example, a reel of a symbol with no specific symbol displayed, after a reel that establishes a symbol combination that is not a specific symbol combination. A specific symbol or a related symbol related thereto in symbol display window 401 (a symbol which can be combined with a specific symbol to form a symbol combination corresponding to a predetermined winning combination, eg, a different color “7” symbol, or BAR Stop to display the symbol etc.). By this, the player can recall from the behavior of the reel itself without being notified by the liquid crystal display device or the sound that the specific winning combination capable of establishing the specific symbol combination has been drawn. .

  Even when it is necessary to operate the stop button at a proper timing (so-called eye-pushing) as a condition for displaying a specific symbol combination, even if it is controlled by a specific symbol combination formation pattern or a partial reel movable pattern, Even when a specific symbol combination can not be displayed due to poor eye-catching, by performing the notice effect regarding the grant of the award given at the time of winning the specific winning combination by the reel itself, the playability according to the player's skill is It is possible to strongly give the player the impression of maintaining the fairness of the game without largely changing. Furthermore, since control based on the partial reel movable pattern is limited to reminding without notifying the winning of the specific winning combination, for example, the game is stopped at an appropriate timing at which the specific symbol combination can be displayed. By not performing the button operation (do not press the button), it is possible for the player to delay grasping and confirming the winning of the specific winning combination by the will of the player and maintain the expectation that the specific winning combination has been won. It is possible to continue the game.

  The main board performs a specific reel special effect processing after implementing a partial reel movable pattern, makes the predetermined reel movable stop, and displays a symbol combination related to the specific symbol combination to generate an additional benefit Reel special effect processing may be executed. In this case, the expected value of the degree of additional benefit may be lower than that of the specific symbol combination formation pattern. The above is other embodiment of the control processing for specific reel special effects.

  Next, in the specific reel special effect processing, before notifying the player of the reel on which the main substrate is movably stopped before the reel is moved, and before suggesting the degree of additional benefit to the player based on the stop reel, An embodiment will be described in which the player can be reminded of the degree of provision of the additional benefit. At the time of setting of the specific reel special effect pattern, the main board performs lottery for whether or not to perform advance notification processing of the movable reel. When the lottery process is not performed, the main substrate moves the specific reel in accordance with the specific reel special effect pattern without performing the advance notification process of the movable reel.

  Prior notification processing of the movable reel If the lottery is won, the main substrate performs prior notification processing of the movable reel before the specific reel is moved, and moves the specific reel after the end of the prior notification processing. A plurality of patterns are set in the ROM of the main board as a table in the form of the advance notice process of the movable reel, and the main board performs distribution lottery based on the table to determine the movable reel advance notice process pattern.

  As an example of the movable reel prior notification processing pattern, there is a mode in which the movable reel prior notification processing is performed on the liquid crystal display device by the effect control board. The effect control board receives the specific reel special effect pattern command from the main board, analyzes the command, and specifies the reel to be moved. For example, the effect control board informs the liquid crystal display of the movable reel such as “right reel movable”, “middle reel movable”, and “left reel movable”. It may be broadcast by voice. When there are a plurality of movable reels, the effect control board notifies a plurality of movable reels as "right reel / left reel movable".

  Before the movable reel is moved, the player is notified of the reel in advance, and the player can stop the unreported reel (that is, the immovable reel) by moving the notified reel. Since it is possible to know in advance, by reminding in advance of the stop mode displayed after the movement of the notified reel, the actual movable of the reel is reminded of the expectation of how much additional benefit will be given Of the special reel special effects can be made richer.

  The effect control board receives a specific reel special effect pattern command from the main board and analyzes the command to specify the movable reel, but “left reel or middle reel movable”, “movable except for left reel”, “one Alternatively, the reels that are actually moved may be ambiguously notified such as “two reels movable”, “two reels movable”, and the like. By doing this, the player actually makes the reel to be moved vague, and by recalling a plurality of patterns of stop modes displayed after the move, the degree to which the additional benefit is given may be fluctuated, the game for the additional benefit The sense of expectation of the person and "the feeling of excitement" will increase.

  Although the effect control board receives the specific reel special effect pattern command from the main board and analyzes the command to specify the moved reel, it may notify the reels other than the reel which is actually moved. For example, although the left reel is actually moved, a false notification such as "middle reel movable" may be performed. Alternatively, although there is a reel that is actually moved, it may be falsely notified that there is no movable reel like "No movable reel, sorry". By doing this, the player can further increase the sense of expectation for the degree of additional benefits by having a sense of surprise for the actual movement of the reel after notification.

  The effect control board can also execute a pattern for causing the player to answer the movable reel as the movable reel prior notification process. For example, there is an advance notification form of “select one movable reel”, “select two movable reels”, and “right reel, middle reel, which is movable?”. The player responds to the advance notification by operating the stop button corresponding to the reel. When a movable reel is hit, the effect control board increases the degree of provision of additional benefits more than when it is not possible to hit a movable reel, or makes the special reel special effect continue further Processing can be performed.

  Instead of, or in addition to, the effect control board performing the movable reel prior notification process, the main board may notify the reel which is actually moving in advance by performing preliminary movement of the reel. For example, with regard to a reel that is actually movable, it is reciprocated in a short cycle in forward and reverse directions. The player can recognize the reel on which the preliminary movement has been performed as the movable reel. In addition, the player may be made to give a sense of expectation and tension to which reel is actually moved by making the movable reel notified by the liquid crystal display device different from the movable reel notified by the main board. .

  The movement of the reels is relative, and for example, at the time of specific reel special effects, a plurality of reels are initially rerotated and reels other than the reels selected by the main board are stopped earlier than the selected reels. In the case of the specific effect pattern for stopping the reel selected last, the reel selected by the main substrate corresponds to the movable stop control target reel.

  Next, the game contents of the ART game described above will be specifically described. The outline is as follows. ART game of BIC bonus or regular bonus game contents described above (BIC bonus symbol pattern symbol pattern combination of regular bonus symbol symbols, and game content that many game medals can be acquired in a short time) Realized by Therefore, although not described as a winning combination in FIG. 49, an ART bonus winning combination is set as a winning combination to shift to such an ART game (ART bonus game). The ART bonus winning combination can be established in any of the normal gaming state and the ART gaming state. As an example, in the ART bonus game, it is assumed that the number of continuing games is set in advance according to the ART bonus winning combination, and when providing a plurality of ART bonus winning combinations, it differs according to each ART bonus winning combination The number of continuing games may be set. Then, the ART bonus winning combination is won in the special lottery by the main board, and when the symbol combination (ART bonus symbol combination) corresponding to the ART bonus winning combination is displayed when the reel is stopped, the ART bonus game is started. The ART bonus symbol combination is, for example, a combination of seven red symbols (such as being aligned on a straight line across the reels).

  Describe the ART bonus game. When the ART bonus game starts from the normal gaming state (ART bonus game state), in each game during the ART bonus game continuation game number, in addition to the drawing of the winning combination by the main board, the effect control board wins the game Based on the role, perform a plurality of types of additional lottery according to the additional benefits different from the bonus by the winning combination. In this additional lottery, for example, a lottery (first lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to the ART game after the ART bonus game, and the number of continued games in the ART game selected in the first lottery are added ( There is a lottery (second lottery) to determine whether or not it is an addition. The effect control board performs the first lottery first in each game during the number of continuation games of the ART bonus game, and does not perform the first lottery in the game period after the first lottery is won. Make a lottery. Therefore, in the case where the first lottery is not won, when the ART bonus game for the number of continuing games is consumed, the ART bonus game state is returned to the normal game state. Also, if the first lottery is won, the ART bonus game state is transitioned to the ART game state after the ART bonus games for the number of consecutive games have been consumed, and if the second lottery is won, The number of added games obtained in the second lottery is added to the specified number of ART games in the ART game state.

  First, the effect control board performs start effect for the ART bonus game based on the winning of the ART bonus winning combination. When the next game is started, the effect control board performs the first lottery when the winning combination by the special lottery is the specific combination. The effect control board forms, in the RAM, a lottery result storage area corresponding to each game of the ART bonus game. The lottery result storage area is a first flag area in which a first flag representing the type of lottery executed among the first lottery or the second lottery is stored, and a lottery result by the first lottery or the second lottery A second flag area in which a second flag representing information (for example, a winning result, the number of added games, etc.) is stored, and whether or not execution of a suggestion effect of a lottery result by the first lottery And a third flag area in which three flags are stored. The effect control board sets the first lottery execution information to the first flag when the first lottery is performed, and sets the winning information to the second flag when the lottery is won. When the effect control board sets the win information to the second flag, the effect control board sets the third flag to the suggestion effect execution information of the lottery result. In addition, the effect control board performs the first lottery, but if it is not won, it performs the necessity lottery of the suggestion effect, and when the necessity lottery is won, the third flag is executed to execute the effect Set the information

  Here, an example of the suggestion effect of the lottery result will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a view for explaining a simulated video of the front of a magazine of a rotary type gun, and the effect control board displays a simulated video as shown in FIG. 80 on the liquid crystal display device during the duration of ART bonus. The simulated video of the magazine contains seven display areas as shown by waving numbers “1” to “7” in FIG. 80, and the numbers “1” to “6” are shaken. Each display area corresponds to one magazine. In the suggested effect described later, a display is performed in which one unlit display area is lighted in numerical order. That is, in the simulated video of the magazine shown in FIG. 80, since the maximum additional number of magazines is 6, it is possible to perform the suggestion effect of lighting the magazine up to six times. Then, for example, in the seventh suggested effect, an effect such as turning on the central display area to which the number “7” is given may be performed. In addition, when the magazines are turned on, the magazines may be turned on in different colors, and the degree of expectation for winning may be changed according to the colors. In addition, a lighting color corresponding to the winning combination at the time of the effect execution may be used, such as yellow for bell, light blue for replay, and red for cherry. In the gaming machine according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 80, the present invention is not limited to displaying a simulated image of a magazine on the liquid crystal display device, for example, displaying an image capable of stepwise display on the liquid crystal display device Alternatively, the display of the same mode may be performed by a character provided in the gaming machine.

  As described above, when the suggestion effect execution information is set to the third flag, the effect control board causes the liquid crystal display device to display an image (indication effect) for adding a bullet to a magazine. When the suggestion effect execution information is not set to the third flag, the suggestion effect is not performed. Next, the effect control board determines whether or not the current game is the final game of the ART bonus game, and, in the case of the final game, performs an announcement effect based on the suggestion selection and ends the ART bonus game. The contents of the notice effect will be described later. A plurality of types of specific roles may be set for the specific role in the first lottery, and a table may be used in which the winning probability in the first lottery is different for each specific role. For example, the probability of winning the first lottery may increase as the specific winning combination in which the winning probability in the special lottery is lower.

  On the other hand, when the current game is not the final game of the ART bonus game, the effect control board shifts to the processing of the next game, and when the first lottery is not won in the ART bonus game until then, The first lottery process is performed, and when the first lottery is won, the second lottery process described above is performed without performing the first lottery. In this second lottery, it is determined whether or not the additional benefit (the number of continued games) is given to the advantageous gaming state (ART game) in which the transition after the current ART bonus game is determined by the first lottery. When it is a lottery to be determined and the winning combination is a regular combination, the effect control board performs a second lottery. The effect control board performs the distribution lottery of the number of added games with reference to a predetermined distribution table regarding the number of added games. A plurality of types may be set to the regular roles serving as lottery triggers for the second lottery, and a sorting table is provided such that the mode of sorting of the number of added games varies depending on the regular roles, for example, a rare role The more the number of added games may be distributed as (the lower the winning probability in the special lottery), the more the number of added games may be distributed. In addition, when the second lottery is performed, the number of games equal to or more than the minimum number of games may always be added, or the number of added games can not be distributed (the number of added games of 0 games is selected) The case may be included.

  The effect control board sets the second lottery execution information to the first flag when the second lottery is performed, and the second flag indicates that the second lottery has a distribution of the number of added games. The winning information of the second lottery and the information on the number of added games are set in. When the winning information of the second lottery is set to the second flag, the suggestion rendering execution information is set to the third flag and the above-described suggestion rendering is executed. The execution information of the second lottery is set to the first flag, but the number of added games is not distributed in the second lottery, and the winning information is not set to the second flag, the execution of the suggestion effect is necessary If a lottery is not performed and the execution necessity lottery is won, the suggestion effect execution information is set to the third flag to execute the suggestion effect.

  Next, the effect control board determines whether or not the current game is the final game of ART bonus, and in the case of the final game, performs announcement effect of the lottery result based on the suggestion selection and ends the ART bonus game. If it is not the final game, the effect control board proceeds to the processing of the next game, and repeats the processing of the second lottery described above without performing the first lottery.

  In the above suggested effect, the seventh and subsequent suggested effects are not displayed because the maximum additional number of bullets in the magazine of the rotary type gun is 6, but at the stage when the first lottery is won in the suggested effects after the seventh The area in the middle of the area (the area indicated by “7” in FIG. 80) lights up in an emphasized color (red, rainbow, etc.) to suggest the player the winning in the first lottery (determination of transition to ART game). You may do it. In addition, when the bullets are added to the maximum amount in the magazine and the first lottery is won, the central region of the magazine may be lit similarly.

  In the final game of the ART bonus game, the effect control board effects notification of the above-described lottery result. The effect control board sequentially scans the lottery result storage area for each ART bonus game, and executes the notification effect when the suggestion effect execution information is set in the third flag. For example, in the display on the liquid crystal display device, the notification effect is an animation of whether the character points the rotary type gun at the obstacle (wall) and sequentially fires the bullets loaded in the magazine to destroy the wall. Done by the image. At this time, the effect control board checks the first flag and the second flag, and when the winning flag relating to the first lottery is set, the moving image in which the wall is destroyed by the bullet, and the ART game Display the finalization information of migration of. On the other hand, when the winning flag is not set, a moving image in which the wall is not destroyed by the bullet is displayed.

  The effect control board asks the player to operate the effect button each time the display for firing a bullet in the notification effect is executed. Whenever the player operates the effect button in response to the request from the effect control board, the notification effect is executed each time. As a result of the effect control board checking the first flag and the second flag, when the winning flag relating to the second lottery is set, information on the number of games to be added is displayed in addition to the destruction video of the wall. When the winning information of the second lottery is not set in the second flag, the to-be-destructed moving image of the wall is displayed. When the production control board checks the sixth suggestion production execution information, if there is the seventh and subsequent suggestion production execution information, it is checked at the same time, and the first flag of the second flag in the sixth and subsequent suggestion production execution information The notification effect is executed based on the lottery result information of and the second lottery result information.

  According to this notification effect, the player recognizes that the first lottery is won and the transition to the ART game is realized by the destruction of the first wall, and the second lottery is won by the destruction of the wall thereafter. It is possible to recognize the number of games added to the ART game provided by the player. Also, as described above, during the ART bonus game period, although the suggested effect relating to the first lottery result or the second lottery result is performed, the lottery result is basically kept secret until the above notification effect is executed. Be done. The effect of turning on the central area of the magazine ("7" in FIG. 80) to indicate that the transition to the ART game is confirmed is an exceptional effect. Then, during the ART bonus game period until the notification effect is executed, the first lottery result is kept secret, and the second lottery is performed when the first lottery is won. If so, the player can not know that the second lottery is being performed in the first place during the ART bonus game period. That is, during the ART bonus game period, the first lottery is controlled in principle so that the player does not know the lottery result, and the second lottery is further said so that the player does not know the lottery result. For example, it is controlled to "progress secretly" so that it does not know whether the lottery is being performed. In addition, according to the above-mentioned suggestion effect, the second lottery result may also be an object of suggestion, but the suggestion effect suggests the lottery result without distinguishing the type of the lottery (the first lottery or the second lottery) Because it is a thing, it does not deny that the second lottery is controlled to "progress secretly".

  According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the player is not notified of the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery until the ART bonus game is about to elapse (until the termination of the ART bonus game). Therefore, the player can continuously maintain the expectation for the advantageous game (ART game) during the bonus game. Then, when the advantageous game is won by the first drawing, in the remaining ART bonus games, the drawing of the additional benefit (the number of additional games) to the advantageous game by the second drawing is performed, and the drawing result is notified Therefore, the player can continue to have the expectation that even if the ART game is won, the benefit obtained is not the end, and that acquisition of additional benefits can be further expected until the end of the ART bonus game. Then, by the suggested effect, it is possible to continue to have a sense of relief that the lottery regarding the benefit is continuously performed during the ART bonus game period. That is, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is no period in which the winning combination of lottery is useless with respect to the addition bonus during the ART bonus game, and the player's sense of expectation for the addition bonus Can be sustained.

  In the above description, the first lottery and the second lottery are performed when the winning combination is the specific combination during the ART bonus game, but it is also possible to perform each game lottery. At this time, the probability of winning in the first lottery and the second lottery may be increased according to the rareness of the specific combination. In addition, if the second lottery is controlled to “progress in secrecy”, the first lottery and the second lottery are simultaneously performed, or the second lottery is performed in the game won in the first lottery. May be performed. Also, instead of performing the first lottery and the second lottery during the ART bonus game period, the first lottery and the second lottery may be performed during the special period of the normal gaming state. For example, using the control table, the winning probability of the ART game is set to a high probability during a certain number of games as a special period (the expectation for the addition of the number of games to the ART game may be set to a high probability) , And a first lottery and a second lottery are performed.

  Next, the above-mentioned specific combination that is at least one lottery trigger of the first lottery and the second lottery will be described. Since the symbol combination of the specific combination is not particularly limited, the symbol combination of one line is set as the specific combination according to the line in which the symbol combination is displayed while the symbol combination of the same symbol is the other combination It is possible not to set the symbol combination as a specific combination (set as a non-specific combination). For example, FIG. 81 is a view showing an example of a symbol combination (corresponding to a non-specified part) by a bell symbol, and shows a symbol combination of a bell symbol displayed in a downward slanting line from the left reel to the right reel. is there. The winning combination corresponding to the condition device capable of displaying the symbol combination shown in FIG. 81 can be a non-specific combination that is not a specific combination. FIG. 82 is a view showing an example of a symbol combination (corresponding to a specific combination) by a bell symbol. As shown in FIG. 82, a symbol combination having a V-shaped bell symbol over the left reel, middle reel and right reel The winning combination corresponding to the condition device capable of displaying can be taken as the specific combination.

  Here, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a general benefit (for example, the payout of a game medal or the provision of a re-playing state) provided in accordance with the symbol combination stopped on the reel window based on the winning combination selected. In addition to the above, it is assumed that the player has a gaming state in which a “specific benefit” can be provided, whether or not the specific benefit is provided, and the degree of the benefit provided is based on the winning combination drawn. It can be decided. The “specific benefit” is not particularly limited as long as it is a benefit different from the above-mentioned general benefit, but, for example, transition to an advantageous gaming state such as ART game or special game, ART game The number of games may be increased.

  When explaining the grant of "specific benefit" using the above specific role and non-specific role, the specific role is regarded as a high expectation role with high expectation for specific benefit grant, and the non-specific role is an expectation for specific benefit grant. It can be a low expectation role whose degree is lower than the high expectation role. At this time, when the specific combination is established and the V-shaped symbol combination of the bell is displayed, it is more advantageous than the case where the non-specific combination is established and the downward and downward symbol combination of the bell is displayed. The expectation for being given is high.

  However, even if the symbol combination using the same bell symbol is set separately for the specific part and the non-specific part according to the displayed line, the player can not change the V character for the bell symbol combination when all reels are stopped. It is easy to know whether it will be displayed in the form of a letter or in a diagonal line going down to the right, and in the latter case it can be recognized that a non-specified part that is a low expectation part has been established. There is a problem of losing the degree of expectation. Therefore, the right reel is provided with a symbol array common to both the V-shaped line and the downward-sloping diagonal line and capable of displaying both. Here, FIG. 83 is a view showing an example of a symbol combination including a common symbol arrangement. As shown in FIG. 46, the third reel (right reel) has the symbol arrangement (common symbol arrangement) of “BELL REPLAY BELL” at the array number 16-18, and as shown in FIG. 83, the right At the time when these symbol arrangements are displayed on the upper, middle, and lower levels of the reel, the bell symbol may stop at the lower level of the right reel, but a condition device for displaying the bell symbol in a V shape may be established. Also, it is difficult for the player to recognize from the stop mode of the reel whether the condition device of any symbol combination (lower right line or V-shaped line) by the bell symbol is established. That is, at this stage, the player is asked whether the bell symbol combination of the V character line serving as the lottery trigger of the first lottery or the second lottery is established or the bell symbol of the right downward line not becoming the lottery trigger. Since it is not possible to judge whether the combination is established or not, it is not possible to detect which of the high expectation role or the low expectation role is the winning combination, and the first lottery or the second lottery It does not reduce the expectation for the lottery results. When all the reels stop, the effect control board sequentially turns on the reel back surface of each symbol of the symbol combination from the left reel to the right reel based on the satisfied condition device. In the V-shaped line condition device of bell pattern, the upper bell (first (left) reel, middle bell (second (middle) reel), upper bell (third (right) reel) lights in order, and the bell In the condition device of the lower right line of the symbol, the upper bell (first (left) reel), middle bell (second (middle) reel) and lower bell (third (right) reel) light up in order. Therefore, the player must know whether the symbol combination of the V-shaped line of the bell is established or the symbol combination of the down-line of the bell is established after the right reel is stopped in the common symbol arrangement. Can. In other words, even if the right reel is established by the common symbol arrangement, the sense of expectation for the lottery can be maintained. The effect control board performs the first lottery, the second lottery, and the suggested effect process described above based on the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination of the V-shaped line of the bell symbol.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, since the common symbol arrangement is adjacent to the combination of “positive” and “righteousness” (SEQ ID NO: 19-20) which is easily noticeable, the player is “positive” and “righteous”. If the right reel is stopped with the symbol as a guide, it is possible to see the common symbol arrangement. On the other hand, when the common symbol arrangement is stopped at the reel window, it is not immediately known whether the symbol combination of the V-shaped line of the bell is established or the symbol combination of the downward right line of the bell is established. A player who wants to avoid this should just look around the common symbol arrangement with reference to the symbols of "positive" and "righteousness". Also, even if the common symbol arrangement is displayed despite the fact that the common symbol arrangement has been avoided despite watching, the symbol combination of the bell's V-shaped line is established or the symbol of the right downward line of the bell The player who does not intend to see whether the combination has been established may immediately start the processing for the next game (the operation of the bet and the start lever) and cancel the lighting processing described above. As described above, in the lighting process, since one reel is lit sequentially from the left reel, even if the lighting process is started, if the lighting process is canceled before the lighting process for all the reels is performed The player does not recognize the formation line of the bell symbol combination. In addition, even if the lighting process is canceled from the beginning or in the middle, the effect control board executes the above described suggestion effect process.

  That is, if the stop operation not to stop the common symbol array in the reel window is "predetermined operation", such a predetermined operation is performed, for example, at the timing when the player can not retract the common symbol array on the right reel. This corresponds to the operation of pressing the stop button. In addition, for depression of the stop button at the timing when the common symbol array can not be withdrawn, the player intentionally uses the "positive" and "righteousness" symbols as a guide, etc. Not only is the event that the timing when the player arbitrarily presses the stop button is the timing when the timing when the player can not withdraw the common symbol arrangement on the right reel accidentally is included.

  Then, when the above specified combination (V-shaped bell) or non-specified combination (down right bell) is a winning combination, “predetermined operation” is performed, and stop control of the reel based on the operation is performed. The symbol combination is displayed on the reel window in such a manner that the player can recognize from the symbol combination whether the winning combination is the specific combination or the non-specific combination. Specifically, when the winning combination is a specific combination, the symbol combination of V-shaped by bell is not displayed, but the combination of winning combination is a non-specific combination, without being displayed. In this case, the V-shaped symbol combination by the bell is not displayed, and the symbol combination falling to the right by the bell is displayed.

  On the other hand, if a stop operation for stopping the common symbol arrangement on the reel window is "an operation different from a predetermined operation (hereinafter referred to as" a specific operation "), such a specific operation is, for example, This corresponds to an operation in which the player presses the stop button at a timing at which the common symbol arrangement can be drawn into the right reel. The timing at which the common symbol arrangement can be drawn can be easily targeted by the player by using the "positive" and "right" symbols as a guide as described above.

  Then, when the above specified combination (V-shaped bell) or non-specified combination (down right bell) is a winning combination, the “specific operation” is performed, and stop control of the reel based on the operation is performed. The symbol combination is displayed on the reel window in such a manner that the player can not recognize from the symbol combination whether the winning combination is the specific combination or the non-specific combination. Specifically, in the case where the winning combination is either a specific combination or a non-specific combination, the bells are lined downward from the left reel to the middle reel and the common symbol combination is stopped on the right reel. A combination of letter-shaped symbols (corresponding to a specific combination) and a symbol combination falling to the right (corresponding to a non-specific combination) are simultaneously displayed.

  In addition, the definition of said "predetermined operation" or "specific operation" is not limited only to the timing which presses a stop button, For example, the definition by the press order of a stop button may be added. Specifically, if the "predetermined operation" described above includes a stop operation in a predetermined push order (for example, a forward press to stop the left reel first), the above-mentioned specific combination Or, when the non-specific combination is a winning combination, whether the specific combination or the non-specific combination was the winning combination if the player pressed the stop button at a timing where the common symbol arrangement can not be drawn to the right reel by sequential pressing. The symbol combination may be displayed on the reel window in such a manner that the player can recognize the symbol combination. On the other hand, if it is assumed that the above “specific operation” includes the stop operation by the pushing order other than the predetermined pushing order (the reverse pushing or the middle pushing not stopping the left reel first), the above specific part Alternatively, when the non-specific combination is a winning combination, if the player presses the stop button at the timing when the common symbol array can be drawn to the right reel by reverse pressing or middle pressing, the winning combination may be a specific combination or a non-specific combination. The symbol combination can be displayed on the reel window in such a manner that the player can not recognize from the symbol combination whether there is any.

  According to such a gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the specified part or the non-specified part is a winning part, the player can be notified at an intermediate stage of the game when the aforementioned “specific operation” is performed. The winning combination has never been detected. Specifically, a V-shaped symbol combination by bell (corresponding to a specific combination) and a symbol combination downward to right by bell (corresponding to a non-specific combination) are simultaneously displayed on the reel window by stopping the common symbol arrangement As described above (refer to FIG. 83), since each reel is stopped, the player can not detect whether the winning combination is the specific combination (high expectation combination) or the non-specific combination (low expectation combination) from the stopped symbol combination. . Conversely, when the specified part or the non-specified part is the winning part, if the above-described "predetermined operation" is performed, the V-shaped symbol combination by the bell (see FIG. 82) or the right by the bell By stopping the reel so that any of the lower symbol combinations (see FIG. 81) is displayed on the reel window, the winning combination is either a specific combination (high expectation combination) or a non-specific combination (low expectation combination). The player can detect from the stopped symbol combination whether there is any.

  Therefore, according to the gaming machine of this embodiment, whether or not the winning combination wants to immediately sense whether the winning combination is the high expectation combination or the low expectation combination according to the operation of either “predetermined operation” or “specific operation”. The game result can be displayed in a mode that meets the player's wishes. Then, if the “specific operation” is performed, the player can not detect from the stopped symbol combination even if the low expectation winning combination has been established, so the gaming machine of this embodiment is: It is possible to overcome the conventional problem that the player's sense of expectation and interest decline when the formation of the winning combination with low expectation is perceived by the player in the middle of the game, and the interest in the game is sustained. It is possible to

  Next, the special winning combination of the ART bonus will be described. Although not illustrated in FIG. 49, as a special winning combination of ART bonus, a predetermined condition device capable of displaying (in the middle) a symbol combination of a single line of a specific symbol (7 symbols) at the pressing order correct answer is preferentially established. When the pressing order is incorrect, the first combination of the condition device that displays the predetermined pressing order incorrect symbol combination is given priority, and when the pressing order is correct the double line symbol combination of the specific symbol (7 symbols) A predetermined condition device that can be displayed is established with priority, and a second combination in which a condition device that displays a predetermined symbol combination for incorrect pressing order is prioritized and established when the pressing order is incorrect is the ROM of the main board. Are defined in the control table in

  When a special lottery wins either the first part or the second part, the effect control board instructs the symbol combination of the specific symbols and the pushing order of the reel, for example, "Aim for (red) 7" By displaying on the liquid crystal display device the letter “and the left-pointing arrow” reminding the pressing order to stop the right reel first, the winning ART bonus (7 sets of red) and its stop procedure (right press, Teach the player the reverse push). When the player stops the reels according to the pushing order instructed, the condition device capable of displaying the symbol combination of 7 symbols is prioritized to operate, and when the player operates the stop button of each reel at a proper timing, The main board stops each reel so that the symbol combination of 7 symbols is displayed on the middle line. Furthermore, the main board freezes the processing for the start of the next game by not accepting bets for a certain period, while the effect control board notifies the attribute information of ART bonus (notice effect of ART bonus (notice effect of ART bonus) To do). Here, the attribute information of the ART bonus is attribute information of the advantageous state, for example, the type of the elected advantageous state (ART bonus), the number of continuing games of the advantageous state (ART bonus), or Other information on the feature is included. More specifically, in the type of ART bonus, whether it is an ART bonus of 7 sets of red or 7 sets of white, or 1 set line of 7 symbols (single line) or 2 sets (double line) , Etc. are included. In addition, the main board can execute the freeze effect of the reel in accordance with the execution of the notification effect by the effect substrate.

  The effect control board determines the number of ART bonus continuation games according to the special winning combination. If the special winning combination is the second combination, the number of ART bonus continuation games is larger than the number of consecutive games when the special winning combination is the first combination, for example, in the case of seven single lines. The number of continuous ART bonus games may be 50, and in the case of 7 double lines, the number of continuous ART bonus games may be doubled to 100, or the like. It should be noted that although it is correct in pressing order, it may happen that the symbol combination of 7 symbols is not displayed if the stop button of the reel is not operated at appropriate timing, but even in such a case, the main substrate However, in the above-described freeze effect performed after all reels have stopped, the player is re-turned and the player is stopped by re-stopping the reels at the position indicating the winning 7 sets (single line or double line). It is possible to teach the attribute information of the ART bonus won.

  On the other hand, when the reels are stopped without following the pushing order, for example, the stop button for the left reel is operated first even though the pushing order for stopping the right reel is the correct pushing order. In this case, the condition device in which the push combination incorrect symbol combination is displayed is prioritized, and the main board stops each reel without displaying the symbol combination of 7 symbols. After stopping all reels, the main board starts the ART bonus from the next game, but does not perform the above-described freeze process which is performed when the reels are stopped in the correct order of pressing, so that the effect control board is also The announcement effect of the ART bonus start effect and the ART bonus continuation game number is not performed. That is, when the stop button for the left reel is operated, it does not follow the pressing order of the suggested correct answer and does not require the notification effect of ART bonus (art bonus start effect, notification of ART bonus attribute information) The main board does not perform freeze processing as it is a manifestation of the player's clear intention of. As a result, the player can start the ART bonus from the next game immediately, instead of being notified of the ART bonus attribute information. When the middle reel is stopped first, although the pressing order is incorrect, the stop button of the middle reel is adjacent to the stop button of the right reel, so the main board is notified of the ART bonus as a pressing error. You may make it produce.

  As described above, after the ART bonus special winning combination is established, the effect control board determines the winning ART bonus (for example, all seven reds) and its stop procedure (for example, right press to stop the right reel first). Teach the player, but this is to teach the player the recommended proper operation to start the ART bonus. When the player performs the stop operation of the reel in accordance with the appropriate operation, as described above, the main board and the effect control board perform notice effect of ART bonus. At this time, if the notice effect of the ART bonus is accompanied by freeze processing, these operations can not be accepted while the operation lever, bet, stop button, etc. are operated while the freeze processing is being executed, and the next game There is no start. In other words, when the reel stop operation is performed according to the appropriate operation, the freeze process is performed along with the notice effect of the ART bonus, and the start of the next game is invalidated even if the game start operation is performed. An “ineffective period” is created. By performing the notice effect of such ART bonus, the player can not only recognize the acquisition of the ART bonus surely, but also the attribute information (for example, the type of ART bonus and the number of continuing games) regarding the ART bonus. Since it is possible to know, it is possible to obtain a strong degree of satisfaction with the acquisition of the advantageous gaming state of ART bonus.

  On the other hand, when the effect control board performs display for teaching appropriate operation, an effect for teaching pushing order different from the appropriate operation (for example, forward pressing for stopping the left reel first) is given as an alternative operation. It can also be displayed at the same time. Specifically, for example, in the area different from the area where the “left-pointing arrow” is displayed by the proper operation, the “right-pointing arrow” reminiscent of the forward pressing while clearly indicating that the procedure is the alternative operation Display on the device. When the player does not follow the display of the proper operation and stops the left reel first according to the display of the alternative operation, such an operation is performed by the aforementioned "player who does not require the notification effect of ART bonus". It corresponds to the operation. That is, when the player performs the stop operation according to the alternative operation, the "art bonus notification effect" executed when the player performs the appropriate operation is not performed, so the player is notified of the ART bonus effect. You can cancel the period in which you are playing and immediately proceed to the next game. In other words, when the stop operation of the reel is performed according to the alternative operation, the notification effect of the ART bonus is canceled, whereby the degree of advantage of the ART bonus (specifically, it corresponds to the aforementioned attribute information) While the disclosure to the player of may be concealed, the advantage is provided that the creation of the "ineffective period" by the execution of the freeze process is suppressed. In addition, the display of the substitute operation is displayed smaller than the display of the proper operation so as to be distinguished from the display of the proper operation, or the display of the substitute operation is displayed with a color with lower expectation than the display of the proper operation. It is desirable for the player to understand at first glance that it should be recommended over alternative operations.

  As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is known in advance from the player that notification effects of ART bonus and freeze processing can be performed in the game by teaching proper operation and alternative operation. It is possible. Then, when an alternative operation is performed in a game in which an ART bonus notification effect can be performed, the start itself of the notification effect is canceled, and in the case where freeze processing such as a reel or a button is performed according to the notification effect The execution of the freeze process can also be avoided. In other words, such a gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a feature different from that of a gaming machine capable of canceling a freeze process started suddenly, and the notice effect of an ART bonus that can be predicted to execute and the freeze process On the other hand, it is possible to select whether or not to execute these notification effects or freeze processing depending on whether the appropriate operation or the alternative operation is performed, that is, teaching of the degree of advantage of the ART bonus. It is possible for the player to select the content of the benefit, which one of the benefit to receive and the benefit to suppress the creation of the “ineffective period” is selected. According to such a gaming machine, for example, when the player wants to enjoy an effect related to the transition of the advantageous gaming state (that is, notification effect or freeze effect of ART bonus), the appropriate operation is performed by performing the appropriate operation. While being able to provide the player with a good sense of entertainment to the player, the player is in a gaming situation that the time available for playing is short, and a psychological situation in which he wishes to promptly advance to the next and subsequent games In this case, by selecting the alternative operation, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance that can be felt by the notification effect being performed for a long time.

  Next, the case where the ART bonus winning combination is drawn during the ART game (chance RT1-chance RT3 state) will be described. The effect control board starts the special game state in the ART game based on the ART bonus winning combination. This special game state enables the addition of the number of continuing games of the ART game currently being executed, and the effect control board continues the special game state for a predetermined number of games, depending on the winning combination. Determine the number of games to be added. The special gaming state includes a plurality of gaming periods, for example, a relatively long first game period (for example, about 10 games) and a short number of games (for example, one game) following the end of the first game period. Be done. The effect control board executes a process capable of providing different additional benefits in the first game period and the second game period. For example, in the first game period (special game period), a process capable of adding the number of added games in the ART game is performed, and in the second game period (special game period), the number of added games in the first game period is Perform a process that can reinforce the aggregate (eg, a process that doubles).

  In the first game period, when the winning combination is a specific combination (for example, other than the normal replay), the effect control board determines the number of additional games by distribution lottery. During ART, since the probability of winning the bell combination (AT1-AT10) other than the replay role is high, the first game period gives the player an opportunity to intensively and acceleratedly acquire the number of additional games in the ART game. Can be given to Then, in the second game period, when the specific combination (for example, other than the normal replay) is won, the number of added games is further accelerated by doubling the number of added games acquired in the first game period. Give the player an opportunity to increase Although the process in the case where the specific combination is not won in the second game period is not particularly limited, for example, the number of additional games acquired in the first game period may be given. Alternatively, the number of additional games acquired in the first game period may be canceled. Moreover, in this example, although the specific combination in the first game period and the second game period is a combination other than the normal replay, it is not necessary to set the same combination in these specific combinations.

  The effect control board can perform processing to increase the number of added games based on the winning combination, but whether or not the number of added games is performed is, for example, for each game in the first game period of the special gaming state, It is displayed to the player by the effect of the victory and defeat in the duel effect. If the addition of the game number is positively determined, the character on the player side attacks the character on the enemy side and displays the number of added games together with the image to be won over this, and the addition of the game number is negatively determined. In the case (for example, the symbol combination of middle replay), the player character is attacked by the enemy character and displays an image to be lost. Such a duel effect may be performed multiple times in the first game period, and in the case of winning multiple times, the number of added games acquired in the first game period is the total number of added games acquired in each duel effect. It becomes. Then, when the first game period is over, for example, the display of "final battle" is performed to inform the player that it is the second game period, and the doubling of the number of added games is positively determined based on the winning combination. In the case where it is determined, an effect video for causing the player character to win in a duel effect is displayed, and the number of added games obtained by doubling the total number of added games acquired in the first game period is displayed.

  Next, the specific combination in the special gaming state will be further described. Although not described in the above-described winning combination table (FIG. 50), a middle bonus (MB) can be added as a winning combination. This middle bonus is the next to the next game after winning the middle bonus, and the main board makes the game status “Middle bonus in progress” until the total number of game medals paid out reaches a prescribed number, for example, 14 It is a winning combination whose content is to be placed.

  For the middle bonus, although not shown in FIGS. 51-53, a conditional device for a specific symbol combination for the middle bonus is defined. As the middle bonus specific symbol combination, a combination of a plurality of symbols which are not the same symbol is preferable. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from immediately recognizing the winning of the middle bonus.

  In the middle middle bonus game, the effect control board displays a specific symbol (JAC) indicating that the current game is a bonus game, and a symbol combination (for example, bell symbol combination) of a specific small combination when the reel is stopped. The condition device that can be displayed is set. This condition device corresponds to the "all small role condition device" or the "MB condition device" described later. In the next game in which the middle bonus is won, if there is a payout (for example, 14) of the specified number of game media or more, the middle bonus bonus game ends in the game, and the payout of game media is the specified number If the number is less than 13 (for example, 13), the next game is still controlled to the middle bonus bonus game because there is one remaining in the specified number. When there are payouts (for example, 14) of game medals in the game, the state of “Middle bonus in progress” is ended in the game.

  In the game in which the middle bonus is won and the gaming state is “in middle bonus”, the main board has drawn the presence or absence of replay (normal replay), and when not replayed, condition devices of all small winning combinations (all Condition device for small combination) (for example, small item 1-small item 26 in Figure 50) is set, when it is elected to replay, condition device for MB where pushing order is specified in addition to the condition device of all small combination Is also established. The condition apparatus for MB is set prior to the condition apparatus of all the small winning combinations as long as the correct order of pressing the reel stop button is given.

  In a game in which the replay is not won during the middle bonus, the conditional device for MB is not established, so that the conditional device (for example, the accessory 17 in FIG. 50) which is irrelevant to the pushing order among the conditional devices of all the small winning combinations. Middle bonus in this game by giving priority to the specified number (for example, 14 cards) of game medals by the display of the specific symbol (for example, bell alignment) corresponding to the condition device after the reel is stopped. Can be terminated.

  On the other hand, in a game in which the replay is won during the middle bonus, the condition apparatus for MB is given priority as long as the pressing order of the reel stop button is correct by guidance (teaching) of pushing order by the effect control board, etc. The next game is also in the middle bonus state by allowing the number of game medals (for example, 13 cards) slightly short of the specified number to be paid out by the display of the specific symbol (for example, the bell alignment) corresponding to the device. Can be continued. On the other hand, when the correct order is not obtained, the condition devices of all the small winning combinations are given priority over the condition device for MB, and the game bonus for the specified number is paid out, whereby the middle bonus ends in the current game.

  In the second game in the middle bonus, the remaining number of payouts for which continuation of the bonus game is permitted is one, and the bonus game ends in the game regardless of whether or not the replay is won. In consideration of this, even if the player wins the replay, the condition device for all the minor roles may be set preferentially. At this time, the player can always obtain 14 cards in the second bonus game of the middle bonus. Also, in this example, it is described that the bell alignment is displayed as a symbol combination by a specific symbol even when either of the condition device for MB or the condition device for all minor combinations is set preferentially. The symbol combination by the specific symbol is not limited to the same one. For example, even if the same bells are aligned, the straight line may be changed, or the straight line type and the V-shaped type may be changed to change the formation mode. You may do so.

  Here, a case where such a middle bonus is specified as a specific combination and the specific combination is established in the special game state will be described in detail. As described above, there are a first game period and a second game period in the special game state, and when the specific combination is won in the first game period, the number of ART game addition games by the distribution lottery If the player is selected in the second game period, the number of additional games (total) acquired in the first game period is doubled and awarded.

  First, consider the case where the middle bonus is won in the first game period. After winning the middle bonus, it shifts to at least one bonus game. And in this example, when the symbol combination by the specific symbol corresponding to the condition device for MB is displayed by the 1st game, it transfers to the bonus game of a maximum of 2 games. Therefore, when the middle bonus is won in the first game period, the middle bonus is selected first, and a sorting lottery for the number of games to be added to the first ART game is carried out. When the condition device for all minor combinations is established and the symbol combination (for example, bell alignment) according to the specific symbol is displayed, the sorting lottery of the number of games to be added to the second or third ART game is performed. In other words, by winning the middle bonus once, the opportunity to acquire the number of added games will be provided at least twice, up to three times in this example, and the player has many times. It can be expected to gain the number of ART games.

  Then, in the state where the gaming state is the chance RT as in this example, since the probability of winning the replay is set to be high, when the middle bonus is won, the replay game is made high in the bonus game during the middle bonus. You can expect. When the player wins the replay with high probability, the condition device for MB is given priority to the first game in the middle bonus, and the bonus game of the second game is decided. As a result, a total of two games are Symbol combinations (bell alignment) by specific symbols are displayed throughout the bonus game. Therefore, when the middle bonus is won in the first game period, the player can expect to increase the number of ART games over the subsequent two games with high probability.

  Next, the case where the middle bonus is won during the first game period and the bonus game extends to the second game period will be described. For example, when the first game period is 10 games, the middle bonus is won in the final game (10th game) of the first game period. At this time, since the tenth game for which the middle bonus is won is the final game of the first game period, a sorting lottery of the number of additional games is performed, and the player can expect to obtain the number of additional games. Furthermore, the next game is transferred to the bonus game, but the 11th game is the second game period, so that the symbol combination by the specific symbols is displayed in the bonus game, and the additional game earned in the first game period is obtained. The doubling of the number of games (total) is finalized. That is, when the player wins the middle bonus at the 10th game, not only can he expect to obtain the number of additional games, but also expects the success of doubling the number of additional games before playing the eleventh game. it can.

  In addition, even when the middle bonus is won one game before the final game of the first game period (that is, the ninth game), the bonus game by the middle bonus may extend over two games, so the eleventh game It may be expected to be successful in doubling the number of added games by the symbol combination display by the specific symbol of. Specifically, as described above, in the gaming state in which the replay probability is increased, there is a high possibility that the condition device for MB is preferentially set in the first game (10th game) of the bonus game, In that case, the bonus game can be sufficiently expected to continue up to the second game (the eleventh game). At this time, not only is the distribution lottery of the number of added games performed, but also the eleventh game in the ninth game, by the establishment of the middle bonus, and in the tenth game, the "first game in the first game". The "second game second bonus game" succeeds in doubling the number of additional games. Therefore, even when the middle bonus is won one game before the final game of the first game period, the player can expect not only to obtain the number of additional games but also a game not yet played (11th game) The success of doubling the number of added games can be expected.

  In the special game state described above, it has been described that the effect control board displays the specific symbol (JAC) in the middle bonus game (JAC game), but in addition to this, during the JAC game Since it is determined that the specific symbols are aligned, predetermined presentation or suggestion display indicating a high degree of expectation may be performed regarding the provision of special benefits in the first or second game period. Such an effect or indication is equivalent to a pre-reading effect relating to the provision of a special benefit. By performing such pre-reading effect, it is possible to have the player have expectations for the lottery result of the next game and the provision of special benefits from the stage before the lottery of the next game is performed, It can be enhanced.

  According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment described above, when the middle bonus is won in the special game state, the winning combination selected in the bonus game is limited, and the specific symbol is selected based on the winning of the lottery combination. Since it is determined that the symbol combination according to is displayed, it is greatly effective in obtaining special benefits (for example, addition of the number of ART games in the first game period, doubling of the number of additional games in the second game period). You can expect. In a conventional gaming machine, generally, since it is not possible to know the lottery result before the lottery, it is feared that the player has a sense of frustration and the interest is reduced, considering the case where the winning combination can not be won. According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, although the middle bonus is won as described above, it is possible to be certain that the awarding of benefits will be made and expect a great deal with the subsequent games. As a result, the gaming machine of the present embodiment can provide a game while maintaining the interest of the player.

  In the special game state described above, a special game period (first game period) to which a benefit (for example, the addition of the number of ART games) different from the acquisition of game medals can be awarded and a benefit for the special game period It can be said that a special game period (second game period) to which an increase bonus (for example, doubling the number of ART games) can be given is included. In the special game period, the award is determined when the specific winning combination (for example, bell) is selected while being controlled during the special game period, and when the award is performed a plurality of times, the bonus It is treated as an added benefit (total number of ART games acquired). In addition, the increase bonus in the special game period is determined to be awarded when a specific winning combination (for example, middle bonus or bell) is selected while being controlled in the special game period, and this increase bonus is a bonus in the special game period It is a more advantageous benefit. And, if the middle bonus is won, it is possible to suggest whether or not the specific winning combination is to be selected in the next and subsequent games before being controlled during the special game period, thus realizing prefetching. . Further, according to the gaming machine in the present embodiment, in the situation where it is pre-read that the specific winning combination is selected by the winning of the middle bonus, the additional number of ART game numbers accumulated in the first game period is the second. The additional benefit can be acceleratedly increased by the increased benefit, such as being doubled in the game period.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media (game medals) are consumed (betted), and a game is played with the progress of the game involving the rotation and stop of the reel, and the reel is stopped. Depending on the mode, the awarding of the bonus accompanied by the payout of the game medals is performed. Furthermore, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to such a normal game, it is executed without consuming game media, and according to the game result, a benefit not accompanied by the payout of the game medal, ie, normal game It is possible to execute a game that can provide a different benefit from the benefit. Although the said game does not require consumption of a game medal, although a specific symbol combination is displayed on a reel, although it differs from a normal game in the point which does not accompany payment of a game medal, a reel stops after the rotation start of a reel The game is different from the freeze effect described above in that it is a game in which the button is activated, so that it is difficult for the player to distinguish the game from the normal game. Is called a "simulation game (special game)". On the other hand, since normal gaming consumes gaming media and pays out gaming media, and has the opposite property to simulated gaming, it is referred to as "this game" in comparison with simulated gaming. I assume. The simulated game is executed according to predetermined control by the main substrate 409 when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Below, the process of such a pseudo game is demonstrated. The processing described below proceeds along the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main substrate 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 or the like).

  FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the processing procedure of one game of the main game in the slot machine 1. The initial settings before the game start and the BET processing are the same as the processing described in FIG. 54 and the like. After completion of the BET processing, when the start lever 210 is operated (step S1101), the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c are rotated, and random numbers are extracted based on the operation of the start lever 210 (step S1102).

  At step S1102, the CPU 1110 of the main board 409 draws the condition device for the main game. More specifically, the CPU 1110 performs extraction of random number values, and based on the extracted random number values, determines a winning combination which corresponds to any winning combination, and in the case of any winning combination, the corresponding winning The condition device corresponding to the role is turned on (= 1). In addition, the winning probability of each winning combination in the hit determination can be calculated from the number of distributed random number values as shown in FIG.

  Next, in step S1103, the CPU 1110 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform processing relating to a simulated game (special game) (a simulated game drawing). The trigger for activating the pseudo game is not particularly limited. In the lottery result in the main game of step S1102, the pseudo game may be activated when a specific condition device (for example, a rare small winning combination) is established, or the specific condition device is established to perform a pseudo game lottery, When this is won, the simulated game may be started. As a rare small role, for example, there is a small role in which a cherry pattern is displayed in the middle of the left reel. In the lottery table for the simulated game, the winning of the simulated game is determined at a predetermined rate. In addition, a lottery for simulated game may be performed each time the main game. In step S1104, it is confirmed whether or not the simulated game lottery has been won, and if it has been won, the simulated game processing of step S1105 and subsequent steps is performed. If the simulated game lottery is not won, the main game process is performed without shifting to the simulated game (step S1113).

  In step S1105, the CPU 1110 carries out a selection lottery of a winning combination (simulation combination) of a simulated game (simulation combination lottery). The simulated role corresponds to the winning combination drawn in the main game, and the same symbol combination as the symbol combination based on the winning combination of the main game may be displayed or the symbol combination based on the winning combination of the main game You may display a different symbol combination. Similar to the lottery of the condition device for the main game in step S1102, the distribution lottery of the simulated role is performed using the random number table, the lottery table, the determination table, and the like.

  Therefore, the various tables used in the lottery for the simulated role may be a unique table for the simulated game, or may use or partially use the table for the game. When using a unique table for a simulated game, since it is possible to perform a distributed lottery of simulated roles with a winning probability different from the winning game lottery in the main game, the winning probability is a low-frequency winning combination : A player who can display the same symbol combination as the symbol combination based on the role of the rare character) can be made to be elected in the pseudo game with high probability (with high frequency) as the pseudo role. Therefore, the player can be given a special feeling of satisfaction by suddenly putting out the rare roles (usually, the player is not aware that it has shifted to the simulated game). Also, by adding to the distribution table a dummy combination displaying symbol combinations that can not be displayed in the lottery for the main game, the player can further feel a sense of superiority by displaying symbol combinations of the super rare combination. Can.

  FIG. 85 shows an example of a lottery table (sorting table for simulated roles) used in the simulated role lottery, and winning of control information for controlling the simulated roles (flag for simulated gaming: corresponding to the condition device in the main game). The probability is registered. For example, it is shown that "weak cherry" is drawn as a simulated role with 84 random numbers out of a total of 256 random numbers, and "strong cherry" is selected as a simulated role with 14 random numbers. . In addition, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, “middle cherry” and the like shown in FIG. 85 correspond to the small part or the condition device described as “cherry” in FIGS. It is a role, for example, the symbol combination by each role is different, and the degree of expectation for the special benefit that can be given is also different. The other simulated roles (watermelon, chance eyes) shown in FIG. 85 are also rare roles with a low probability of winning in this game. In the lottery table shown in FIG. 85, although there are “disappearances” with a probability of 25% (64/256), the remaining 75% will win the rare role, so the rare role will draw at a very high rate compared to this game It is understood that In FIG. 85, the simulated game (special game) effect indicates an aspect of the effect performed by the effect control board when the simulated role is won.

  Next, in step S1106, the CPU 1110 sets information based on the result of the simulated part lottery in step S1105 as a predetermined flag (simulated role information set). That is, the CPU 1110 sets a pseudo game flag corresponding to the winning dummy role to ON. The pseudo game flag is control information similar to the condition device to be randomly selected for the main game, and information indicating the state of the flag is stored, for example, in the RAM 1114. In addition, in step S1106, information etc. according to the lottery result of the simulated part lottery may be held, and it is not limited to the flag.

  In step S1107, the CPU 1110 executes a continuation lottery of the pseudo game. The continuation of the pseudo game is managed by a predetermined loop rate by the pseudo game continuation lottery. Therefore, the slot machine 1 can continuously execute a plurality of pseudo games while one real game is performed. When the simulated game is continuously performed, the symbol combination in each simulated game is determined by the distribution rate. For example, the distribution ratio of the distribution table is set so that “strong cherry” is easily drawn in each simulated game so that a symbol combination indicating “strong cherry” is displayed over a plurality of simulated games. The distribution ratio may be set such that symbol combinations indicating “weak cherry”, “strong cherry”, and “middle cherry” are elected without bias in the simulated game of each time. Furthermore, in a plurality of successive simulated games, it is possible to select a lottery table in which the simulated combination and the distribution rate thereof are respectively different.

  In step S1108, the CPU 1110 performs a lottery as to whether or not the simulated game is to be executed in the main game currently being executed (a simulated game execution lottery). If the result of the lottery in step S1108 is confirmed (step S1109) and the simulated game is not executed, the process proceeds to step S1113 to be described later without performing the simulated game in the main game currently being executed. Continue playing the game. If it is determined that the simulated game is to be executed as a result of the simulated game execution lottery, then the simulated game is started (step S1110).

  Not performing the dummy game immediately in step S1108 is to delay or hold the execution of the dummy game, that is, stop control of the reels so that the symbol combination based on the dummy combination set in S1106 is displayed. This process is not performed in the processing of the main game being performed, and corresponds to executing stop control of the reel after a predetermined number of games have elapsed. The number of delayed or reserved games may be determined by lottery or may be a predetermined value. Therefore, the main board stores the information flag corresponding to the simulated combination won in the dummy combination lottery in step S1105 in the RAM area for a predetermined number of games, and when the predetermined number of games has elapsed, the reels based on the stored information flag Force stop control of The predetermined number of games is managed by the number-of-games counter in the RAM. The main board decrements the number-of-games counter each time the game advances one-by-one, and forces the simulated game to be activated based on the information flag stored in the RAM in the game in which the counter value has become zero. For example, the pseudo game lottery in step S1103 is unconditionally won, and the pseudo role lottery in step S1105 is not performed. The games counted by the game number counter of the RAM include a mode of counting only the main game, a mode of counting the number of real games and the number of simulated games together, and a mode of counting only the simulated games.

  In this way, in the activation of the simulated game, as a result of being able to control the delay which is not in the main game, the delay period in which the display of the symbol combination based on the simulated role can be called the latent period of the simulated game activation (the predetermined game described above You can make advance notice by using a few minutes ago). For example, prognostic effects (liquid crystal effects) such as "Your strong cherry symbol will be aligned after N games" or "Expect to strong cherry symbols after N game" can be enabled by the effect control board, and in fact, they must be simulated after N games The symbol combination based on the character combination is displayed. Therefore, the slot machine can realize expected period increase means capable of increasing the expectation period of the player from the time when the simulated role lottery of the pseudo game is performed to the time when the symbol combination of the simulated role is displayed. Also, it is possible to use the value of the number-of-games counter to count down the number-of-games effect for displaying a combination of simulated character and symbol combinations. After the N game, when the start lever is operated, the main board executes the stop control of the reel so that the combination of simulated role and symbol is displayed.

  As described above, if the player who can not always distinguish the simulated game from the main game by the delay process of the simulated role, the current game is started when the current game is ended or the start lever is operated. At that time, etc., since it is possible to enjoy a game mode in which it is ensured that a specific symbol combination will be displayed in a future game, it is possible to feel a novelty that has never been seen before. .

  When the pseudo game is started in step S1110, the CPU 1110 processes the pseudo game based on the information set in step S1106 (step S1111), and then ends the pseudo game (S1112). If it is determined in step S1107 that the continuation lottery of the simulated game is won, the process proceeds to S1105 after the completion of the simulated game, and if it is out of the continuation lottery of the simulated game, the process proceeds to S1113 and the present Return to processing. In the simulated game, the player performs the stop operation of the third reel, all the reels are simulated stopped by the operation of the player's respective stop buttons, and the symbol combination is displayed by the simulated stopped reels, based on the simulated role. It ends by having given a predetermined privilege given based on a dummy role and a symbol combination. The details of the processing of the simulated game will be described later based on FIG.

  In step S1113, when the dummy game is over, the main substrate normally rotates all the reels 301 in the pseudo stop state. In the case where the simulated game has not been won (S1104: No), all the reels are normally in a rotating state. Since the reel 301 is in the pseudo stop state when transitioning from step S1112 to step S1113, the player is given an impression of transitioning to a new game, and the main board is before the normal rotation of all reels The operation of the MAX input button 206 and the start lever 210 may be requested. Even when the input button is operated, the game medals are not actually consumed.

  In order to make the main board not to be aware that the main game is a simulated game, the start lever is selected when the lottery for continuing the simulated game is won and the simulated game is over and the game is shifted to the next simulated game. Before the operation of, the operation of the input button may be simulated. However, since the game is a simulated game, game medals are not actually consumed. It is also possible to perform management by a timer and the like so as to automatically start the rotation of the reel 301 after a predetermined time has elapsed, without requiring the pressing of the input button 206 or the operation of the start lever 210. The same applies to the transition from S1112 to S1113.

  In the simulated game, since the bet of the game medium (consumption of the game medals) is not a condition, as in the case of the main game, even if a symbol combination in which payout of the game medals is expected is displayed, Although no payout is made, special effects are provided by the effect control board. For example, the transition lottery to the ART game described above, the transition to the ART game, the transition to the high probability state for the ART lottery, the transition to the chance zone from the mode, and the like.

  After rotation of all the reels 301 starts, reel stop control based on the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c and special effects corresponding to the symbol combinations displayed by the stopped reels 301 as main game processing After processing such as giving is performed (step S1114), one game (also referred to as unit game) of the main game is ended (step S1115), and the process returns to the next game start processing of the main game.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the details of the processing of the simulated game in S1111. By the operation of the start lever (S1101), in step S1201, rotation control of all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c is executed by the main substrate. When the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b, and 211c are pressed (step S1202), an operation to notify that each reel stop button 211a, 211b, and 211c has become effective with the start of rotation of the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c. The valid lamp (not shown) is turned on, and timer counting is started until the next reel rotation process is performed.

  When the reel stop button 211 is enabled in step S1202, the input waiting state (stop operation) for the stop button (211a, 211b or 211c) of the first stop reel is awaited (step S1203). If the player's stop operation on the first stop reel is received within the timer period (YES in step S1203), reel stop control is executed on the reel 301 corresponding to the reel stop button 211 (step S1205). When the player does not perform the stop operation within the timer period (NO in step S1203, step S1204: YES), the reel stop control for the first stop reel 301 is performed without requiring the player to perform the stop operation. To be executed. In the same manner, processing by timer count is performed in steps S1210 and S1215 described later, and when the timer time for stopping the first stopping reel has elapsed, the timer for stopping the second stopping reel, the third Since it is normal for the timer for stopping the stop reel to also elapse, reel stop control is executed. Since the simulated game is performed within one game period of the main game, when the process of the simulated game is delayed due to a player operation failure, the process of the current game is delayed. Therefore, unlike the real game in the simulated game, the timer manages the stop operation of the player.

  In the pseudo game, the reel is rotated by the start lever, and unlike the freeze effect described above, the condition for consumption of game medals is maintained while maintaining the game feeling like the real game in that the reel stop button is activated. To give the player an advantageous game opportunity to play the game without making it different from the real game which gives the bonus by the payout of the game medals, it is necessary to differentiate the reels from the real game in order to differentiate them from the real game. The stop mode is different from that of the main game. In the reel stop process of the present game, when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel is fixedly stopped within a short time. On the other hand, in the simulated game, when the reel stop operation is performed, the reel is put from the normal rotation state to the pseudo stop state. The pseudo stop state is a state in which the player can not see that the reel is in the final stop state, but can see that the reel is substantially in the stop state in comparison with the normal rotation of the reel. A preferred embodiment of the pseudo stop state is a state in which the reel is finely shaken (fine vibration state). If the swing width is large or the frequency of the swing is large and the pseudo-stop state can not be seen, the player can clearly distinguish the pseudo game from the main game, so the pseudo stop state is the reel. Slight or moderate shaking is preferred. The vibration width and the vibration frequency may be appropriately determined from the appearance of the player. In addition, it is preferable that the swing width of the reel does not exceed an angle range equivalent to 1/2 of one symbol. If this is exceeded, the stop position of the symbol becomes ambiguous and the player once stops the symbol and convinces the specific symbol combination, but if the variation of the symbol becomes large, the specific symbol combination will be lost It is preferable to limit the swing range of the reel in order to avoid this.

  In the pseudo stop process of the reel in step S1205, reel stop control is performed such that the symbol combination based on the simulated combination drawn in step S1106 is drawn into the symbol display window 401. The reel 301 is temporarily stopped at the target position of the stop by the same pull-in control (the pull-in can be made up to 4 symbols at the maximum) similar to the reel stop control in the reel stop processing in the real game. Of course, because it is a simulated game, it is possible to draw in symbols beyond the maximum draw-in range allowed in the game, but in this way, the player can clearly distinguish the simulated game from the game There is also a risk of Therefore, in accordance with the gaming state, it may be determined whether to pull in an excessive number of symbols. For example, in the normal gaming state, excessive retraction is not performed. On the other hand, in the ART gaming state, in order to give the player an opportunity to add the number of games, excessive retraction is permitted.

  In step S1206, when the reel stop control is performed in step S1205, it is repeatedly confirmed by the reel position sensor whether or not the reel 301 to be stopped is temporarily stopped. If the temporary stop of the reel 301 to be stopped can be confirmed, the process proceeds to step S1207, and the swing fluctuation (rocking) control (1) is executed on the first stop reel as control for starting the pseudo stop on the reel 301 Be done. Similarly, the swing fluctuation control (2) is executed to the second stop reel, and the swing fluctuation control (3) is executed to the third stop reel. The timing and phase of the fluctuation of the three reels naturally differ according to the stop order of the reels, but it is preferable to carry out a process for synchronizing the fluctuation of the three reels. In a preferred embodiment, the fluctuation range and frequency of the fluctuation of the three reels are the same.

  The reel stop button of the second stop reel is also effective (step S1208), and as in steps S1203 to S1207, when the corresponding reel stop button is operated, the second stop reel 301 is temporarily stopped, and then fluctuation control is performed (2) is executed (steps S1209 to S1212).

  Furthermore, in step S1213, the reel stop button for the third stop reel is also effective, and as in steps S1203 to S1207 and steps S1209 to S1212, when the reel stop button is operated, the third stop reel 301 is temporarily stopped. The fluctuation control (3) is executed (steps S1214 to S1217). The value of the timer in steps S1210 and S1215 is a value continuously measured since the start of the rotation of all the reels 301 in step S1201.

  By step S1217, all the reels 301a, 301b and 301c are put in the pseudo stop state with the fluctuation. Based on the symbol combination displayed in the symbol display window 401 by all the reels 301a, 301b, and 301c that have been pseudo-stopped, the effect control board 510 provides a predetermined benefit associated with the pseudo game. As described above, since the simulated game is not conditioned on the consumption of the game medals, this benefit does not include the payout of the game medals, but the effect control board gives a benefit on effect. Although the specific aspect of the privilege on the effect is as described above, in addition to the continuation of the pseudo game, if the symbol combination of the rare combination in the present game continues a predetermined number, the privilege is given It is also good. In the above description, the continuation of the pseudo game is determined by the continuation lottery at the time of operation of the start lever at the start of the pseudo game, but when the pseudo game is won, the number of continuation sets of the pseudo game is drawn by lottery. You may decide.

  Next, control of the stepping motors (341a to 341c) for pseudo stop processing of the reels will be described. The motor drive circuit control means of the main board 409 selects the reel stop control table according to the operated flag for the simulated game corresponding to the result of the internal lottery in the simulated game, and reels according to the selected table for the reel stop control. Perform pseudo stop processing of The point at which the control table for pseudo stop of the reel differs from the reel stop control table for this game is that the motor drive circuit realizes the fluctuation described above in the reel. The characteristic of fluctuation of reel fluctuation is realized by controlling the fluctuation width and fluctuation frequency of the reel by the motor drive circuit. As for the swing width, as described above, it is preferable that the upper limit be a half of the rotation angle for one symbol, and the lower limit be a range in which the player's eyes are able to observe even a slight swing. The frequency is not particularly limited, but there is a concern that the player may feel anxious feeling that the symbol combination may not be broken if the reel swing frequency is large after the reel is once stopped at a particular symbol combination. On the other hand, if the vibration frequency is smaller than necessary, there is a concern that the reel will appear as if it is stopped, so the optimum range is selected appropriately for the frequency as well as the vibration amplitude. Is preferred.

  As a mode of swing fluctuation of the reel, the stop state of the reel may be included for each cycle of swing or for each of a plurality of predetermined cycles. By including the stop state of the reel, the stop mode of the reel in the simulated game can be brought close to the stop mode of the reel in the game, and the simulated game can be made more similar to the game, and the stop state of the reel is shown to the player This can give the player a sense of relief. The angle at which the reel is stopped during the swing cycle of the reel may be determined as appropriate, but it is desirable to stop the reel at the center of the reel cycle, as shown in FIG. In FIG. 87, 870A represents the stop position of the symbol, 870B is the position of the top dead center of the swing in which the reel is rotated in the reverse direction by the swing width of L1 in the player's gaze, and 870C is the L2 in the player's gaze It is the position of the bottom dead center of the swing in which the reel is rotated in the forward direction by the swing width. Although it is usual that L1 = L2, it is not limited to this. The stop position of the reel is the same as the center position when the symbols of the stop reel constitute a specific symbol combination, that is, the stop position of the reel in this game.

  The stop time at the stop position of the reel is restricted to a predetermined range because the stop of the reel in the pseudo game needs to be in the pseudo stop state. For example, it is regulated to 500 msec within the range in which it can not be seen that the reels are stopped. On the other hand, as described above, since it is necessary to synchronize the fluctuation of the three reels stopped in order, when the stop time of the reels is set as the maximum time of the regulation time, the second and third stopped reels ( When trying to synchronize the reel to be synchronized with the reel stopped first, the total stop time of the reel to be synchronized may exceed the regulation time. The reel synchronization is to make the phase of the fluctuation fluctuation in all reels coincide. In order to synchronize, it is necessary to maintain the stopped state after temporarily stopping the synchronized reel by the reel stop operation. Therefore, it is preferable to make one cycle of the swing fluctuation of the reel including the reel stop state be within the regulation time. Specifically, it is preferable to keep the stopped state of the reel in the swing fluctuation at about half of the regulation time. The reel may be shaken and varied within the range of the difference between the regulation time and the stop time.

  Since the rotational drive of the reel is performed by the stepping motor as described above, the simulated stop state of the reel is controlled by the pulse characteristic supplied from the drive circuit to the motor when the fluctuation of the reel fluctuates. The swing is controlled by the number of pulses supplied to the motor. By supplying one pulse to the motor, it rotates one step. The period of the sway fluctuation is controlled by the frequency of the pulse, and the switching of the swaying direction is controlled by the switching of the excitation sequence of the coils of the motor stator. By maintaining the excitation to the coil, the reel can be stopped with a resting torque. In order to reduce the swing width, the main board may control the motor to swing the reel at an angle of less than one step. In this case, after reducing the duty ratio by reducing the swing frequency or decreasing the pulse width, the pulse may be switched to the pulse on the reverse direction side within one cycle of the swing fluctuation. When stopping the reel is provided in the middle of the swing fluctuation, the motor drive circuit stops the supply of the pulse to the coil of the motor at the timing of the stop of the reel, but the reel does not stop immediately due to the rotational torque of the reel. At the same time, the stop position tends to deviate from the reference stop position. Therefore, the motor drive circuit may execute correction processing of the stop position of the reel based on the detection signal from the reel position sensor. However, the supply of pulse waves to the coil of the stepping motor may be controlled in anticipation of this deviation.

  The swing width and frequency may be changed instead of fixed values with respect to swing fluctuation in the pseudo stop processing of the reel. For example, when the pseudo game is continued, as the pseudo game is repeated, the swing width of the pseudo stop state of the reel is gradually increased (small), and the frequency of the swing fluctuation is gradually increased (small). Good. In order to show the player the change of the fluctuation, it is possible to execute the freeze processing of the reel at the time of the start lever operation in the next simulated game after the reel simulated stop. In addition, the fluctuation of the swing of the reel may be changed in accordance with the bonus expectation of the simulated part. In addition, when a simulated combination with a pressing order of reels is selected in the dummy game lottery, a bonus may be given when the pressing order is correct. The above-described simulated game can be executed regardless of the game state. In the normal gaming state in which the consumption rate of game medals is high, it is possible to give a player benefits while suppressing the consumption of game medals. Also, in the advantageous gaming state, for example, in the gaming state of ART, the probability of establishing a rare combination is higher than the probability of the distribution table in the main game, and it is possible to add the number of continuous ART games each time a rare combination is established. For example, it functions as a benefit improvement means capable of continuously providing additional benefits to the player in the advantageous gaming state. The additional number of continuing games is distributed with reference to the additional table (similar to FIG. 77) based on the simulated role. In the pseudo stop processing of the reel, although the embodiment has been described in which the reel stop position is located at the center of the swing fluctuation, the stop position of the reel is not limited to this, and the reel top dead center or bottom dead center You may set the stop position.

  According to the slot machine described above, one or more symbol combinations based on a predetermined combination displayed by a different lottery (a lottery of a simulated role in a simulated game) different from the lottery in the main game in a plurality of gaming states A game in which the appearance rate of the symbol combination based on the winning combination of the main game is increased during the main game period by enabling the display during the unit game period of the main game Can be realized. In particular, the appearance ratio of the symbol array based on the rare combination in the lottery of the main game can be increased without changing the distribution ratio of the control table used in the winning combination lottery of the main game. Therefore, the player can obtain benefits while suppressing the consumption of the game medals.

  On the other hand, when the ratio of the simulated game to the main game increases, the consumption of the game medals is suppressed for the player, but the business player is affected accordingly. Therefore, the frequency of occurrence of the pseudo game is set to be smaller than the probability of adding the rare combination (see FIG. 49), the above-mentioned wait timer (FIG. 55) is set to a small value, or the timer is cut. If the player does not operate the reel stop button during the continuation of the processing, the reel stop timer may be set to allow the pseudo game to progress earlier. Further, since the number of games played in the main game is reduced by the pseudo game, the number of games in the pseudo game may be counted as the number of games in the process of canceling the number of ART games. Since the number of games of the main game during the game period is reduced by the number of simulated games, it is difficult to obtain the benefits obtained in the main game if the number of games of the main game is the same. In addition, since only the number of games of the main game is notified, the total number of games can not be correct, so the number of games including the main game and the pseudo game may be output from the outer end version, or the pseudo game In order to be able to correctly recognize the ratio of the game and the actual game, the ratio may be notified to the player.

  In addition, if the simulated game is executed based on the lottery result of the main game, conventionally, it is possible to perform the suggested effect on the lottery result of the lottery by the liquid crystal display or the movable combination by the symbol combination of reels by the simulated game There is also an advantage of. For example, assuming that the winning combination of the expected degree or more that appeared in the simulated game is won in the lottery, the reels of the reel can be selected by appropriately selecting the lottery table in the simulated game as the simulated game continues. A game mode in which the degree of expectation of the symbol combination is increased can be realized. For example, when winning the super high expectation degree winning combination (for example: strong cherry) for the bonus in the lottery, a pseudo game is generated, and the symbol combination in the first pseudo game is a middle expectation degree role in the main game. "Bell" is the next pseudo game, "Rimmelon" which is a rare role and high expectation role in the main game, and symbol combination of super high expectation degree is displayed when you return to the main game after leaving the pseudo game Be done. In this game mode, when the simulated game is won, the prescribed number of simulated games may be set.

  In the above-mentioned simulated game, although the main board displays the symbol combination to which the bonus of the payout of the game medal is given in the main game, the bonus of the payout of the game medal is not granted although the symbol combination is displayed. A benefit that is highly advantageous to the user can be provided by the effect control board. Therefore, according to the pseudo game, in the predetermined gaming state, if the specific symbol combination is displayed, the game characteristic of the conventional game that there is a payout of the game medal is paid out even if the specific symbol combination is displayed A new game can be realized in which there may or may not be, and higher benefits may be expected if there is no payout of gaming medals. Also, even if the player has a feeling of surprise when the payout of medals is not made despite the particular symbol combination being displayed, this is resolved by the provision of other benefits. be able to.

  In the embodiment described above, in the pseudo game, the reel is stopped in order to give the player a sense of security when the combination of the high expectation symbol combination of the benefit grant is displayed while the reel is being swung. Is described, but instead of always providing the stop state during the swing period of the reel, it is determined whether the stop state of the reel is necessary or not according to the simulated combination and the symbol combination drawn in the dummy game. It is also good. For example, in the pseudo game, when the first reel is stopped, the symbol constituting the symbol combination having a high degree of expectation for the benefit is stopped in at least one of the upper stage, the middle stage, and the lower stage. The stop condition of the reel is provided in the moving period. As a result, the player can have an expectation that the symbol combination with a high degree of expectation is displayed by stopping the second and third reels. Then, when the high expectation symbol combination is displayed by the combination of the symbol of the first reel and the symbol of the second reel when the second reel is stopped, with the first reel within the swing period of the second reel. Similarly, the stop state may be provided. Subsequently, when the stop symbol of the third reel is combined with the stop symbols of the first and second reels and the symbol combination of high expectation is displayed due to the stop of the third reel, the first reel, the second reel In the process of synchronously swinging the third reel, stop states of all the reels are formed. This allows the player to recognize the determination of the symbol combination with a high degree of expectation. Note that the swing width here does not have to be the fine value described above.

  When the symbol capable of constructing the high expectation symbol combination is not stopped anywhere in the upper, middle or lower due to the stop of the first reel, the first reel swings without including the stopped state in the process of swinging. Move. After that, even after the second and third reels are stopped, the second reel and the third reel are swung without including the stopped state as in the first reel. On the other hand, in the state where the first reel is stopped, the high expectation symbol combination is possible, but when the outcome at the stop of the second reel can not expect the high expectation symbol combination, the second reel At the time of stopping, the first reel is changed from the rocking mode including the stopped state to the rocking mode not including the stopped state. If the high expectation symbol combination was possible when the second reel stopped, but the high expectation symbol combination can not be expected due to the stop of the third reel, when the third reel stopped, the first reel The second reel is changed from the swing mode including the stop state to the swing mode not including the stop state.

[12. Second embodiment]
In the above description (referred to as the first embodiment), it has been described that the slot machine 1 can execute a pseudo game unique to the present invention. As described above, this simulated game is "played without consuming game media, and according to the game result, a game which can be given a bonus different from the bonus without payout of the game medal, that is, the bonus of the normal game. Can play the game, and in the pseudo game "does not require the consumption of game medals, and even when the specific symbol combination is displayed on the reel, the normal game is not accompanied by the payout of the game medals. Although it differs from (the main game), it is different from the freeze effect described above in that it is a game in which the reel stop button is enabled after the reel starts rotating, so it is difficult for the player to distinguish it from the normal game. It has a pseudo-characteristic of being able to

  And, in the first embodiment, the above simulated game is executed in a game mode different from the normal game, thereby indicating to the player that it is a special game and giving a privilege etc. In the following, as a second embodiment of the present invention, a simulated game different from the above-mentioned simulated game (hereinafter referred to as "special simulated game" for distinction) (hereinafter referred to as "special simulated game") The slot machine 1 capable of executing the above will be described. In addition, the special pseudo game in the second embodiment is a display mode of the symbol combination in which the symbol combination displayed by the pseudo game is not in the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (conditional device), and the symbol combination is displayed Even though it is another kind of simulated game different from the above-mentioned special simulated game in that benefits (disbursement of medals, addition of AT game number, status transition etc.) are not given, the pseudo characteristics that it has as a simulated game Since there are many places similar to the special pseudo game, the common part of the processing will be described focusing on the specific part of the special pseudo game, assuming that the description of the special pseudo game is taken over.

  First, the lottery table of the condition device used in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 88 shows an example of a lottery table of the condition device. In the second embodiment, the explanation will be made by using the lottery table shown in FIG. 88 instead of the lottery table shown in FIG.

  In the lottery table shown in FIG. 88, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a list of condition devices to be lottery based on establishment of a predetermined lottery trigger (for example, lever on after BET) is shown, and each condition is Distribution of devices (“value number” column in the figure), the number of medals paid out with the display of symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device (“disbursement” column in the figure), and symbol combinations corresponding to the condition device The "symbol combination" row in the figure, etc. are described. Compared with the lottery table of FIG. 49, the lottery table of FIG. 88 does not have a condition device including replay (ART rep, normal rep, etc.). Also, “pushing bell 1 to 8” in FIG. 88 corresponds to “AT 1 to AT 10” in FIG. 49, and “unknown bell” in FIG. 88 corresponds to “bell 1 and bell 2” in FIG.

  Next, the processing procedure of the game in the second embodiment will be described. The following game processing proceeds in accordance with the processing procedure on the control program executed by the main substrate 409 (mainly the CPU 1110 etc.).

  FIG. 89 is a flow chart showing a basic one game processing procedure in the second embodiment. Referring to FIG. 89, first, in step S8901, an initial setting for preparing for game start is executed. This initial setting is similar to the process of step S1 of FIG.

  Next, in step S8902, BET processing and processing following lever ON are performed as game start processing. The BET processing corresponds to the processing in step S2 of FIG. 54, and the MAX insertion button 206 (or one-sheet insertion button 205) is displayed depending on the number of medals inserted from the insertion slot 203 or when there are already stored medals. The bet number is determined by the pressing operation of), and the operation of the start lever 210 is awaited. That is, the bet number of one game is determined, and the BET processing is executed until the start lever 210 can be operated. Here, it is assumed that the slot machine 1 is a 3 bet dedicated machine which can execute a game by inserting 3 medals. Then, the game is started when a predetermined operation is performed on the start lever 210 which is in the operation waiting state (lever on), and it is determined whether any winning combination is to be the result of the internal lottery. An internal lottery process for determination is executed (corresponding to the process of step S3 in FIG. 54).

  Here, in the process of FIG. 54 shown in the first embodiment, following the lottery of the internal lottery process (step S3), the process of the main game proceeds (steps S4 to S7 of FIG. 54). Then, pseudo game processing is performed before such main game processing (step S8903). Although the details will be described later with reference to FIG. 90 and the like, when it is determined to execute the simulated game in the simulated game process, the special simulated game or the special simulated game is executed.

  When the simulated game process of step S8903 ends, the main game process is performed (step S8904), and one game is ended. The details of the main game process shown in step S8904 are the same as in the first embodiment (for example, steps S4 to S7 in FIG. 54), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the processing procedure of the simulated game process shown in step S8903 of FIG. 89 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of simulated game processing. First, in step S9001, it is checked whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. For example, it is assumed that a specific state flag for determining the current game state is prepared for simulated game processing, “1” is set in the normal state, and “2” is set in the AT state indicating that the AT game is in progress. . If it is determined in step S9001 that the current gaming state is the normal state (the value of the specific state flag is "1"), the first game delay process is performed (step S9002), and thereafter the simulated game process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9001 that the current gaming state is not the normal state, it is confirmed whether it is in the AT state (step S9003). Also at this time, referring to the specific state flag, if it is in the AT state (the value of the specific state flag is "2"), the second game delay process is performed (step S9004), and then the simulated game process is ended. . In the determination of the current gaming state in steps S9001 and S9003, the game state flag described in the first embodiment may be referred to. Even when using either the specific state flag or the game state flag, the main board 409 (CPU 110) may be able to determine the normal state or the AT state by performing the process of the following example. For example, when the push order bells 1 to 8 have won (for example, when the winning is given by the instruction of the push order by the effect control board 510, etc.), the status flag is set to "2". If the winning is made to the forward bells 1 to 8, but the winning is not achieved, the status flag is set to "1".

  If it is determined in step S9003 that the state is not the AT state (the value of the specific state flag is other than "2"), error processing is performed and the game is stopped (step S9005). In the error processing in step S9005, it is assumed that an error (state error: JE) indicating a status abnormality is displayed. Specifically, for example, the error lamp 604 is turned on (or blinks) to notify the occurrence of an error, and The 7-segment LED of the number-of-payouts display LED 612 is displayed as “JE”. When the error is detected, the control such as the payout of the medal is stopped, and the error is canceled when a predetermined release process (for example, setting change operation) is performed by the person in charge of the hall.

  The slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment can execute game delay processing (described later) different between the normal state and the AT state by performing the simulated game processing as shown in FIG.

  Next, processing procedures of the first game delay process shown in step S9001 of FIG. 90 and the second game delay process shown in step S9003 will be described.

  FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of the first simulated game processing. The first simulated game process is a process related to a simulated game which is performed when the current game state is a normal state, and first, the main board 409 (CPU 110) performs a first game delay lottery (step S9101). The first game delay lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute a special simulated game, and is lottery based on a predetermined lottery table.

  FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining a lottery table regarding the game delay lottery. FIG. 93A is an example of a lottery table used in the first game delay lottery, and 2245 of the total of 16384 random numbers are associated with “delayed” of winning. According to FIG. 93 (A), the ratio for selecting “with delay” in the first game delay lottery is “approximately 1 / 7.3” (2245/16384 ≒ 1 / 7.298).

  In addition, although it is also used in other lottery tables to be described later, “delay” in this case means “delay” the start of reel control for this game (including pressing activation of reel stop button and reel stop control). If such “delay” is selected, it is possible to delay the start of various processing for this game based on the predetermined condition regarding the delay time, and to execute the pseudo game during that time. Let's do it. The delay control associated with the execution of the simulated game is similar to the control in the special simulated game of the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

  Next, in step S9102, it is determined whether or not it is won in the first game delay lottery in step S9101 (whether "with delay" is selected), and if it is won, the special simulation game is executed ( Step S9103). If it is determined in step S9102 that the player did not win in the first game delay lottery ("no delay" is selected), the process proceeds to step S9104 without executing the special pseudo game.

  Here, it will be described in detail how the “special pseudo game” in the second embodiment is performed.

  The special pseudo game in the second embodiment is a display mode of the symbol combination which is not in the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (conditional device) as the symbol combination displayed by the pseudo game is displayed as the symbol combination is displayed. Also, it is characterized in that benefits (disbursement of medals, addition of the number of AT games, state transition, etc.) are not given.

  Specifically, when the special pseudo game is started, the pressing operation of the reel stop buttons 211a, 211b and 211c is validated while the reels 301a, 301b and 301c are rotating, and the reel stop buttons 211 are stopped. When the operation is performed, each corresponding reel is pseudo-stopped. The timing at which the stop operation for each reel stop button 211 is enabled can be arbitrarily set by the main board 409 (mainly the CPU 110). The control so far is the same as that of the simulated game (special simulated game) described in the first embodiment.

  However, unlike the special pseudo game in the special pseudo game, when all reels are pseudo stopped, the symbol combination displayed by the pseudo stopped reel corresponds to the winning combination (conditional device) shown in FIG. 88. It is made a symbol combination different from the combination. Specifically, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the “replay symbol” as shown in “Replay 2” of FIG. It is assumed that a uniform symbol combination is displayed. In the first embodiment, when the "replay symbol" is aligned in this way, a benefit of re-playing (i.e., a benefit of being able to receive a lottery for a winning combination in the next game) is provided, but the second implementation In the form, as shown in FIG. 88, there is no winning combination (conditional device) corresponding to the symbol combination by the “replay symbol”, and no benefit is given. The benefit here means, for example, the payout of medals, the transition of the gaming state, and the like.

  Here, in the special simulation game of the second embodiment, as in the case of the special simulation game described in the first embodiment, the following control process is performed as a control process for shifting from the simulation game to the next game Make it possible. That is, if the stop button is not pressed (stop operation) and the start lever is turned on (start operation) in the simulated game, a predetermined time (a "delay" time determined by lottery, for example, 60 seconds) elapses. Although the next symbol display game is not started, when the player performs the above-described stop operation, start operation, etc., the next symbol display game may be started before the predetermined time has elapsed. At this time, since the player who performs the operation can start the main game to be executed after the special pseudo game earlier than when the operation is not performed, it is possible to accelerate the start of such a game. The benefit may also be given by a special simulated game.

  However, after the special simulated game, even when starting the next symbol display game before the elapse of a predetermined time, the process may not be performed until the specified time (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses. preferable. By doing this, it is possible to secure a predetermined amount of game time involved in the execution of the pseudo game, and thus an effect by a special pseudo game as will be described later (specifically, increase or decrease of game media per unit symbol display game Rate control) can be secured.

  In addition, the symbol combination displayed by the execution of the special pseudo game is not particularly limited unless it is a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination, but in the second embodiment, it is based on three sets of "replay symbols". As in the symbol combination, by displaying three sets of symbols showing the same aspect on each reel 301a, 301b, 301c, the next simulated game or the actual game is executed subsequently to the special simulated game. The effect of preventing the player from feeling unnaturally the game progress (described later) is secured.

  As described above, in the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, in the normal state, a relatively high predetermined probability (for example, 1 / 7.3, but an approximate value that does not exceed “1 / 7.3”) One of the features is that the special simulation game is executed with a winning probability higher than the probability that the game may be played, and no benefit is given by the symbol combination displayed in the special simulation game.

  Next, in step S9104 of FIG. 91, the main substrate 409 (CPU 110) performs a second delayed lottery. The second game delay lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special simulated game as described in the first embodiment, and is lottery based on a predetermined lottery table.

  FIG. 93 (B) is an example of a lottery table used in the second game delay lottery, in which 32 out of a total of 16384 random numbers are associated with the “delayed” of winning. According to FIG. 93 (B), the ratio for selecting "with delay" in the second game delay lottery is "1/512" (32/16384).

  Next, in step S9105, it is determined whether or not the player has won the second game delay lottery in step S9104 (whether "with delay" is selected). If it has been won, the special simulation game is executed ( Step S9106). In the special simulated game, for example, a simulated game as described in the first embodiment is executed. For example, when the execution of the special simulated game is determined, a lottery using a lottery table illustrated in FIG. 93C is performed to determine symbol combinations to be displayed by the special simulated game. FIG. 93 (C) shows four condition devices “(pushing order) unquestioned bell”, “watermelon”, “weak cherry”, “strong cherry” and their distribution. In the special simulated game, the corresponding symbol combination (see the "symbol combination" column in FIG. 89) is displayed according to the lottery result using the lottery table in FIG. 93 (C). Furthermore, a privilege based on the display of such a symbol combination is given. As a specific example of the special simulated game in the normal state, a transition to a different game state or a transition lottery may be considered. Further, as a specific example of the benefit by the special pseudo game (to be described later) in the AT state, addition to a transition to a different game state (including a so-called specialization zone) or a transition lottery may be considered. As described above, the special simulated game is different from the special simulated game in that a bonus is given. If it is determined in step S9104 that the game was not won in the second game delay lottery ("no delay" is selected), the process proceeds to step S9107 without executing the special simulated game.

  In step S9107, a continuous lottery is performed to determine whether to play the special pseudo game again. In the continuous lottery, a lottery is performed using the lottery table of FIG. 93 (A) as in the first game delay lottery (step S9101). Therefore, in the continuation lottery in step S9107, “delayed” is won at approximately 1 / 7.3. Then, in step S9108, the lottery result is confirmed, and in the case of winning, the process proceeds to the process of step S9103 to execute the special pseudo game again, and thereafter, the process of step S9104 and the subsequent steps is performed.

  As described above, in the first game delay process, the same lottery table (FIG. 93 (FIG. 93 (FIG. 93 (FIG. 93)) is used as a lottery whether or not to execute the special pseudo game. By using A), it is possible to set the rate of occurrence of the special pseudo game when including the loop of the pseudo game to the win rate (about 1 / 7.3 in this case) determined by the lottery table. . And, it is possible to execute the special pseudo game in the normal state with relatively high probability as shown in FIG. 93 (A).

  FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure of the second simulated game processing. The second simulated game process is a process related to a simulated game which is performed when the current game state is the AT state. The processing procedure of the second simulated gaming process is the same as the processing procedure of the first simulated gaming process shown in FIG. 91 except that the lottery table used in each delayed lottery is different, and therefore the description of the common part is omitted.

  The differences between FIG. 92 and FIG. 91 will be described. First, in step S9201, the lottery table for the special simulated game for the AT state is used in the third game delay lottery for drawing whether or not the special simulated game is executable. FIG. 93 (D) shows an example of a lottery table for a special dummy game for AT state, and is won with "delayed" (i.e. execution of a dummy game) with a probability of 1/2 (8192/16384). Even in the continuous lottery in step S9207, the continuous lottery is performed using the lottery table of FIG. 93 (D). Thus, the winning probability (1/2) regarding the special pseudo game in the AT state is higher than the winning probability (approximately 1 / 7.3) in the lottery table of the special pseudo game for the normal state shown in FIG. 93 (A). Although it is set extremely high, by setting in this way, it is possible to increase the occurrence rate of the special pseudo game, so in the AT state where the increase speed of the game medium (medal) is faster than the normal state, The number of increases per unit period (net increase rate) can be suppressed.

  In step S9206, the lottery table for the special simulated game for AT state is used in the fourth game delay lottery for drawing whether or not to execute the special simulated game. FIG. 93 (E) shows an example of a lottery table of a special dummy game for AT state, and the execution of the special dummy game is determined with a winning probability of 1/256 (64/16384). The possibility that the benefits that can be granted by the special pseudo game in the AT state may be different from the benefits in the normal state (for example, there is a benefit of adding the number of AT games, etc.) is as described above. The winning probability of the special simulated game is different from the normal state.

  As described above, as described with reference to FIGS. 89 to 93, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the special simulated game can be executed relatively frequently. And, according to such special pseudo game, even if the symbol combination which is not in the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination (conditional device) is displayed and the symbol combination is displayed, it is a bonus like a real game or a special pseudo game Is not granted. Then, after the special simulation game is performed (including after repetition of the special simulation game), since the main game is executed without the need to insert a medal, it is a continuous game consisting of the special simulation game and the main game connected to it When viewed, the relationship between the inserted number of medals and the deducted number of the paid-out number is the same as in the case where only the main game is executed.

  Specifically, for example, when the winning combination in which nine medals are paid out in the lottery for the main game is won, and only the main game is executed, three medals are inserted and one symbol display game (this As a result of the game of counting the game and the simulated game once and the payout of nine medals, six medals increase in one symbol display game. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, assuming that the winning combination similar to the lottery for the main game is won, it is relatively likely to occur before execution of the main game (in the example of the normal state, about 1 / 7.3, AT state In the example of the special simulated game is executed at 1/2). And, for example, if one special pseudo game is executed before the main game, three medals are inserted and two symbol display games (special pseudo game and main game) are played 9 As a result of the medals being paid out, six medals are increased in the two symbol display games. That is, the number of medals increased per symbol display game is three, and the increase in the number of game media (also referred to as a net increase rate) per unit symbol display game is suppressed as compared to the case where only the main game is played. Ru. In addition, if the execution probability of the special pseudo game is set higher, the effect of suppressing the net increase rate is further improved.

  Further, not only when game media (medal) increase, but also when medals are consumed without being able to win a winning combination with payout, if the same calculation is performed as above, the special pseudo game is It can be understood that the consumption speed of gaming media per unit symbol display game is suppressed by being executed with a relatively high probability. And if the execution probability of the special pseudo game is set higher, the suppression effect on the consumption speed of the game medium is further improved.

  As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the effect of suppressing the increase / decrease rate of the game medium per unit symbol display game by the special pseudo game is exhibited, the excessive shooting feeling is suppressed, and the game medium By properly adjusting the increase and decrease per unit period, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that entertains the player with appropriate playability. Then, according to such a slot machine 1, it is assumed that the probability of winning the winning combination is determined in advance, and the privilege increase rate as a gaming machine (proportion of game media to increase per game) is determined. Also, it is possible to substantially adjust the increase / decrease rate of the game medium which the player feels during the game period.

  Further, according to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, symbol combinations (for example, three “replay symbols” in the first embodiment) which are not included in the winning combination (conditional device) in the special pseudo game When the special pseudo game or the real game is executed next to the special pseudo game by displaying the), it is possible to realize the game progress without making the player feel uncomfortable. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a natural game while suppressing the increase / decrease rate of the game medium per unit symbol display game as described above.

  Furthermore, in the special simulation game according to the second embodiment, even if symbol combinations not displayed on the winning combination (conditional device) are displayed, special effects such as other real games and special simulation games are not provided. Even if the simulated game occurs relatively frequently, the player can be prevented from being overly tense.

  Further, since the special simulated game in the second embodiment does not involve awarding of a benefit, the gaming state does not shift before and after the game (a symbol display game in which the special simulated game is executed). Therefore, according to the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, it is possible to provide a high-reliability game in which the feeling of tension has been alleviated without causing the player to have an impression that a special game has appeared. it can.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the processing procedure illustrated in FIG. 91 or FIG. 92 is performed, a lottery relating to the execution of the special simulated game (second game delay lottery in step S9104, fourth of step S9204 Since a lottery (first game delay lottery in step S9101 and third game delay lottery in step S9201) is performed prior to the game delay lottery), one game involving the insertion of game media In the case where the special simulated game giving the benefit and the special simulated game not giving the benefit are simultaneously won, the special simulated game is preferentially provided, and then the special simulated game is provided. At this time, although the bonus is not given depending on the special pseudo game, there is a possibility that the special pseudo game will occur thereafter, so that the player has an effect of maintaining the player's expectation for the bonus. In addition, when a special pseudo game is executed before the special pseudo game is executed, the symbol display game is provided at least one more time by the special pseudo game being executed, so the special pseudo game is performed until the bonus is granted. The game time of can be extended. As described above, by prolonging the game time until the award of the benefit, it is possible to suppress the decrease in sales on the hall side.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the processing procedure shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92 is partially changed, and the lottery concerning the execution of the special simulated game (first game delay lottery in step S9101, step S9201 When the third game delay lottery) is executed, the lottery regarding the execution of the special simulation game thereafter (second game delay lottery in step S9104, fourth game delay lottery in step S9204) is not performed, or by the lottery Even if it is won, the special simulated game may not be executed. In such a case, even if the special pseudo game giving the benefit and the special pseudo game not giving the bonus are simultaneously won in one game accompanied by the insertion of the game medium, only the special pseudo game not giving the bonus is As it is to be implemented, it is possible to suppress the decline in sales of holes. Furthermore, even if such processing is performed, it is impossible for the player to recognize that the special pseudo game in which the benefit can be awarded is won from the player, so the player does not feel uncomfortable and the interest is reduced. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the processing procedure shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92 is partially changed, and the lottery concerning the execution of the special simulated game (first game delay lottery in step S9101, step S9201 A lottery relating to the execution of the special simulated game (second game delayed lottery in step S9104, fourth game delayed lottery in step S9204) is performed earlier than the third game delayed lottery), and the special simulated game is executed. In the case where the game is played, a lottery relating to the subsequent execution of the special pseudo game may not be performed, or the special pseudo game may not be performed even if the player wins the lottery. In such a case, when the special pseudo game giving the benefit and the special pseudo game not giving the bonus are simultaneously won in one game with the insertion of the game medium, the special pseudo game drawing result gives the benefit. Since the lottery result of the special simulated game to be obtained is not affected, the player who expects the grant of the benefit is given a sense of security, and the effect of maintaining the sense of expectation for the grant of the benefit is exerted.

  As described above, the special pseudo game according to the second embodiment is to suppress excessive increase (or consumption) of game media in the normal state or the AT state, but a bonus is given by its execution. It is not a thing. Therefore, if the special pseudo game is executed in a specific state where game media are increased intensively, such as during a bonus, for example, the fun in the bonus game may be lost and the interest may be reduced. In order to overcome such a problem, when performing the processing illustrated in FIG. 89 to FIG. 92, it is first determined whether or not it is in a specific state such as during a bonus, and if it is in a specific state. It may be controlled so as not to perform a series of processing related to the special simulated game. At this time, the player can be entertained without losing the original interest in the specific state. However, even in such a case, it is preferable to determine the error processing as shown in step S9005 of FIG. 90 from the aspect of providing a safe gaming machine.

  In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the fact that the special pseudo game has been executed may be output by an external signal to notify the outside of the slot machine 1 (game machine). Specifically, for example, when a symbol display game by a special pseudo game is played, information that one game is played is output to a data display, a hall computer or the like by an external signal. By doing this, it is possible to accurately transmit the number of symbol display games, so providing appropriate information to the player who judges whether or not to play the game by looking at the data display. Can. Further, in a model or the like equipped with a ceiling function, it is possible to expect an effect of preventing a player who has seen the data display feeling a loss. In addition, it can be expected that useful information can be accurately provided to a hall that performs management and monitoring by a hall computer.

  Although the above is one form of the slot machine 1 of the present invention, the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention can be applied to gaming machines other than slot machines, for example, pachinko machines, gaming machines formed by combining a pachinko machine and a slot machine, and the like.

1 slot machine 10 gap 21 transparent plate 50 model unit 90 front opening / closing member 100 outer main body 100a rotary shaft 101 bottom plate 102 side plate 102 side plate 102a convex portion 102b guard portion 103 top plate 104a heat radiation port 104b code outlet 105 partition plate 106 stepped portion 107 Piece 108 attachment piece 109 opening 110 medal discharge device 110a device body 110b hopper 110c discharge port 110d overflow rod 110e payout sensor 111 auxiliary storage box for game medals 111a full medal sensor 112 power supply device 112a device case 112b top plate 112c rear plate 112d front plate 112e side plate 112f inclined plate 112g air hole 112h leg 112i air space 112j step 112k mounting piece 112m protrusion 112m-1 protrusion 112m through hole 112r bottom plate 112s Plate 112t Setting key switch 112u Reset switch 112v Power switch 113 Wiring relay member 114 Boss hole 115 Rail member 116 Rail member 117 Stopper 118 Attachment 119 Main body side wiring 120 Mounting plate 121 Cover body 122 Connector board 123 Connector board 124 Connector 125 connector 126 Opening 127 The opening 128 Support cylinder 129 Wiring duct 131 External relay terminal board 132 Through hole 133 Air vent 200 Door shaped front member 200a Through hole 201 Medal tray 202 Operation part 203 Medal slot 205 One sheet loading button 206 MAX loading button 207 medal selector 207a solenoid 207b input sensor 208 medal return button 209 storage release switch 210 start lever 211a left reel stop button 211b middle reel Stop button 211c Right reel stop button 212 Medals 樋 213 Return lever 214 Transparent window 214a Transparent plate 214b Edge member 214c Through hole 214d Through hole 215 Locking device 215a Base member 215b Support piece 216 Forehead frame 217 Light emitting unit 217a Light emitter 217a-1 Light source 217a-2 Light guiding plate 217b Reflecting member 218 Fixing member 219 Recessed groove 300 Figure fluctuation display device 301a Left reel 301b Middle reel 301c Right reel 302 Device case 303 Drive means 304 Bottom plate 305 Top plate 305 Top plate 305 Top plate 306 Right side plate 307 Left Plate 308 Rear plate 309 Upper swash plate 310 Lower swash plate 311 Handle 312 Reel substrate 313 Cable 315 Retaining portion 316 Handles 321a to 321c Reel band 331a Left reel position sensor 331b Middle reel position sensor 331c Right reel position sensor 341a Left reel drive motor 341b Middle reel drive motor 341c Right reel drive motor 400 Case member 401 Symbol display window 402 Reinforcing bar 402a Guide portion 403 Bottom plate 404 Side plate 405 Back plate 406 Top plate 407 Reinforcement member 408 Wiring member space 409 Main board 410 Boss 411 Wiring window 412 Concave step 413 Taper 414 Wheel 415 鍔 416 Hook 417 Triangle space 418 Temporary fixing member shelf 420 Hinge bracket 420a Fixing member 420b Turning member 420c Short link 420d Long link 420e Fixing piece 420f Bearing Piece 420g Polymerization area 420h Polymerization area 420h Polymerization area 420j Pin hole 420k Pin 421 Lock piece 422 Handle opening 423 Case side wiring 424 Harness 425 Connector 426 Harness 427 Connection Kuta 427a Free hole 427b Ear piece 427c Screw holder 429 Holder main body 429a Receiving cylinder 430 Through hole 431 Attachment piece 432 Button type panel fastener 433 Bench part 434 Bench side plate 435 Finger piece 436 Finger hook part 437 Cable groove 438 Wiring port 440 Guide rail 442 Locking hole 443 Skylight 444 Reinforcement band 449 Main board 500 Image display body 500s Broken line area 501 Frame member (display panel)
502 lighting device 503 substrate 505 light transmitting cover plate 506 tube frame 507 light transmitting cover 508 receiving portion 509 engaging portion 510 effect control substrate 512 speaker 600 upper beam 601 fixing member 602 tool 603 screw 604 error lamp 606 replay lamp 608 start Ramp 610 Ramp 614 Ramp 623a Down-fall line 523b Up-Rise line 700 Note connector 701 Fixed sheath member 701a Prevention piece 702 Rod 702a Shaft hole portion 702b Hook wall 703 Retaining shaft 703a Spring 704 Stopper 705 Groove 706 Picking piece 1110 CPU
1112 ROM
1114 RAM,
1116 I / O interface 1130 I / O interface 1200 Hall computer

However, in the conventional roll-to-roll type gaming machine, there is a possibility that the interest to the game may be reduced .

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which the interest in the game is not easily reduced .

In order to achieve the above object, according to the present invention, a lottery means for lottery for a winning combination, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols attached thereto and capable of rotating, and reel control means for controlling the operation of the reels When the reel is stopped, symbol display means is provided with a symbol display area for displaying a plurality of symbols of the symbols attached to the reel in a visible manner, and the symbols displayed in the symbol display area In the award giving means for giving an award based on the combination and the control of the reel by the reel control means, the symbol combination based on the winning combination selected in the lottery by the lottery means can be displayed in the symbol display area At least a normal control for controlling the rotation of the reel and a special control for controlling the rotation of the reel by a control different from the normal control are included, and a lottery different from the lottery by the lottery means is performed. When the control of the reel by the separate lottery means and the special control is being performed, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the symbol display area, and the control to teach that the predetermined privilege is given to the player is performed. Special state control means, and the special state control means is configured to be able to display the predetermined symbol combination in the symbol display area when the result of the lottery by the separate lottery means is a specific result, When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a special result and the result of the lottery by the different lottery means is the specific result, the control by the special control is performed on the plurality of reels, Subsequently, control for teaching that the player is given a predetermined privilege by the special state control means is executed, and after the control by the special state control means is ended, the special control is executed. By performing control by the normal control on a plurality of the reels in the same game, the player can be controlled in teaching that the player who is performed by the special state control means is given a predetermined benefit A specific symbol combination corresponding to the special result selected by the lottery means is displayed in the symbol display area, which is a symbol combination similar to the combination of symbols corresponding to a predetermined benefit taught for Is permitted by the special state control means when the control to teach the player that the predetermined privilege is given by the special state control means is executed by the permitted special state control means The specific symbol combination is the same symbol combination as the combination of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined benefits taught to the player in the control that teaches that the predetermined bonus is given to the player being played. The process is terminated based on the display in the symbol display area, and at least one of the plurality of reels performed when teaching that the player is given a predetermined privilege by the control of the special state control means. Is characterized in that the direction of rotation is opposite to the direction of rotation of the plurality of reels which is usually performed by the control of the control .

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine which is less likely to reduce the interest in gaming .

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which a lottery for a winning combination is performed based on the execution of a predetermined operation, and a unit game in which symbol combinations based on the result of the lottery are displayed,
Multiple rotating bodies, each with multiple symbols,
Start operation means for starting rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
Lottery means for executing a lottery of winning combinations when the start operation means is operated;
Stop operation means for stopping the plurality of rotating bodies in rotation;
Symbol display means for displaying a symbol combination based on a winning combination obtained by the lottery when the plurality of rotating bodies are stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A winning combination benefit granting means capable of granting a game medium as a benefit based on the symbol combination displayed based on the winning combination drawn by the lottery means;
Gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state of any of a plurality of gaming states including at least a gaming state and an advantageous gaming state more advantageous than the gaming state;
Another lottery means capable of executing, as the different lottery different from the lottery by the lottery means, whether or not the special game is to be played when the start operation means is operated;
When winning the different lottery by the different lottery means and performing the special game, a predetermined symbol not included in the symbol combination based on the winning combination by the operation of the stop operation means before the unit game is finished Different lottery result display means capable of displaying a combination;
A game state in which the game state controlled by the game state control means is maintained without changing in the next unit game while the predetermined symbol combination is displayed by the different lottery result display means in the current unit game Maintenance means,
A game machine characterized by comprising: